specifications - Dunn County

SPECIFICATIONS 

Two Station Wall Mount Water Coolers 

with WaterSentry ® VII Filter System – Barrier-Free 

Access (Adult & Child) – NSF/ANSI 61 Compliant 

Models LZTL8C and LZSTL8C 

GENERAL 

Self-contained, wall hung electric refrigerated water cooler. 

Chilling capacity of 50°F drinking water, based upon 80°F inlet 

water and 90°F ambient. 

Model LZSTL8C has self-closing Easy-Touch Controls on front 

and both right and left sides. 

Model LZTL8C has self-closing Easy-Touch Controls on the front 

only. 

All models have a hooded stream projector with Easy-Touch 

Controls that require less than 3 pounds of force to activate. 

Valve with built-in flow regulator provide constant stream from 20 

to 105 psi water pressure. Bubbler orifice fully protected to meet 

all sanitary codes. 

NOTE: In special circumstances where both sides of unit may be 

used simultaneously it is preferable to install two single filtered 

units to obtain adequate stream height regardless of pressure. 

Does not apply to non-refrigerated units. 

These model coolers consists of a refrigerated lower unit which 

requires a water supply, drain outlet and electrical supply. 

ADA COMPLIANT 

These Water Coolers comply with the requirements of A.D.A. 

(Americans with Disabilities Act) when properly installed. Unit is 

compliant if installed in an alcove and is also compliant when 

mounted on an exposed wall if a wing wall is located on the left 

side or if LKAPREZL apron is installed under upper unit. Also 

meets the guidelines for children’s environments providing the 

floor to orifice height is 30" or less and proper clear floor space 

is provided for parallel approach. (Based on Architectural and 

Transportation Barriers Compliance Board final ruling.) Check 

Local and State Codes. 

NO LEAD DESIGN 

These Water Coolers are certified to be lead-free as defined by 

the Safe Drinking Water Act. Elkay Water Coolers are manufactured 

with a waterway system utilizing copper components 

and completely lead-free materials. These waterways have no 

lead because all lead materials, such as leaded brass, have been 

removed. All joints are brazed using silver solder only. No lead 

solder is permitted. A strainer with an easily cleanable screen is 

provided to allow trapping and convenient removal of waterborne 

particulate of 140 microns and larger prior to their entry into the 

water cooler. 

WATERSENTRY ® VII FILTER SYSTEM 

Elkay Water Coolers are equipped with the WaterSentry VII Filter 

System. Tested to NSF/ANSI Standard 53 yields a reduction of 

soluble and insoluble lead content to less than 0.015mg/l. This 

translates to lead reduction levels of 93% to 99%. Class 1 particulate 

reduction as tested per NSF/ANSI 42. Removes over 

97.5% of free available chlorine which provides Class 1 performance 

as tested to NSF/ANSI 42. Provides taste and odor 

improvement. 

CAPACITIES CHART 

**GPH of 50°F Drinking Water 

Full Glass† Ship. 

Model Base 

Room Temperature °F 

Rated Load Filler Wt. 

Number Rate 70°F 80°F 90°F 100°F Watts Amps Option Lbs. 

LZSTL8C 8.0 9.7 8.8 8.0 7.2 370 4.0 Yes 92 

LZTL8C 8.0 9.7 8.8 8.0 7.2 370 4.0 Yes 92 

**Based on 80°F inlet water temperature. †Glass filler available at extra cost. 

Requires factory preparation to receive glass filler – upper unit only. 

Rated watts shown are based on operational (run) time, in compliance with A.R.I. 

Standard 1010 conditions. Specific applications will determine the actual watts 

consumed per hour. Watts consumed will be based on number of people 

served per hour (usage), ambient temperatures, and inlet water temperature. 

COOLING SYSTEM 

Motor Compressor: Hermetically sealed, reciprocating type, 

115V, 60 Hz single phase. Sealed-in lifetime oil supply. Equipped 

with electric cord and three prong molded rubber plug (domestic 

models). 

Model LZSTL8C 

Model LZTL8C 

RATED FOR INDOOR APPLICATIONS ONLY 

Condenser: Fan cooled, copper tube with aluminum fins. Fan 

motor is permanently lubricated. 

Cooling Unit: Combination tube-tank type. Tube portion is 

continuous coil of copper tubing. Tank is stainless steel. Fully 

insulated with EPS foam which meets Underwriters Laboratories 

Inc. requirements for self-extinguishing material. 

Refrigerant Control: Refrigerant HFC-134a is controlled by 

accurately calibrated capillary tube for positively trouble-free 

operation. 

Temperature Control: Enclosed adjustable thermostat is factory 

pre-set. Requires no adjustment other than for altitude requirements. 

Easily accessible. 

CONSTRUCTION 

Frame: Galvanized structural steel chassis supports refrigeration 

system and fastens to wall. Provides increased structural integrity 

and rigidity to cooler. 

Stainless Steel Basin: Type 304 one piece polished to a 

uniform Elkay bright luster finish. Basin has integral drain grid, 

embossed bubbler pad. No exposed fasteners. 

Exclusive Flexi-Guard ® Safety Bubbler*: Innovative design 

utilizes an infused anti-microbial pliable polyester elastomer to 

prevent accidental mouth injuries. Flexes on impact, then returns 

to original position. Strong. Abrasion-resistant. Anti-sweat. 

Keyed in loca tion to prevent rotation. 

Upper Shroud: Contoured shock-absorbing, provides additional 

protection against accidental injury. No exposed fasteners. 

Lower Shroud: One piece easy to remove and replace. Allows 

access to internal components from three sides. 

Cabinet: Cabinet design allows for flush to wall mounting. No 

recess space is required. 

Color Selection: Unless otherwise specified cabinet is two-tone 

Gray on upper shroud with textured Gray Vinyl lower shroud. 

Stainless Steel lower shrouds available at extra cost. 

Protected by Elkay’s 5 Year Limited Warranty on the refrigeration 

system of the unit. 

Elkay Pressure-Type Water Coolers are designed to operate on 

20 psi to 105 psi supply line pressure. If inlet pressure is above 

105 psi, a pressure regulator must be installed in the supply line. 

Any damage caused by reason of connecting this product to supply 

line pressures lower than 20 psi or higher than 105 psi is not 

covered by the warranty. 

STANDARDS 

Elkay Electric Air Cooled Water Coolers are listed 

by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. and comply with 

both Canadian and U.S. requirements. 

These units comply with A.R.I. Standard 1010. 

This cooler is certified by WQA to lead-free compliance including 

NSF/ANSI 61-ANNEX G, AB 1953. 

In keeping with our policy of continuing product improvement, Elkay reserves the right to change 

product specifications without notice. Please visit elkayusa.com for most current version of Elkay 

product specification sheets. 

Elkay 

elkayusa.com 

2222 Camden Court 

Oak Brook, IL 60523 

This specification describes an Elkay product with design, quality and functional benefits to the 

user. When making a comparison of other producers’ offerings, be certain these features are not 

overlooked. 

Printed in U.S.A. 

©2011 Elkay 

(Rev. 4/11) 8-19F

INSURE PROPER VENTILATION BY MAINTAINING 6" (152mm) MINIMUM CLEARANCE FROM CABINET LOUVERS TO WALL. 

F = 7/16 BOLT HOLES FOR FASTENING UNIT TO WALL 

D = ELECTRICAL SUPPLY (3) WIRE RECESSED BOX DUPLEX OUTLET 

C = 1-1/2 TRAP NOT FURNISHED 

FROM WALL 

B = RECOMMENDED LOCATION OUT IN. 2 STUB DRAIN DRAIN. NOMINAL 1-1/2" ACCOMODATE TO OUTLET WASTE FOR 

OUT MAXIMUM (76mm) 3" WALL. 

FROM 

WATER RECOMMENDED = A TUBE. 

COPPER UNPLATED O.D. 3/8 ACCEPT TO FURNISHED (NOT VALVE SHUT-OFF LOCATION. SUPPLY 

LEGEND 

VIEW 

SIDE VIEW 

FRONT 

Two Station Wall Mount Water Coolers 

with WaterSentry ® VII Filter System – Barrier-Free 

Access (Adult & Child) – NSF/ANSI 61 Compliant 

Models LZTL8C and LZSTL8C 

ROUGH-IN DIMENSIONS 

WaterSentry ® VII Filter System 

OPERATION OF QUICK CONNECT FITTINGS 

SIMPLY PUSH IN 

TUBE TO ATTACH 

TUBE IS SECURED 

IN POSITION 

PUSH IN COLLET 

TO RELEASE TUBE 

IMPORTANT! 

INSTALLER PLEASE NOTE: 

This water cooler has been designed and built to provide water to the 

user which has not been altered by materials in the cooler waterways. 

The grounding of electrical equipment such as telephone, computers, 

etc., to water lines is a common procedure. This grounding may be 

in the building but may also occur away from the building. This grounding 

can cause electrical feedback into a water cooler creating an electrolysis 

which creates a metallic taste or causes an increase in the metal content 

of the water. This condition is avoidable by installing the cooler using the 

proper materials as shown below. 

NOTICE 

This water cooler must be connected to the water supply using a dielectric 

coupling. The cooler is furnished with a non-metallic strainer 

which meets this requirement. 

The drain trap which is provided by the installer should also be plastic to 

completely isolate the cooler from the building plumbing system. 

A B C 

PUSHING TUBE IN BEFORE 

PULLING IT OUT HELPS TO 

RELEASE TUBE 

FRONT VIEW 

RATED FOR INDOOR APPLICATIONS ONLY 

SIDE VIEW 

LEGEND 

A = RECOMMENDED WATER SUPPLY LOCATION. SHUT-OFF VALVE (NOT FURNISHED TO ACCEPT 3/8 O.D. UNPLATED COPPER TUBE. 

3" (76mm) MAXIMUM OUT FROM WALL. 

B = RECOMMENDED LOCATION FOR WASTE OUTLET TO ACCOMODATE 1-1/2" NOMINAL DRAIN. DRAIN STUB 2 IN. OUT FROM WALL 

C = 1-1/2 TRAP NOT FURNISHED 

D = ELECTRICAL SUPPLY (3) WIRE RECESSED BOX DUPLEX OUTLET 

F = 7/16 BOLT HOLES FOR FASTENING UNIT TO WALL 

INSURE PROPER VENTILATION BY MAINTAINING 6" (152mm) MINIMUM CLEARANCE FROM CABINET LOUVERS TO WALL. 

Elkay 

8-19F (Rev. 4/11) 



elkayusa.com 


©2011 Elkay

PRODUCT FEATURES 

• Complete filtered cooler and bottle filling 

station in a consolidated space saving ADAcompliant 

design 

• Sanitary, no-touch, sensor activation with 

automatic 30-second shut-off timer 

• WaterSentry ® Plus 3000 gallon filter included 

• Flexi-Guard ® StreamSaver Bubbler 

• Silver Ion anti-microbial protection 

• Quick fill rate is 1.1 gpm for refrigerated units 

and 1.5 gpm for non-refrigerated units 

• Laminar flow provides minimal splash 

• Real drain system eliminates standing water 

• Visual user interface display includes: 

• Filter Monitor indicating when replacement 

is necessary 

• Green Ticker counting the quantity of 16 

oz. bottles saved from the landfill for nonrefrigerated 

units and 12 oz. bottles for 

refrigerated units 

Unit shall provide 8.0 gph of 50 0 F water at 90 0 F 

ambient and 80 0 F inlet water. Bottle filling unit 

shall include an electronic sensor for no-touch 

activation with an automatic 30-second shut-off 

timer. Shall provide 1.1-1.5* gpm flow rate with 

laminar flow to minimize splashing. Shall include 

antimicrobial protected plastic components to 

prevent mold and mildew. Cooler unit shall have 

pushbar activation and water-efficient Stream- 

Saver bubbler. Shall include the WaterSentry® 

Plus filter, certified to NSF/ANSI 42 and 53 for 

lead reduction, with visual monitor to indicate 

when replacement is necessary. Bottle Filling 

unit shall meet ADA guidelines for parallel approach. 

Cooler shall meet ADA guidelines for 

frontal or parallel approach. Unit shall be leadfree 

design which meets Safe Drinking Water Act 

and is certified to NSF/ANSI 61 and California 

AB1953. Unit shall be certified to UL399 and 

CAN/CSA 22.2 No. 120. 

EZH2O T M System 

Cooler/Bottle Filling Station 

Models LZS8WS and LZSTL(R)8WS 

IMAGES 

Model LZS8WSLK shown. 

Includes Single Filtered 

Cooler with Bottle Filling 

Station. 

¨ Vandal-resistant StreamSaver Bubbler 

¨ 51300C Replacement filter 

Model LZSTL8WSLK 

shown. Includes Bi-Level 

Filtered Cooler with 

Bottle Filling Station 

¨ 51300C_3PK Replacement filter 3-pack 

¨ 36292C Receptacle Adaptor Plug 

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 

Ideal for use in: 

• Educational facilities 

• Healthcare facilities 

• Sport and fitness centers 

• Airports 

• Office buildings 

• Other commercial buildings 

SUGGESTED SPECIFICATION 

*Fill rate may vary slightly depending on existing refrigeration systems in the field 



Phone: 630-572-3192 

Web: Elkayusa.com 

APPLICATIONS 

Third Party Certified to: 

• UL399 and CAN/CSA 22.2 No. 120 

• Lead-free compliance including 

NSF/ANSI 61 and CA AB1953 

In keeping with our policy of continuing product improvement, Elkay reserves the right to change specifications 

without notice. 

Please visit elkayusa.com for the most current version. 

© 2010 Elkay 

14-57C (4/2010)

Job Name: ________________________________________ 

Date: __________________________________ Qty: ______ 

Page 2 

EZH2O is designed to fit on an EZ Cooler which is properly 

installed per the EZ Spec Sheet rough-in design. 

*Rated for Indoor Use Only 

ELKAY® 


Single Cooler Installation 

Bi-Level Cooler Installation 

Installation Notes: 

• Unit will mount on bracket attached to wall by 6 holes (as shown above) 

• Water and electrical will connect thru a hole punched into basin. 

Basin will be pre-punched. 

• Refer to page 3 for single EZ rough-in. 

• Refer to page 4 for bi-level EZ rough-in. 

Contact Info (Name, Phone, Email): _____________________ 

__________________________________________________ 

__________________________________________________ 

Approval for Manufacture Signature and Date: 

__________________________________________________ 

Specifications and measurements are subject to change 

without notification. 

Please visit elkayusa.com for most current version. 



Phone: 630-572-3192 


Models LZS8WS 

and LZSTL8WS

Page 3 


ELKAY® 


*Reduce Height By 3” For Installation Of Children’s ADA Cooler 

LEGEND: 

A = Recommended Water Supply Location 3/8 O.D. Unplated Copper Tube Connect Stub With Shut-Off (By Others) - 3” (76mm) 

Maximum Out From Wall. 

B = Recommended Location For Waste Outlet To Accommodate 1-1/2” Nominal Drain. Drain Stub 2” Out From Wall. 

C = 1-1/2” Trap (Not Furnished) 

D = Electrical Supply (3) Wire Recessed Box Duplex Outlet 

E = Insure proper ventilation by maintaining 6” (152mm) minimum clearance from cabinet louvers to wall. 

F = 7/16” Bolt Holes For Fastening Unit To Wall 






Phone: 630-572-3192 


EZ Style Single Level 

Cooler Installation

*Reduce Height By 3” For Installation Of Children’s ADA Cooler 

LEGEND: 

A = Recommended Water Supply Location 3/8 O.D. Unplated Copper Tube Connect Stub With Shut-Off (By Others) - 3” (76mm) 

Maximum Out From Wall. 

B = Recommended Location For Waste Outlet To Accommodate 1-1/2” Nominal Drain. Drain Stub 2” Out From Wall. 

C = 1-1/2” Trap (Not Furnished) 

D = Electrical Supply (3) Wire Recessed Box Duplex Outlet 

E = Insure proper ventilation by maintaining 6” (152mm) minimum clearance from cabinet louvers to wall. 

F = 7/16” Bolt Holes For Fastening Unit To Wall 

Page 4 


ELKAY® 







Phone: 630-572-3192 


EZ Style Bi-Level 

Cooler Installation

® 

Z415B 

BODY ASSEMBLY 

W/ "TYPE B" STRAINER 

SPECIFICATION SHEET 

TAG _______ 

Dimensional Data (inches and [ mm ]) are Subject to Manufacturing Tolerances and Change Without Notice 

Dimensions In Inches 

ENGINEERING SPECIFICATION: ZURN ZN415B 

Floor and shower drain, Dura-Coated cast iron body with bottom outlet, combination invertible membrane clamp and adjustable collar 

with seepage slots and "TYPE B" polished nickel bronze, light-duty strainer. 

OPTIONS (Check/specify appropriate options) 

PIPE SIZE (Specify size/type) OUTLET 'E' BODY HT. DIM. 

2 thru 4 [51 thru 102] _____ IC Inside Caulk 3-7/8 [98] 

2 thru 4 [51 thru 102] _____ IG Inside Gasket 3-7/8 [98] 

2 [51] _____ IP Threaded 2-3/8 [60] 

3 [76] _____ IP Threaded 2-5/8 [67] 

4 [102] _____ IP Threaded 2-7/8 [73] 

6 [152] _____ IP Threaded 2-3/4 [70] 

2 thru 4 [51 thru 102] _____ NH No-Hub 3-7/8 [98] 

2 thru 4 [51 thru 102] _____ NL Neo-Loc 3-3/4 [95] 

PREFIXES 

___ ZB D.C.C.I. Body Assembly w/ Polished Bronze Top 

___ ZN D.C.C.I. Body Assembly w/ Polished Nickel Bronze Top* 

SUFFIXES 

___ -AA All Acid Resisting Epoxy 

___ -SR Stabilizer Ring 

___ -AR Acid Resisting Epoxy Coated Cast Iron 

___ -TC Neo-Loc Test Cap Gasket (2-4 [51-102] NL Outlet Only) 

___ -C Clamp Collar for -90 Side Outlet Body 

___ -U 1 - 3 [25 - 76] High Extension Adapter 

___ -CP Chrome-Plated Bronze Top 

___ -DC Debris Cover (Field Assembled) 

___ -DP Decorative Polished Top 

___ -V 

___ -VP 

___ -W 

Backwater Valve 

Vandal-Proof Secured Top 

Winter Closure Plug 

___ -EF 3/8 [16] Extension Frame 

___ -Y Sediment Bucket 

___ -G Galvanized Cast Iron 

___ -4 4 [102] Diameter Funnel (Z328) 

___ -HD Heavy-Duty Slotted Grate (ZN 5 [127] & 6 [152] Sizes Only) 

___ -OF Oval Funnel (Z329-7) (6 - 10 [152 - 254] Strainers Only) 

___ -P Trap Primer Connection (Specify 1/2 [13] or 3/4 [19]) 

___ -SA Stabilizer Assembly (See Z1035) 

___ -SQ Stabilizer Q-Deck (See Z1035-Q) 

*REGULARLY FURNISHED UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED 

___ -18 

___ -90 

REV. P 

Approx. 

Wt. Lbs. 

[kg] 

Leveling Ring (See Z400-18) 

90° Threaded Side Outlet Body Assembly 

(2 [51], 3 [76] Only) 

DWG. NO. 58789 

Strainer 

Open Area 

Sq. In. [cm 2 ] 

A B Strainer 

K 

K' 

Pipe Size Dia. Min. Max. Min. Max. 

2-3 [51-76] 5 [127] 1 [25] 1-1/2 [38] 1-3/32 [28] 2-1/4 [57] 11 [5] 8 [52] 

2-3-4 [51-76-102] 6 [152] 1 [25] 1-25/32 [45] 1-13/32 [36] 2-17/32 [64] 13 [6] 9 [58] 

2-3-4 [51-76-102] 7 [178] 1 [25] 2-1/8 [54] 1-23/32 [44] 2-7/8 [73] 14 [6] 12 [77] 

3-4 [76-102] 8 [203] 1-5/32 [30] 2-1/8 [54] 1-3/4 [44] 2-7/8 [73] 16 [7] 18 [116] 

6 [152] 8 [203] 1-5/32 [30] 2-1/8 [54] 1-3/4 [44] 2-7/8 [73] 18 [8] 18 [116] 

6 [152] 10 [254] 1-7/16 [37] 2-1/2 [64] 2 [51] 3-1/4 [83] 22 [10] 26 [168] 

DATE: 06/20/11 C.N. NO. 121440 

PRODUCT NO. Z415B 

ZURN INDUSTRIES, LLC ♦ SPECIFICATION DRAINAGE OPERATION ♦ 1801 Pittsburgh Ave. ♦ Erie, PA 16514 

Phone: 814/455-0921 ♦ Fax: 814/454-7929 ♦ World Wide Web: www.zurn.com 

In Canada: ZURN INDUSTRIES LIMITED ♦ 3544 Nashua Drive ♦ Mississauga, Ontario L4V1L2 ♦ Phone: 905/405-8272 Fax: 905/405-1292

Features 

• Vitreous china 

• Wall-mount 

• With hanger 

• With overflow 

• Drilled for concealed arm carrier 

• Optional soap dispenser hole on left (-L) or right (-R) 

• 8″ (203 mm) centers, 4″ (102 mm), centers or single 

hole 

• 21-1/4″ (540 mm) x 18-1/8″ (460 mm) 

Codes/Standards Applicable 

Specified model meets or exceeds the following: 

• ADA 

• ICC/ANSI A117.1 

• CSA B651 

• OBC 

• ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1 

Specified Model 

WALL-MOUNT LAVATORY 

K-2005 

ALSO K-2006, K-2007 

ADA 

KINGSTONTM 

CSA B651 

OBC 

Colors/Finishes 

• 0: White 

• Other: Refer to Price Book for additional colors/finishes 

Accessories 

• CP: Polished Chrome 


Model Description Colors/Finishes 

K-2005 Lavatory with 4″ (102 mm) centers less soap dispenser hole ❑ 0 ❑ Other_____ 

K-2005-L Lavatory with 4″ (102 mm) centers with soap dispenser hole on left ❑ 0 ❑ Other_____ 

K-2005-R Lavatory with 4″ (102 mm) centers with soap dispenser hole on right ❑ 0 ❑ Other_____ 

K-2006 Lavatory with 8″ (203 mm) centers less soap dispenser hole ❑ 0 ❑ Other_____ 

K-2007 Lavatory with single hole less soap dispenser hole ❑ 0 ❑ Other_____ 

K-2007-L Lavatory with single hole with soap dispenser hole on left ❑ 0 ❑ Other_____ 

K-2007-R Lavatory with single hole with soap dispenser hole on right ❑ 0 ❑ Other_____ 

Recommended Accessories 

K-8998 P-Trap ❑ CP ❑ Other_____ 

Product Specification 

Lavatory shall be made of vitreous china. The lavatory shall be 21-1/4″ (540 mm) in length and 18-1/8″ (460 mm) in width. 

Lavatory shall be wall-mounted with hangers. Lavatory shall have 8″ (203 mm) centers (K-2006), 4″ (102 mm) centers (K-2005), 

or single hole (K-2007). Lavatory shall have overflow. Lavatory shall be drilled for concealed arm carrier. Lavatory shall have 

optional soap dispenser hole left (-L) or right (-R). Lavatory shall be Kohler Model K-______-______-______. 

Page 1 of 2 

116611-4-CL 

USA/Canada: 1-800-4KOHLER 

(1-800-456-4537) 

www.kohler.com

KINGSTONTM 

Technical Information 

Fixture*: 

Basin area 16″ (406 mm) x 10″ (254 mm) 

Water depth 3-1/8″ (79 mm) 

Drain hole Ø 1-3/4″ (44 mm) 

* Approximate measurements for comparison only. 

Installation Notes 

Install this product according to the installation guide. 

Will comply with ADA when installed per Section 606 

Lavatories of the Act. 

Will comply with CSA B651 when installed per Clause 4.3.3 

of the standard. 

Will comply with OBC when installed per Clause 3.8.3.11. 

Holes K-2005 K-2006 K-2007 

Spout Ø 1-1/4″ 

(32 mm) 

Ø 1-3/8″ 

(35 mm) 

Ø 1-3/8″ 

(35 mm) 

Faucet Ø 1-1/4″ 

(32 mm) 

Ø 1-3/8″ 

(35 mm) 

Soap 

dispenser 

Ø 1-1/4″ 

(32 mm) 

Ø 1-1/4″ 

(32 mm) 

Included components: 

Hanger 64839 

Concealed Arm 

Hole Location 

K-2006 

1/2" (13 mm) 2" (51 mm) 

4" (102 mm) 3-3/4" (95 mm) 

4" (102 mm) 

Faucet Holes 

13-3/4" 

(349 mm) 

8-1/2" 

(216 mm) 

Ø 1-1/4" (32 mm) 

Leveling Screw 

Hole 

33 

(845 mm) 

8-3/8" 

(213 mm) 

Leveling 

Screw Slot 

18-1/8" 

(460 mm) 

17-1/4" (438 mm) Ø 1-1/4" (32 mm) 

Locking Device 

21-1/4" (540 mm) Hole 

8-1/4" (210 mm) 

12" 

(305 mm) 

5" (127 mm) 

3/8" 

Hot 

29-1/8" 

(740 mm) 

1-1/4" OD 

4" (102 mm) 

Standard Installation 

4-3/8" 7-1/4" 

(111 mm) (184 mm) 

3/8" Cold 

12-7/8" 

(327 mm) 

34" 

(864 mm) 

Max 

27" 

(686 mm) 

Min 

4-1/4" 

(108 mm) 

31" 

(787 mm) 

4-1/4" 

(108 mm) 

18-1/8" (460 mm) 

8" 

(203 mm) 

Min 

9" 

(229 mm) 

Min 

Recommended ADA Installation 

K-2005 

-L 4" (102 mm) -R 

4-1/2" (114 mm) 

K-2007 

4-3/8" (111 mm) 

-L -R 

9" 

(229 mm) 

6" 

(152 mm) 

Max 

3-3/4" 

(95 mm) 

3-3/4" 

(95 mm) 

KINGSTONTM WALL-MOUNT LAVATORY 

Page2of2 

116611-4-CL 

Product Diagram

Battery Powered Hand Washing Faucet 

EBF-85 

u 

Description 

Battery Powered, Sensor Activated Electronic Hand Washing Faucet for tempered or hot/cold 

water operation. 

u 

Flow Rate 

£0.5 gpm/1.9 Lpm Vandal Resistant Spray Head 

(See Accessories for other Spray Head options) 

u 

Specifications 

ADA Compliant, Battery Powered, Sensor Activated, Chrome Plated Brass Hand Washing Faucet 

with the following features: 

• Splash-proof Circuit Control Module 

• Fiber Optic, Automatic, Self-adaptive Sensing 

• Isolated Latching Solenoid Operator, isolates magnetic components from water contact 

• Audible Tone Low Battery Indicator 

• Serviceable Filtered Solenoid Valve 

• Bak-Chek ® Tee for Hot/Cold Supply 

• Trim Plate with Anti-Rotation Pin (specify 4” or 8”) 

• Vandal Resistant Spray Head with Pressure Compensating Flow Control 

• Polypropylene Optic Cable Protection 

• Includes four (4) C-size Alkaline Batteries 

u 

u 

Variations 

(Add suffix to Model Number for inclusion with Faucet) 

• Trim Plate (must be specified) 

£ -4 Trim Plate for 4” Centerset Sink 


• Temperature Mixing Valves (optional) 

£ ADM Above Deck Mechanical Mixing Valve 

£ BDM Below Deck Mechanical Mixing Valve 

£ BDT Below Deck Thermostatic Mixing Valve 

Bak-Chek ® Tee not required or provided when a Temperature Mixing Valve is included with the 

faucet. 

Consult Factory for Finish Variations 

Accessories (Specify separately) 

• Vandal Resistant Spray Heads 

£ ETF-1027-A 2.2 gpm/8.3 Lpm Laminar Flow Spray Head 

(recommended for medical applications) 

£ ETF-1022-A 2.2 gpm/8.3 Lpm Aerator 

• Grid Strainer 

£ ETF-460-A Chrome Plated Brass Grid Strainer w/1¼” Outlet Tube 

See OPTIMA Accessories Section of the Sloan Catalog for a complete listing of OPTIMA Faucet 

Accessories and Variations. 

u 

u 

u 

u 

u 

u 

ADA Compliant 

Automatic 

The Sloan OPTIMA Plus ® EBF-85 Battery Powered, Electronic Hand 

Washing Faucet operates by means of an adaptive infrared sensor that 

is linked to the faucet by a fiber optic cable. Once the user’s hands 

enter the sensor’s effective range, the Solenoid activates the water flow. 

Tempered water flows from the Faucet until hands are moved away. 

The Faucet then automatically shuts off. 

Hygienic 

The ultimate in sanitary protection — there are no handles to turn or 

buttons to push. Helps to control the spread of infectious diseases. 

Economical 

Automatic operation provides water usage savings over other faucet 

devices. Reduces maintenance and operation costs. Self-adaptive 

Range Adjustment makes installation quick and easy. Battery operation 

ideal for Retrofit installations. 

Warranty 

3 year (limited) 

Compliant to: 

ASME A112.18.1-2005/CSA B125.1-05 

ISO/IEC 17025 

This product may 

contribute to 

LEED credits. 

See details on LEED 

calculation worksheet. 

This space for Architect/Engineer approval 

Job Name 

Model Specified 

Date 

Quantity 

Variations Specified 

Customer/Wholesaler 

Contractor 

Architect 

Optima Plus EBF-85 S.S. — Rev. 2 (09/10) 

The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice.

EBF-85 

FAUCET DIMENSIONS 

(Shown with 4” Trim Plate) 

u 

u 

Description 

Battery Powered, Sensor Activated Electronic Hand Washing Faucet for tempered or 

hot/cold water operation. 

Flow Rate 



ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS 

u 

u 

Control Circuit 

6 VDC — Operates on four (4) 

alkaline C-size batteries. Self-adaptive 

Range Adjustment, Audible 

Troubleshooting and Low Battery 

Indicator. Fiber Optic Cable between 

Electronic Module and Faucet keeps 

all electronic signals below the sink. 

Battery Life 

2 years at 8,000 cycles/month 

u 

u 

OPTIMA ® Sensor Range 

Nominal: 4”- 5” (102 mm - 127 mm) 

Self-adaptive Zone: 2” - 8” 

(51 mm - 203 mm) — Faucet selfadjustment 

range within this zone 

dependent upon depth and reflectivity of 

basin. 

Solenoid Valve 

Low Energy Latching Solenoid with Selfcleaning 

By-pass and Integral Clean Out 

Strainer Filter. 

u 

u 

Time Out Adjustment Settings 

30 seconds — The Faucet Time out Setting determines the maximum time the 

faucet will run upon continuous detection. The EBF-85 is factory set at the 30 

second time out. Consult factory for time out settings to meet individual 

application requirements. 

Maximum Distance Control Module may be Installed from Spout 

30” (762 mm) 

OPERATION 

1. Continuous, invisible light 

beams are emitted from the 

OPTIMA ® Sensor. Fiber optic 

cables transmit the light from 

the circuit to the spout. 

2. The faucet is activated by 

placing hands beneath the 

spray head, thus activating the 

Solenoid Valve. Tempered 

water flows for as long as 

hands continue to stay within 

the Sensor’s range (30 second 

automatic shut off). 

3. When hands are removed, 

the water flow automatically 

stops. The faucet is then 

ready for the next user. 

EBF-85 Faucet with Bak-Chek ® Tee 

for Hot and Cold Water Supply 

(shown with 4” trim plate) 

EBF-85 Faucet with ADM Variation Mixing 

Valve for Hot and Cold Water Supply 


EBF-85 Faucet with BDM and BDT Variation Mixing 

Valves for Hot and Cold Water Supply 


SLOAN VALVE COMPANY • 10500 SEYMOUR AVENUE • FRANKLIN PARK, IL 60131 

Phone: 1-800-982-5839 or 1-847-671-4300 • Fax: 1-800-447-8329 or 1-847-671-4380 • www.sloanvalve.com 

Copyright © 2010 Sloan Valve Company Optima Plus EBF-85 S.S. — Rev. 2 (09/10)

Features 


• Drop-in 

• Single-hole 

• ADA compliant when installed in a 21″ (533 mm) 

minimum depth countertop 

• Optional soap dispenser hole on left (-L) or right (-R) 

• With or without overflow 

• 20-1/4″ (514 mm) x 17-1/2″ (445 mm) 



• ADA 


• CSA B651 

• OBC 

• ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1 


COUNTERTOP BATHROOM SINK 

K-2196 

ADA 

CSA B651 

OBC 


• 0: White 


Accessories 


PENNINGTON ® 


K-2196-1N Single-hole drilling; less overflow ❑ 0 ❑ Other_____ 

K-2196-1K Single-hole drilling; less overflow; with soap dispenser hole on right ❑ 0 ❑ Other_____ 

K-2196-1F Single-hole drilling; less overflow; with soap dispenser hole on left ❑ 0 ❑ Other_____ 

K-2196-1 Single-hole drilling; with overflow; less soap dispenser hole ❑ 0 ❑ Other_____ 

K-2196-1L Single-hole drilling; with overflow; with soap dispenser hole on left ❑ 0 ❑ Other_____ 

K-2196-1R Single-hole drilling; with overflow; with soap dispenser hole on right ❑ 0 ❑ Other_____ 


K-8998 P-Trap ❑ CP 


The drop-in bathroom sink shall be made of vitreous china. Bathroom sink shall be 20-1/4″ (514 mm) in length, and 17-1/2″ (445 

mm) in width. Bathroom sink shall have single-hole drilling (-1). Bathroom sink shall be ADA compliant when installed in a 21″ 

(533 mm) minimum depth countertop. Bathroom sink shall feature optional soap dispenser hole (-L, left or -R, right). Bathroom 

sink shall be Kohler Model K-2196-_______-______. 

Page 1 of 2 

113805-4-DG 


(1-800-456-4537) 

www.kohler.com

PENNINGTON ® 


Fixture*: 

Basin area 16″ (406 mm) x 11″ (279 mm) 

Water depth 4″ (102 mm) 

Drain hole Ø 1-3/4″ (44 mm) 

*Approximate measurements for comparison only. 

Holes 

Spout 

Soap dispenser 

Ø 1-3/8″ (35 mm) 

Ø 1-1/4″(32 mm) 


Cut-out template 1002970-7 



NOTICE: Countertop manufacturer or cutter must use the 

cutout template provided with the product, or a current one 

provided by Kohler Co. (call 1-800-4KOHLER). Kohler Co. is 

not responsible for cutout errors when the incorrect cutout 

template is used. 

Will comply with ADA when installed per Section 606 

Lavatories of the Act. 



Will comply with OBC when installed per Clause 3.8.3.11. 

6-3/4" 

(171 mm) 

10" 

(254 mm) 

3/8" Hot 

1-1/4" 

Outlet 

-L -R 

20-1/4" (514 mm) 

2-15/16" 

(75 mm) 

7-3/8" 

(187 mm) 

1-3/4" 

(44 mm) 

5/8" (16 mm) 

3/8" Cold 

17-1/2" 

(445 mm) 

8-1/2" 

(216 mm) 14-1/8" 

(359 mm) 

34" 

(864 mm) 

3" 

(76 mm) 

24" (610 mm) 

8" 

(203 mm) 

Min 6" 

(152 mm) 

Max 

27" 

(688 mm) 

Min 9" 

(229 mm) Min 

Recommended ADA Installation 

4" (102 mm) 

Standard Installation 

PENNINGTON ® COUNTERTOP BATHROOM SINK 

Page2of2 

113805-4-DG 

Product Diagram

Battery Powered Hand Washing Faucet 

EBF-85 

u 

Description 

Battery Powered, Sensor Activated Electronic Hand Washing Faucet for tempered or hot/cold 

water operation. 

u 

Flow Rate 



u 


ADA Compliant, Battery Powered, Sensor Activated, Chrome Plated Brass Hand Washing Faucet 

with the following features: 

• Splash-proof Circuit Control Module 

• Fiber Optic, Automatic, Self-adaptive Sensing 

• Isolated Latching Solenoid Operator, isolates magnetic components from water contact 

• Audible Tone Low Battery Indicator 

• Serviceable Filtered Solenoid Valve 

• Bak-Chek ® Tee for Hot/Cold Supply 

• Trim Plate with Anti-Rotation Pin (specify 4” or 8”) 

• Vandal Resistant Spray Head with Pressure Compensating Flow Control 

• Polypropylene Optic Cable Protection 

• Includes four (4) C-size Alkaline Batteries 

u 

u 

Variations 

(Add suffix to Model Number for inclusion with Faucet) 

• Trim Plate (must be specified) 



• Temperature Mixing Valves (optional) 

£ ADM Above Deck Mechanical Mixing Valve 

£ BDM Below Deck Mechanical Mixing Valve 

£ BDT Below Deck Thermostatic Mixing Valve 

Bak-Chek ® Tee not required or provided when a Temperature Mixing Valve is included with the 

faucet. 

Consult Factory for Finish Variations 

Accessories (Specify separately) 

• Vandal Resistant Spray Heads 

£ ETF-1027-A 2.2 gpm/8.3 Lpm Laminar Flow Spray Head 

(recommended for medical applications) 

£ ETF-1022-A 2.2 gpm/8.3 Lpm Aerator 

• Grid Strainer 

£ ETF-460-A Chrome Plated Brass Grid Strainer w/1¼” Outlet Tube 

See OPTIMA Accessories Section of the Sloan Catalog for a complete listing of OPTIMA Faucet 

Accessories and Variations. 

u 

u 

u 

u 

u 

u 

ADA Compliant 

Automatic 

The Sloan OPTIMA Plus ® EBF-85 Battery Powered, Electronic Hand 

Washing Faucet operates by means of an adaptive infrared sensor that 

is linked to the faucet by a fiber optic cable. Once the user’s hands 

enter the sensor’s effective range, the Solenoid activates the water flow. 

Tempered water flows from the Faucet until hands are moved away. 

The Faucet then automatically shuts off. 

Hygienic 

The ultimate in sanitary protection — there are no handles to turn or 

buttons to push. Helps to control the spread of infectious diseases. 

Economical 

Automatic operation provides water usage savings over other faucet 

devices. Reduces maintenance and operation costs. Self-adaptive 

Range Adjustment makes installation quick and easy. Battery operation 

ideal for Retrofit installations. 

Warranty 


Compliant to: 

ASME A112.18.1-2005/CSA B125.1-05 

ISO/IEC 17025 

This product may 

contribute to 

LEED credits. 

See details on LEED 

calculation worksheet. 


Job Name 


Date 

Quantity 



Contractor 

Architect 

Optima Plus EBF-85 S.S. — Rev. 2 (09/10) 


EBF-85 

FAUCET DIMENSIONS 

(Shown with 4” Trim Plate) 

u 

u 

Description 

Battery Powered, Sensor Activated Electronic Hand Washing Faucet for tempered or 

hot/cold water operation. 

Flow Rate 




u 

u 


6 VDC — Operates on four (4) 

alkaline C-size batteries. Self-adaptive 

Range Adjustment, Audible 

Troubleshooting and Low Battery 

Indicator. Fiber Optic Cable between 

Electronic Module and Faucet keeps 

all electronic signals below the sink. 

Battery Life 

2 years at 8,000 cycles/month 

u 

u 

OPTIMA ® Sensor Range 

Nominal: 4”- 5” (102 mm - 127 mm) 

Self-adaptive Zone: 2” - 8” 

(51 mm - 203 mm) — Faucet selfadjustment 

range within this zone 

dependent upon depth and reflectivity of 

basin. 

Solenoid Valve 

Low Energy Latching Solenoid with Selfcleaning 

By-pass and Integral Clean Out 

Strainer Filter. 

u 

u 

Time Out Adjustment Settings 

30 seconds — The Faucet Time out Setting determines the maximum time the 

faucet will run upon continuous detection. The EBF-85 is factory set at the 30 

second time out. Consult factory for time out settings to meet individual 

application requirements. 

Maximum Distance Control Module may be Installed from Spout 

30” (762 mm) 

OPERATION 

1. Continuous, invisible light 

beams are emitted from the 

OPTIMA ® Sensor. Fiber optic 

cables transmit the light from 

the circuit to the spout. 

2. The faucet is activated by 

placing hands beneath the 

spray head, thus activating the 

Solenoid Valve. Tempered 

water flows for as long as 

hands continue to stay within 

the Sensor’s range (30 second 

automatic shut off). 

3. When hands are removed, 

the water flow automatically 

stops. The faucet is then 


EBF-85 Faucet with Bak-Chek ® Tee 

for Hot and Cold Water Supply 


EBF-85 Faucet with ADM Variation Mixing 

Valve for Hot and Cold Water Supply 


EBF-85 Faucet with BDM and BDT Variation Mixing 

Valves for Hot and Cold Water Supply 




Copyright © 2010 Sloan Valve Company Optima Plus EBF-85 S.S. — Rev. 2 (09/10)


GENERAL 

Highest quality sink formed of #18 (1.2mm) gauge, type 304 

(18-8) nickel bearing stainless steel. Top mount. 

DESIGN FEATURES 

Bowl Depths: 6-1/8" (156mm) (BLR[Q]1560), 7-1/8" (181mm) 

(all others). 

Coved Corners: 1-3/4" (44mm) vertical and horizontal radius. 

Bowl and Faucet Deck Recess: 3/16" (5mm) below outside 

edge of sink. 

Finish: Exposed surfaces are hand blended to a lustrous satin 

finish. 

Underside: Fully undercoated to dampen sound and reduce 

condensation. 

These sinks comply with ASME A112.19.3-2008/CSA B45.4-08. 

These sinks are listed by the International Association 

of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials as meeting the 

require ments of the Uniform Plumbing Code. 

Gourmet Sink 

and Sink Packages 

Model BLH15C 

Model BLR(Q)151 

SINK PACKAGES 

BLH15C Package includes: 

(1) BLR15 Sink. 

(1) LKDA2438 Faucet. 

(1) LK36 Basket strainer. 

BLR150C Package includes: 

(1) BLR15 Sink. 

(1) LKD2223 Faucet. 

(1) LK36 Basket strainer. 

OTHER 

Drain Openings: 3-1/2" (89mm) (BLR[Q]1516), 2" (51mm) (all 

others). 

NOTE: Unless otherwise specified, sink is furnished with 1 faucet 

hole as shown. 

Model BLR150C 


Bottom Grid: LKWBG12090SS (BLH15C, BLR150C, BLR[Q]15, 

BLR[Q]1560). 

Cutting Board: CB912. 

Drains: LK36 (BLH15C, BLR150C, BLR[Q]15, BLR[Q]1560), LK99 

(BLR[Q]1516). 

Installation hardware for thicker countertops: LK363 (up to 

1-1/2" [38mm] thick); LK463 (up to 2-1/2" [66mm] thick). 

Rinsing Basket: LKWRB1209SS. 

Utensil Caddy for Rinsing Basket: LKWUCSS. 

SEE OTHER SIDE FOR PRODUCT DIMENSIONS. 


product specifications without notice. Please visit elkayusa.com for most current version of Elkay 

product specification sheets. 



overlooked. 

Elkay 

elkayusa.com 




©2008 Elkay 

(Rev. 12/08) 1-3E

Gourmet Sink 

and Sink Packages 


SINK DIMENSIONS* 

Cutout in 

No. of 1 1 /4" 

Overall 

Inside Bowl 

Countertop 

(32mm) or 1 1 /2" 

U-Channel Quick-Clip ® (11 /2" [38mm] 

(38mm) Dia. Minimum 

Model 

Model 

L W L W D Radius Corners) 

Drain Faucet Holes Cabinet 

Number Number A B C D E L W Opening 4" (102mm) Centers Size 

BLH15C – 15 15 12 9 1 /4 7 1 /8 14 3 /8 14 3 /8 2 3 18 

(381mm) (381mm) (305mm) (235mm) (181mm) (365mm) (365mm) (51mm) 

(457mm) 

BLR150C – 15 15 12 9 1 /4 7 1 /8 14 3 /8 14 3 /8 2 1 18 


(457mm) 

BLR15 BLRQ15 15 15 12 9 1 /4 7 1 /8 14 3 /8 14 3 /8 2 1, 2, MR2 or 3 18 


(457mm) 

BLR1516 BLRQ1516 15 15 12 9 1 /4 7 1 /8 14 3 /8 14 3 /8 3 1 ⁄2 1, 2, MR2 or 3 18 


(457mm) 

BLR1560 BLRQ1560 15 15 12 9 1 /4 6 1 /8 14 3 /8 14 3 /8 2 1, 2, MR2 or 3 18 


(457mm) 

*Length is left to right. Width is front to back. 

HOLE DRILLING 

CONFIGURATIONS 

1 

(1-1/4" [32mm] diameter) 

1-3/4"R (44mm) 

D 

B 

4" 

(102mm) 

C 

A 

2 


4" 

(102mm) 

1-3/4"R (44mm) 

Model BLR151 Illustrated 

E 

MR2 


4" 

4" 

(102mm) (102mm) 

3 


U-Channel Type Mounting System 

Quick-Clip ® Mounting System 

Elkay 

1-3E (Rev. 12/08) 



elkayusa.com 


©2008 Elkay

MECHANICAL FAUCETS 

895-317CP 

Manual and Metering Faucets 

Product Type 

___________________________________________________ 

Deck Mounted 4" Fixed Centers Hot and Cold Water Sink 

Faucet 

Features & Specifications 

___________________________________________________ 

• 4" Fixed Centers 

• 3 1/2" Rigid / Swing Gooseneck Spout 

• 2.2 GPM (8.3 L/min) Aerator 

• 4" Wristblade Handle 

• Quaturn Compression Operating Cartridge 

• 1/2" NPSM Supply Inlets and Coupling Nut for 3/8" or 1/2" 

Flexible Riser 

• CFNow! Item Ships in 5 Days 

Performance Specification 

___________________________________________________ 

• Rated Operating Pressure: 20-125 PSI 

• Rated Operating Temperature: 40-140ºF 

Job Name ________________________________________________ 

Item Number _____________________________________________ 

Section/Tag ______________________________________________ 

Model Specified ___________________________________________ 

Architect _________________________________________________ 

Engineer _________________________________________________ 

Contractor ________________________________________________ 

[ ] Submitted as Shown [ ] Submitted with Variations 

Date _____________________________________________________ 

Warranty 

___________________________________________________ 

• Lifetime Limited Faucet Warranty 

• 5-Year Limited Cartridge Warranty 

• 1-Year Limited Finish Warranty 

Codes & Standards 

___________________________________________________ 

• ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1 

• Certified to NSF/ANSI 61, Section 9 by CSA 

• ADA ANSI/ICC A117.1 

Last Revision: 01/23/2012 • Date Printed: 02/10/2013 • Product specifications subject to change without notice 

2100 South Clearwater Drive 

Des Plaines, IL 

P: 847/803-5000 

F: 847/803-5454 

Technical: 800/TEC-TRUE 

www.chicagofaucets.com

895-317CP 


Architect/Engineer Specification 

________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 

Chicago Faucets No. 895-317CP, Deck Mounted 4" Fixed Centers Hot and Cold Water Sink Faucet, Chrome Plated solid brass construction. 3 

1/2" Center to Center Rigid / Swing Gooseneck Spout. 2.2 GPM (8.3 L/min) Pressure Compensating Softflo Aerator. 4" Metal Wristblade 

handle(s) with Sixteen Point Tapered Broach and Secured Blue and Red Buttons. Quaturn rebuildable compression cartridge, opens and 

closes 90°, closes with water pressure, features square tapered stem. 1/2" NPSM Supply Inlets and Coupling Nut for 3/8" or 1/2" Flexible Riser. 

This product meets ADA ANSI/ICC A117.1 requirements and is tested and certified to industry standards: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1, and 

Certified to NSF/ANSI 61, Section 9 by CSA. 

Operation and Maintenance 

________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 

Installation should be in accordance with local plumbing codes. Flush all pipes thoroughly before installation. After installation, 

remove spout outlet or flow control and flush faucet thoroughly to clear any debris. Care should be taken when cleaning the 

product. Do not use abrasive cleaners, chemicals or solvents as they can result in surface damage. Use mild soap and warm 

water for cleaning and protecting the life of Chicago Faucet products. For specific operation and maintenance refer to the 

installation instructions and repair parts documents that are located at www.chicagofaucets.com. 

Chicago Faucets, member of the Geberit Group, is the leading brand of commercial faucets and fittings in the United States, 

offering a complete range of products for schools, laboratories, hospitals, office buildings, food service, airports and sport facilities. 

Call 1.800.TECTRUE or 1.847.803.5000 Option 1 for installation or other technical assistance. 




P: 847/803-5000 

F: 847/803-5454 



® 


Celebrity ® Single Bowl Sink 

20 Gauge – Type 304 – Self-Rim 

Model DCR252210 

GENERAL 

Good quality Celebrity single bowl is seamlessly drawn of #20 

gauge, type 304 (18-8) nickel bearing stainless steel. Selfrimming. 

Exclusive trimmed corner design. 


Bowl Depth: 10". 

Coved Corners: 3" vertical radius, 1-3/4" horizontal radius. 

Bowl and Faucet Deck Recess: 3/16" total recess below outside 

edge of sink. 

Finish: Exposed surfaces are machine polished to a highlighted 

finish. 

Underside: Fully undercoated to prevent condensation and 

deaden sound. 

OTHER 

Drain Opening: 3-1/2". 

Faucet Holes: 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5, 1-1/2" faucet holes as indicated, 

4" center to center. 

NOTE: Unless otherwise specified, sink is furnished with 3 faucet 

holes. 


Rinsing Baskets: LKRB2015 and LKERBSS. 


SINK DIMENSIONS (INCHES)* 

Model DCR2522103 

Cutout in 

No. of 

Countertop 

1 1 /2" Dia. 

(1 1 /2" Radius 

Faucet Minimum Ship. 

Model 

Overall Inside Bowl Corners) 

Holes Cabinet Wt. 

Number L W L W D L W 4" Center Size Lbs. 

DCR252210 25 22 21 15 3 /4 10 24 3 /8 21 3 /8 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 30 14 1 /2 


4" 

4" 

3" R 

22" 

15-3/4" 

25" 

21" 

1-3/4" R 

10" 

Model DCR2522103 Illustrated 


product specifications without notice. 

Elkay 

www.elkayusa.com 

ALL DIMENSIONS IN INCHES, TO CONVERT TO MILLIMETERS MULTIPLY BY 25.4. 





overlooked. 


©2003 Elkay 

(Rev. 11/03) 1-16D


895-317CP 


Product Type 

___________________________________________________ 

Deck Mounted 4" Fixed Centers Hot and Cold Water Sink 

Faucet 


___________________________________________________ 

• 4" Fixed Centers 

• 3 1/2" Rigid / Swing Gooseneck Spout 

• 2.2 GPM (8.3 L/min) Aerator 

• 4" Wristblade Handle 


• 1/2" NPSM Supply Inlets and Coupling Nut for 3/8" or 1/2" 

Flexible Riser 



___________________________________________________ 



Job Name ________________________________________________ 

Item Number _____________________________________________ 

Section/Tag ______________________________________________ 


Architect _________________________________________________ 

Engineer _________________________________________________ 

Contractor ________________________________________________ 


Date _____________________________________________________ 

Warranty 

___________________________________________________ 





___________________________________________________ 

• ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1 






P: 847/803-5000 

F: 847/803-5454 



895-317CP 



________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 

Chicago Faucets No. 895-317CP, Deck Mounted 4" Fixed Centers Hot and Cold Water Sink Faucet, Chrome Plated solid brass construction. 3 

1/2" Center to Center Rigid / Swing Gooseneck Spout. 2.2 GPM (8.3 L/min) Pressure Compensating Softflo Aerator. 4" Metal Wristblade 

handle(s) with Sixteen Point Tapered Broach and Secured Blue and Red Buttons. Quaturn rebuildable compression cartridge, opens and 

closes 90°, closes with water pressure, features square tapered stem. 1/2" NPSM Supply Inlets and Coupling Nut for 3/8" or 1/2" Flexible Riser. 

This product meets ADA ANSI/ICC A117.1 requirements and is tested and certified to industry standards: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1, and 

Certified to NSF/ANSI 61, Section 9 by CSA. 


________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 












P: 847/803-5000 

F: 847/803-5454 



METERING FAUCETS 

625-CP 

Remote Spouts and Valves 

Product Type 

___________________________________________________ 

Hot and Cold Water Pedal Box with Short Pedals 


___________________________________________________ 

• Short Pedal Valves 

• NAIAD Metering Fast Cycle Time Closure Cartridge 

• Two 1/2" NPT Female Thread Inlets 

• 3/8" NPT Female Thread Outlet 


Job Name ________________________________________________ 

Item Number _____________________________________________ 

Section/Tag ______________________________________________ 


Architect _________________________________________________ 

Engineer _________________________________________________ 


___________________________________________________ 



Warranty 

___________________________________________________ 




Contractor ________________________________________________ 


Date _____________________________________________________ 


___________________________________________________ 

• ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1 





P: 847/803-5000 

F: 847/803-5454 



625-CP 

Remote Spouts and Valves 


________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 

Chicago Faucets No. 625-CP, Hot and Cold Water Pedal Box with Short Pedals, Chrome Plated solid brass construction. NAIAD rebuildable 

self-closing metering cartridge, immediate shut-off, opens with push. Two 1/2" NPT Female Thread Inlets. 3/8" NPT Female Thread Outlet. This 

product is tested and certified to industry standards: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1, and Certified to NSF/ANSI 61, Section 9 by CSA. 


________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 












P: 847/803-5000 

F: 847/803-5454 



® 


Pacemaker ® Double Bowl Hospitality Sink 

Models BPSR2317 and BPSRQ2317 

GENERAL 

Fine quality sink bowl seamlessly formed of #20 gauge, type 

304 (18-8) nickel bearing stainless steel. Self-rimming. 


Bowl Depth: 6-1/8". 

Coved Corners: 1-3/4" vertical and horizontal radius. 

Bowl and Faucet Deck Recess: 3/16" below outside edge of 

sink. 

Finish: Exposed surfaces are polished to a lustrous highlighted 

satin finish. 

Underside: Fully undercoated to dampen sound and prevent 

condensation. 

OTHER 

Drain Opening: 2". 

NOTE: Unless otherwise specified, sink is furnished with 1 

faucet hole as shown. 

These sinks comply with ANSI Standard A112.19.3M. 



SINK DIMENSIONS (INCHES)* 


Model BPSR(Q)23171 

Cutout in 

No. of 

Countertop 

1 1 /2" Dia. 

U-Channel Quick-Clip ® (11 /2" Radius 

Faucet Minimum Ship. 

Model 

Model 

Overall Inside Each Bowl Corners) 

Holes Cabinet Wt. 

Number Number L W L W D L W 4" Centers Size Lbs. 

BPSR2317 BPSRQ2317 23 17 9 1 /4 12 6 1 /8 22 3 /8 16 3 /8 1, 2, MR2, 3 or 4 27 10 3 /4 

U-Channel Type Mounting System 

HOLE DRILLING 

CONFIGURATIONS 

1-3/4" R 

12" 

17" 

1 

4" 

9-1/4" 

23"1-1/4" 

9-1/4" 

Quick-Clip ® Mounting System 

2 

4" 

1-3/4" R 

10-1/2" 

6-1/8" 

MR2 

4" 4" 

Model BPSR23171 Illustrated 

3 

4" 4" 4" 

4 

Elkay 

www.elkayusa.com 

ALL DIMENSIONS IN INCHES, TO CONVERT TO MILLIMETERS MULTIPLY BY 25.4. 


product specifications without notice. 





overlooked. 


©2004 Elkay 

(Rev. 3/04) 1-74A

Features 

• Metal construction 

• One-piece, self-contained ceramic disc valve allows 

both volume and temperature control 

• Temperature memory allows faucet to be turned on 

and off at any temperature setting 

• High-temperature limit setting for added safety 

• 9-1/16″ (230 mm) swing spout reach 

• Matching finish sidespray 

• Flexible supplies 

• Lower flow aerator options are available (refer to the 

Kohler Price Book) 

• 2.2 gpm (8.3 lpm) maximum flow rate 


Specified model meets or exceeds the following at date of 

manufacture: 

• ADA 

• ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1 


• Energy Policy Act of 2005 

• NSF 61 

• All applicable US Federal and State material 

regulations 



FORTÉ ® 

KITCHEN SINK FAUCET 

K-10412 


• BN: Brushed Nickel 


Accessories 

• NA: None applicable 


K-10412 Kitchen sink faucet ❑ CP ❑ BN ❑ Other ____ 

Optional Accessories 

1030920 Sidespray deep roughing-in kit ❑ NA 


The single-handle kitchen sink faucet shall be of metal construction. Product shall have a maximum flow rate of 2.2 gallons (8.3 

L) per minute with lower flow aerator options available (refer to the Kohler Price Book). Product shall feature a one-piece, 

self-contained ceramic disc valve, which allows both volume and temperature control. Product shall feature temperature 

memory, allowing the faucet to be turned on and off at any temperature setting. Product shall feature a high-temperature limit 

setting for added safety, a 9-1/16″ (230 mm) swing spout reach, matching finish sidespray, and flexible supplies. Faucet shall 

be Kohler Model K-10412-___. 

Page 1 of 2 

1018338-4-E 


(1-800-456-4537) 

www.kohler.com

FORTÉ ® 



ADA compliant when installed to the specific requirement of 

the regulation. 

9-1/16" (230 mm) 

8-7/8" 

(225 mm) 

7-7/8" 

(200 mm) 

6-1/8" 

(156 mm) 

10" 

(254 mm) 

Ø 2" 

(51 mm) 

2-1/2" 

(64 mm) 

Ø 7/8" 

1-3/8" 

(35 mm) 

Max 

17" 

(432 mm) 

4" 

(102 mm) 

Cold 

4" 

(102 mm) 

1" 

(25 mm) 

Max 

Supply Hoses with 3/8" 

Compression Fittings 

FORTÉ ® KITCHEN SINK FAUCET 

Page2of2 

1018338-4-E 

Product Diagram

Design features: 

19F and 19W UTILATUB ® 

Laundry/Utility Tubs — Premier 

SEE PAGE 2 FOR A LIST OF ACCESSORIES! 

• High strength, one piece molded construction 

• Produced with Mustee’s proprietary structural thermoplastic resins 

and innovative cellular molding process creating extreme strength & 

durability 

• 18 Gallon capacity, extra deep 13” tub with smooth surface 

• Leakproof, integrally molded-in drain with stopper 

• Connects to standard 1-½” P or S trap 

• Accommodates dual-handle faucet with 4” center 

• Large, self-draining back shelf with retainer curb that prohibits water 

run-off except into tub. 

• Floor model includes heavy gauge steel legs with adjustable levelers 

• Wall model includes wall mounting bracket, side supports and 

mounting hardware for securing tub to concrete or stud wall 

• Mold and mildew-resistant components 

• Easy to assemble and install 

Code Accepted: 

• Color-fast white finish 

UTILATUB® and UTILATWIN® Laundry/Utility Tubs meet or exceed performance requirements as listed: 

• International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials (IAPMO)® Listed 

• Warnock Hersey® (Canada) Listed—CSA test standards: Laundry Tray - #B45.0 and #B45.5; Drain - #B125 

• American National Standards Institute (ANSI)—Specification Z 124.6 


Colors & Models: Model Mounting H x W x D UPC 

White 19F Floor 34” x 20” x 24” 6 71031 00029 3 

White 19W Wall 34” x 20” x 24” 6 71031 00030 9 

MOUNTING BRACKET 

14 3 / 8 

" 

34" 

APPROX. 

1-1/2” LEVEL 

ADJUSTMENT 

FILLER 

PANELS 

FLOOR 

34" 

APPROX. 

7 1 / 2 

" 

Top View 

20" 

10" 

24" 

General: Furnish and install as shown on plans, UTILATUB® 

Laundry/Utility Tub model____(19F, 19W), as manufactured by E.L. 

Mustee & Sons, Inc. Tub shall be one-piece molded construction using 

structural thermoplastics with matched metal molds under extreme 

heat and pressure. Tub to include integrally molded drain assembly for 

connection to standard 1-1/2” P or S-trap, stopper and wall mounting 

hardware or heavy gauge steel legs with built-in levelers. 18 gallon 

capacity tub, 13” deep. Shall meet ANSI Specification Z 124.6. Color: 

White. Weight: 19F 23 lbs.; 19W 20 lbs. 

Floor 

Wall 

E.L. Mustee & Sons, Inc. • 5431 West 164th Street • Brook Park, OH 44142 • Phone: 216.267.3100 • Fax: 216.267.9997 

E-mail: info@mustee.com. • Web: www.mustee.com • Proudly made in the USA 

Notice: Our continuous commitment to product improvement may result in changes to product specifications without notice. 

Patents pending. Made and Printed in U.S.A.

19F and 19W UTILATUB ® 

Laundry/Utility Tub Accessories 

Faucet 

Model No. 

UPC 

93.600 6 71031 00232 7 

Chrome finish, 4” center set brass faucet. 7” swing spout with aerator, level handles, replaceable seats 

and stems. Areator or hose end. 

Faucet Block 

Model No. 

UPC 

20.600 6 71031 00031 6 

Used when water supply lines are above the tub. Mounts to tub shelf when using a clamp-on faucet. 

HandiFlo Fitting 

Model No. 

UPC 

94.700 6 71031 00287 7 

Dispenses water from washing machine discharge hose into laundry tub. Eliminates draping washer 

machine hose over back/side wall of laundry tub and conceals discharge hose. Mounts to back or side 

wall of laundry tub, includes mounting hardware. 

UTILATOP ® Model No. UPC 

19.204A UTILATOP ® (White) 6 71031 00380 5 

Completely covers tub to create additional counter space. UTILATOP ® supports up to 40 lbs. 





Mop Service Basin — Model 63M 

Design features: 

SEE PAGE 2 FOR A LIST OF ACCESSORIES! 

• All Mustee basins are one-piece molded from high impact resistant 

DURASTONE ® structural fiberglass (24” x 24”) 

• Integral, molded-in drain for connection to 3” ABS, PVC (Sch. 80) 

or cast iron 

• Available drain seals for connection to 2” pipe or 3” soil pipe 

• Complete range of accessories to meet specific application needs 

• Colorfast marbleized white finish 

• Easy to install 

Code Accepted 

Mustee Mop Service Basins meet or exceed performance requirements as listed: 

• International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials (IAPMO) ® Listed 

• Warnock Hersey ® (Canada) Listed—CSA test standards: Mop Basins - #B45.0 

• American National Standards Institute (ANSI)-Specification Z124.6 

• American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM) D 635 E 84 and E 162 

• CAN/ULC S102-07 Burn and Smoke Test 


Model Number Model H x W x D UPC 

63M White 10” x 24” x 24” 6 71031 00189 4 

General: Furnish and install as shown on plans, Mop 

Service Basin model 63M, as manufactured by E.L. 

Mustee & Sons, Inc. Unit to be one-piece molded 

fiberglass made with matched metal molds using 

extreme heat and pressure. Height shall be 10” with not 

less than 1” wide shoulder. Size 24” x 24”. Drain shall be 

integrally molded, complete with drain seal for installation 

of 3” ABS, PVC (Sch. #80) and iron pipe. Removable 

stainless steel strainer. Performance tested to meet or 

exceed ANSI Specifications Z 124.1.2, Z 124.6 and FHA/ 

HUD UM-73. Weight 45 lbs., cubic feet 4.2. Install in 

compliance with local codes. 

Sectional View 

24" 

1" 

10" 

24" 

Top View 

CL 12" 

24" 

12" 

CL 





Mop Service Basin — Model 63M 

Accessories 

Service Faucet 

Model No. 

UPC 

63.600A 6 71031 00277 8 

Heavy duty, chrome plated brass dual handle sink faucet with top reinforcing bar and pail hook 

on spout. 

Hose and Hose Holder 

Model No. 

UPC 

65.700 6 71031 00196 2 

Heavy duty 5/8” dia. reinforced 31” rubber hose with brass couplings on one end. Spring loaded, 

molded rubber hose holder mounts on stainless steel wall plate. 

Mop Hanger 

Model No. 

UPC 

65.600 6 71031 00195 5 

Three spring-loaded rubber holders mounted to a 3” x 24” stainless steel wall plate. Click here for 

more information. 

Bumper Guards 

Available in high impact resistant molded vinyl (3 versions) or stainless steel (2 versions). 

Model No. 

UPC 

High Impact-resistant vinyl 

63.401 20-3/4” Long 6 71031 00290 7 

Stainless steel 

63.403 20-3/4” Long 6 71031 00409 3 

DURAGUARD Wall Guards 

Protects wall surfaces from splashing and damage from impacts, 12” height, 20 gauge #304 stainless steel. 

Model No. 

UPC 

67.2424 Two panels & bracket for 24” x 24” corner 6 71031 00293 8 

67.24C One panel & corner bracket 6 71031 00295 2 

Optional Seals 

For installations with the following pipe connections: 

Model No. 

UPC 

65.308 For 2” PVC, ABS and iron 6 71031 00303 4 

65.309 For 3” PVC, ABS and iron,(Included w/mop basin) 6 71031 00304 1 

65.311 For 3” soil pipe (No-Hub) 6 71031 00305 8 






897-RCF 


Product Type 

___________________________________________________ 

Wall Mounted 8" Body, Adjustable Arms 7 5/8" - 8 3/4" Hot 

and Cold Water Sink Faucet 


___________________________________________________ 

• 8" Body, Adjustable Arms 7 5/8" - 8 3/4" 

• 2 3/8" Lever Handle 


• 1/2" NPT Adjustable Female Union Nut Supply Arms 

• 3/4" Male Hose Thread Outlet 

• Round Wall Escutcheons 

• Integral Stop Valves for Servicing the product 

• Atmospheric Vacuum Breaker, Not Intended for Continuous 

Pressure Applications 

• Vacuum Breaker Spout with Pail Hook and Wall Brace 

• Atmospheric Vacuum Breaker, Not Intended for Continuous 

Pressure Applications 


Job Name ________________________________________________ 

Item Number _____________________________________________ 

Section/Tag ______________________________________________ 


Architect _________________________________________________ 

Engineer _________________________________________________ 

Contractor ________________________________________________ 


Date _____________________________________________________ 


___________________________________________________ 



Warranty 

___________________________________________________ 





___________________________________________________ 

• ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1 





P: 847/803-5000 

F: 847/803-5454 



897-RCF 



________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 

Chicago Faucets No. 897-RCF, Wall Mounted 8" Body, Adjustable Arms 7 5/8" - 8 3/4" Hot and Cold Water Sink Faucet , Rough Chrome plated 

solid brass construction. Vacuum Breaker Spout with Pail Hook and Wall Brace. 2 3/8" Metal Lever handle(s) with Eight Point Tapered Broach 

and Secured Blue and Red Buttons. Quaturn rebuildable compression cartridge, opens and closes 90°, closes with water pressure, features 

square tapered stem. 1/2" NPT Adjustable Female Union Nut Supply Arms. 3/4" Male Hose Thread Outlet. Round Wall Escutcheons. Integral 

Stop Valves for Servicing the product. Atmospheric Vacuum Breaker, Not Intended for Continuous Pressure Applications. Atmospheric Vacuum 

Breaker, Not Intended for Continuous Pressure Applications. Secondary Control Valve: Vacuum Breaker Spout with Pail Hook and Wall Brace. . 


________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 












P: 847/803-5000 

F: 847/803-5454 




WR 1939 

ADA-Compliant Transfer Shower 

Building Codes Met & EXCEEDED 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Warm Rain Model WR 1939 bath fixtures are constructed of reinforced 

polyester resin covered with a high gloss sanitary-grade gelcoat of 

18-20 mil. thickness. The reinforced fiberglass includes a minimum 

content of 18% fiberglass. 

The bottom base of the unit is constructed of 1/2" end-grained balsa 

wood sandwiched between two layers of reinforced fiberglass at a content 

no less than 18%. The base is an integral part of the unit. 

The outside dimensions of this unit will measure 39" L x 39.5" W x 77.5" H. 

The inside dimension of the unit will be 36" L x 36" W as measured at 

the centerline of the unit in accordance with the ADAAG/ANSI guidelines. 

The bottom floor is a textured bottom floor. 

STANDARD PACKAGES 

WR 1939-A 

Model includes Grab Bars 

The grab bars will be factory installed, the grab bars will be 1.5" outside 

diameter ADA compliant stainless steel bars. One 24" grab bar on the 

wet wall will be placed 34.5" above the floor. One 24" vertical grab bar 

will be placed 4" above the horizontal bar and 4" from the front of the 

unit on the wet wall. One 24" grab bar on the back wall will be placed 

34.5" above the floor. One 24" grab bar will be placed opposite the wet 

wall at 34.5" above the floor. 

WR 1939-B 

Model includes Grab Bars & Fold-up Seat 

One 24" grab bar on the wet wall will be placed 34.5" above the floor. One 

24" vertical grab bar will be placed 4" above the horizontal bar and 4" 

from the front of the unit on the wet wall. One 24" grab bar on the back 

wall will be placed 34.5" above the floor. The ADA compliant seat will be 

factory installed. The seat will support a minimum of 250 lbs. The seat 

will be placed on the side wall opposite the controls 18" above the floor. 

The seat is a rectangular white phenolic ADA compliant seat. 

WR 1939-C 

Model includes Grab Bars, Fold-Up Seat, Pressure Balance Valve, Hand 

held Shower with Slide Bar, Vacuum Breaker, & Curtain Rod with Hangers 

One 24" grab bar on the wet wall will be placed 34.5" above the floor. 

One 24" vertical grab bar will be placed 4" above the horizontal bar 

and 4" from the front of the unit on the wet wall. One 24" grab bar on 

the back wall will be placed 34.5" above the floor. The ADA compliant 

seat will be factory installed. The seat will support a minimum of 250 

lbs. The seat will be placed on the side wall opposite the controls 18" 

above the floor. The seat is a rectangular white phenolic ADA compliant 

seat. One Symmons Allural Valve & Kit model # S4700-T-300B-30-V-X will 

include a Allura S4700 pressure balance valve with integral service stops, 

hand held shower with 30" bar, Vacuum breaker. Also, one Seachrome 

5' curtain rod with hangers and Oatey solid brass drain model # 42150 

will be included. 

www.WarmRain.com 

 

Accessible Designs from Warm Rain

36" 

INSIDE 

24" 

39" 

WR 1939 

ADA Compliant 

1 3/4" Outside Threshold Shower 

1 1/4" 

19 3/4" 

39 1/2" 

36" 

INSIDE 

TOP 

5 1/2" 

39" 

1-1/2"Ø x 24" 

GRAB BAR 

Grab bar 4" from 

finished front of unit. 

1-1/2"Ø x 24" 

GRAB BAR 

77 1/2" 

15" x 32" 

WHITE PHENOLIC 

FOLD UP SEAT 

36" 

18" 

1 3/4" 

FRONT 

SIDE 

2" 

6" 

REINFORCEMENTS 

1/2" plywood completely encased by FRP for field installation of grab bars and fold-up seat 

1 3/4" OUTSIDE THRESHOLD 

1/2" 

1 3/4" 

30" 

32" 

FRONT 

8" 

30 1/2" 

18" 

8" 

19" 

4" 

10 1/2" 

BOTH SIDES 

18" 10 1/2" 

BACK 

Accessible Designs from Warm Rain 

 

www.WarmRain.com

Features 

• MasterCleanTM sprayface resists hard water buildup 

and is easy to clean 

• Ergonomic sprayhead pivots for targeted 

hydromassage or for rinsing the shower enclosure 

• Complements Stillness ® faucet line 

• 2.5 gallon (9.5 L) per minute flow rate 

• Full-coverage, therapeutic massage, and soft-aerated 

• ADA non-positive shut-off 

MULTI-FUNCTION HANDSHOWER 

K-973 

ADA 

STILLNESS ® 

CSA B651 

OBC 



• ADA 

• CSA B651 

• OBC 

• ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1 





Accessories 



K-973 Multi-function handshower – 2.5 gallon (9.5 L) per minute flow rate ❑ CP ❑ Other ____ 

Required Accessories 

K-8593 72″ (1829 mm) metal shower hose OR ❑ CP 

K-9514 60″ (1524 mm) metal shower hose ❑ CP 


Multi-function handshower shall feature a Masterclean sprayface which resists hard water buildup and is easy to clean. 

Handshower shall feature an ergonomic sprayhead which pivots for targeted hydromassage or for rinsing the shower enclosure. 

Handshower shall be available with a 2.5 gallon (9.5 L) per minute flow rate. Handshower shall feature full-coverage, therapeutic 

massage, soft-aerated, and ADA non-positive shut-off. Handshower shall complement the Stillness faucet line. Multi-function 

handshower shall be Kohler Model K-973-____. 

Page 1 of 2 

1045239-4-G 


(1-800-456-4537) 

www.kohler.com

STILLNESS ® 



Plumbing codes require an atmospheric vacuum breaker 

(such as Kohler Model K-9660) be installed in-line with 

handshowers. Please consult with local plumbing officials. 

ADA, CSA B651, OBC compliant when installed to the 

specific requirements of these regulations. 

Reduced flow spray option provided non-positive shut-off 

required by 2010 ADA standard for accessible design, section 

607.6 Spray Unit and Water (Baths) and section 608.6 Spray 

Unit and Water (Showers). 

4-9/16" 

(116 mm) 

3-5/8" 

(92 mm) 

11-7/16" 

(291 mm) 

G1/2-14 Hose 

Thread 

STILLNESS ® MULTI-FUNCTION HANDSHOWER 

Page2of2 

1045239-4-G 

Product Diagram

Features 

• Brass construction 

• Available with standard or lever handle 

• Intended for use with Rite-Temp ® or HiFlow 

Rite-Temp ® valves 

TRITON ® 

BATH & SHOWER TRIM SET 

K-T6908 

ALSO K-T6910, K-T6913 



• ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1 




Accessories 



• NA: None applicable 

Model 

Description 

K-T6908-2A Bath & shower trim set, standard handle ❑ CP 

K-T6908-4A Bath & shower trim set, lever handle ❑ CP 

K-T6910-2A Shower only trim set, standard handle ❑ CP 

K-T6910-4A Shower only trim set, lever handle ❑ CP 

K-T6913-2 Valve only trim set, standard handle ❑ CP 

K-T6913-4 Valve only trim set, lever handle ❑ CP 


The Rite-Temp ® pressure-balancing single-handle bath & shower trim set shall be made of brass construction. Bath & shower 

trim set shall include showerhead with arm and flange, 4-7/8″ (124 mm) diverter spout with NPT connection, and faceplate with 

handle. Shower only trim set shall include showerhead with arm and flange, and faceplate with handle. Valve only trim set shall 

include faceplate with handle. Faucet trim set shall be K-T__________-_____-_____ and Rite-Temp ® valve shall be 

K-304-_____-NA OR K-2971-KS-NA HiFlow Rite-Temp ® valve. 

Page 1 of 2 

107103-4-EE 


(1-800-456-4537) 

www.kohler.com

TRITON ® 

Required Accessories 

K-304-* Rite-Temp valve OR ❑ NA 

K-2971-KS HiFlow Rite-Temp valve with stops ❑ NA 

* For a complete listing of all the Rite-Temp valves, refer to the K-304-* Specification Sheet or Roughing-In sheet. 

Optional Accessories 

58223 Deep roughing-in kit for Rite-Temp ® valve (lever handles) ❑ CP ❑ Other_____ 

58229 Deep roughing-in kit for Rite-Temp ® valve (standard handles) ❑ CP 

88526 HiFlow Rite-Temp ® thin wall installation kit ❑ CP ❑ Other_____ 



NOTICE: Risk of product damage. Long screws, for 

installing trim, can damage the K-2971-KS valve. Consult the 

trim installation guide to verify if the thin wall installation kit 

(88526) is needed. 

Avoid cross-flow conditions. Do not install shut-off device on 

either valve outlet. 

Cap shower outlet if deck-mount spout, diverter, or 

handshower is connected to spout outlet. 

Install straight pipe or tube drop of 7″ (178 mm) to 18″ (457 

mm) with single elbow between valve and wall-mount spout. 

5-5/8" (143 mm) 

1/2" NPT 

72" (1829 mm) - 

78" (1981 mm) 

To Floor 

(Typical) 

7-1/8" 

(181 mm) 

Ø 6-7/16" 

(164 mm) 

Lever 

2-7/16" 

(62 mm) 

2-3/4" 

(70 mm) 

1/2" NPT 

10" (254 mm) 

To Spout 

(Bath Only) 

48" (1219 mm) 

To Floor 

(Shower Only) 

Standard 

Top of Rim 

4-7/8" (124 mm) 

4" (102 mm) 

TRITON ® BATH & SHOWER TRIM SET 

Page2of2 

107103-4-EE 

Product Diagram

Features 


• Washout 

• 3/4″ top spud 

• 14″ (356 mm) extended rim 

• 0.125 gpf (0.47 lpf) to 1.0 gpf (3.8 lpf) 

• WaterSense ® compliant when used with WaterSense 

flushometer 

• Will replace K-4960-ET urinal 

BARDONTM 1/8th GPF 

HIGH EFFICIENCY URINAL (HEU) 

K-4904-ET 



• ADA 


• ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1 

• EPA WaterSense ® 



• 0: White 


Accessories 



K-4904-ET High Efficiency Urinal (HEU) with 3/4″ top spud ❑ 0 ❑ Other_____ 


K-10668 WAVE DC flushometer – 0.125 gpf (0.47 lpf) ❑ CP 

K-10949 Touchless DC urinal flushometer with TriPointTM technology – 0.125 gpf (0.47 lpf) ❑ CP 

K-13520 Manual washdown urinal flushometer – 0.125 gpf (0.47 lpf) ❑ CP 

K-10675 WAVE DC flushometer - 0.5 gpf (1.9 lpf) ❑ CP 

K-10958 Touchless DC urinal flushometer with TriPoint technology - 0.5 gpf (1.9 lpf) ❑ CP 

K-13519 Manual washdown urinal flushometer - 0.5 gpf (1.9 lpf) ❑ CP 

K-10676 WAVE DC flushometer - 1.0 gpf (3.8 lpf) ❑ CP 

K-10960 Touchless DC flushometer with TriPoint technology - 1.0 gpf (3.8 lpf) ❑ CP 

K-13518 Manual washdown urinal flushometer - 1.0 gpf (3.8 lpf) ❑ CP 


The washout urinal shall be made of vitreous china with a 3/4″ top spud. Urinal shall have a 14″ (356 mm) extended rim. Urinal 

shall use 0.125 gpf (0.47 lpf) to 1.0 gpf (3.8 lpf) depending on flushometer specified. Urinal shall be WaterSense compliant when 

used with WaterSense flushometer. Urinal shall be Kohler Model K-4904-ET-_______. 

Page 1 of 2 

1116031-4-F 


(1-800-456-4537) 

www.kohler.com

BARDONTM 1/8th GPF 


Fixture: 

Configuration 3/4″ top spud urinal 

Water per flush 0.125 gpf (0.47 lpf) to 1.0 gpf (3.8 lpf)* 

Spud inlet size 3/4″ 

* Designed to flush with 0.125 gpf (0.47 lpf) to 1.0 gpf 

(3.8 lpf) of water when installed with a water-saving 

flushometer. 



Refer to manufacturer’s instructions and local codes for 

flushometer requirements. 

Will comply with ADA when installed per Section 605 Urinals 

of the ADA 2010 Standards for Accessible Design. 


3/4″ inlet spud 18376 

2″ outlet spud 18766 

Strainer 85061 

Hanger (2 required) 64512 

*Urinal complies with ADA requirements when rim is 

mounted no higher than 17" (432 mm) from finished floor. 

3" 

(76 mm) 

18" (457 mm) 

3/4" Spud 12" (305 mm) 

Wall 

Hangers 

14-1/8" 

(359 mm) 

2" NPT 

Tap 

19" 

(483 mm) 

26-7/8" 

(683 mm) 

3" 

(76 mm) 

21" 

(533 mm) *24" 

(610 mm) 

2" NPT Tap 

40-1/2" 

(1029 mm) 

To Floor 

1/4" 

(6 mm) 

6" (152 mm) 

Outlet Detail 

BARDONTM 1/8th GPF HIGH EFFICIENCY URINAL (HEU) 

Page2of2 

1116031-4-F 

Product Diagram

O P T I M A S Y S T E M S 

Battery Powered Flushometers 

Model 

8186-0.5 

u 

Description 

Exposed, Battery Powered, Sensor Operated G2 ® Model Urinal Flushometer. 

u 

Flush Cycle 

£Model 8186-0.5 (0.5 gpf/1.9 Lpf) 

Buy American Act • 

• C o m plia n t 



u 

u 


Quiet, Exposed, Diaphragm Type, Chrome Plated Urinal Flushometer for either left or right 

hand supply with the following features: 

• PERMEX ® Synthetic Rubber Diaphragm with Dual Filtered Fixed Bypass 

• Flex Tube Diaphragm designed for improved life and reduced maintenance 

• ADA Compliant OPTIMA Plus ® Battery Powered Infrared Sensor for automatic “No 

Hands” operation 

• Infrared Sensor with Multiple-focused, Lobular Sensing Fields for high and low target 

detection 

• Latching Solenoid Operator 

• Engineered Metal Cover with replaceable Lens Window 

• Courtesy Flush ® Override Button 

• Four (4) Size AA Batteries factory installed 

• “Low Battery” Flashing LED 

• Infrared Sensor Range Adjustment Screw 

• Initial Set-up Range Indicator Light (first 10 minutes) 

• ¾” I.P.S. Screwdriver Bak-Chek ® Angle Stop 

• Free Spinning, Vandal Resistant Stop Cap 

• Adjustable Tailpiece 

• High Back Pressure Vacuum Breaker Flush Connection with One-piece Bottom Hex 

Coupling Nut 

• Spud Coupling and Flange for ¾” Top Spud 

• Sweat Solder Adapter with Cover Tube and Cast Set Screw Wall Flange 

• High Copper, Low Zinc Brass Castings for Dezincification Resistance 

• Fixed Metering Bypass and No External Volume Adjustment to Ensure Water 

Conservation 

• Flush Accuracy Controlled by CID Technology 

• Diaphragm, Stop Seat and Vacuum Breaker to be molded from PERMEX ® Rubber 

Compound for Chloramine resistance 

• 100% of the energy used in manufacturing is offset with Renewable Energy Sources 

– Wind Energy 

Valve Body, Tailpiece and Control Stop shall be in conformance with ASTM Alloy 

Classification for Semi-Red Brass. Valve shall be in compliance with the applicable sections 

of ASSE 1037, ANSI/ASME A112.19.2. Installation conforms to ADA requirements. 

Special Finishes 

£ PB Polished Brass (PVD Finish) 

£ BN Brushed Nickel (PVD Finish) 

£ SF Satin Chrome 

u 

u 

u 

u 

u 

ADA Compliant 

Automatic 

Sloan G2 Optima Plus ® Flushometers activate via multi-lobular 

sensor detection to provide the ultimate in sanitary protection and 

automatic operation. A battery powered infrared sensor sets the 

flushing mechanism after the user is detected and completes the 

flush when the user steps away. 

Functional & Hygienic 

Made with 

Touchless, sensor operation eliminates the need for user contact to 

help control the spread of infectious diseases. The G2 Optima Plus 

Flushometer is provided with an Override Button to allow a 

"courtesy flush" for individual user comfort. 

Economical 

Sloan installed batteries speed installation and provide years of 

metered flushing to control the use of water and energy. Batteries 

can be changed without turning off the water. 

Warranty 


Made with 

Renewable Energy 


See Accessories Section and OPTIMA Accessories Section of the Sloan catalog for details 

on these and other OPTIMA Plus ® Flushometer variations. 


Job Name 


Date 

Quantity 



Contractor 

Architect 

G2 Optima Plus 8186-0.5 S.S. — Rev. 1c (04/12) 


Model 

8186-0.5 

u 

u 

Description 

Exposed, Battery Powered, Sensor Operated G2 ® Model Urinal Flushometer. 

Flush Cycle 

£Model 8186-0.5 (0.5 gpf/1.9 Lpf) 


u 

u 

u 


Solid State 

6 VDC Input 

8 Second Arming Delay 

24 Hour Sentinel Flush 

OPTIMA Sensor Type 

Active Infrared 

OPTIMA Sensor Range 

Nominal 15” - 30” (381 mm - 762 mm), 

Adjustable ± 8” (203 mm) 

u 

u 

u 

u 

u 

Battery Type 

(4) AA Alkaline 

Battery Life 

3 Years @ 4,000 Flushes/Month 

Indicator Lights 

Range Adjustment/Low Battery 

Operating Pressure 

15 - 100 psi (104 - 689 kPa) 

Sentinel Flush 

Once Every 24 Hours After the Last 

Flush 

OPERATION 

1. A continuous, invisible light 

beam is emitted from the 

OPTIMA Plus Sensor. 

2. As the user enters the beam’s 

effective range (15” to 30”) 

the beam is reflected into the 

OPTIMA Plus Scanner 

Window and transformed into 

a low voltage electrical circuit. 

Once activated, the Output 

Circuit continues in a “hold” 

mode for as long as the user 

remains within the effective 

range of the Sensor. 

3. When the user steps away 

from the OPTIMA Plus Sensor, 

the Sensor initiates an 

electrical signal that operates 

the Solenoid. This initiates the 

flushing cycle to flush the 

fixture. The Circuit then 

automatically resets and is 


VALVE ROUGH-IN 

Typical Urinal Installation 

Model 8186 

2¼” (57 mm) MIN. 

¾” I.P.S. 

(20 mm DN) 

SUPPLY 

11½” 

(292 mm) 

16½” 

(419 mm) 

C/L OF 

FIXTURE 

4¾” 

(121 mm) 

Note: Lens Deflector no longer needed for targeting 

children or wheel chair users. 

FINISHED 

WALL 

FINISHED 

FLOOR 


Phone: 1-800-9-VALVE-9 or 1-847-671-4300 • Fax: 1-800-447-8329 or 1-847-671-4380 • www.sloanvalve.com 

Copyright © 2012 Sloan Valve Company G2 Optima Plus 8186-0.5 S.S. — Rev. 1c (04/12)

Features 


• Elongated bowl 

• Siphon jet 

• Wall-mount 

• With bedpan lugs (-L) 

• 1-1/2″ top spud 

• 1.28 gpf (4.8 lpf) or 1.6 gpf (6 lpf) depending on 

flushometer specified 

• 10-1/2″ (267 mm) x 9″ (229 mm) water area 

• 26-1/2″ (673 mm) x 16-1/2″ (419 mm) x 13-1/4″ 

(337 mm) 

• Will replace K-4330 and K-4330-L bowls 



• ADA 


• TAS 

• CSA B651 

• OBC 

• ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1 

• Energy Policy Act of 1992 



KINGSTONTM 

BOWL 

K-4325 

CSA B651 

OBC 

• 0: White 




K-4325 Bowl – elongated ❑ 0 ❑ Other_____ 

K-4325-L Bowl – elongated, with bedpan lugs ❑ 0 ❑ Other_____ 


K-4731-C Stronghold ® open-front elongated seat ❑ 0 ❑ Other___ 

K-4731-SC Stronghold open-front elongated seat with integrated handle ❑ 0 ❑ Other___ 

K-4731-GC Stronghold Quiet-CloseTM open-front elongated seat ❑ 0 ❑ Other___ 

K-10673 WAVE exposed toilet flushometer – 1.28 gpf (4.8 lpf) ❑ CP 

K-10956 Touchless DC toilet flushometer – 1.28 gpf (4.8 lpf) ❑ CP 

K-13517 Manual toilet flushometer – 1.28 gpf (4.8 lpf) ❑ CP 

K-10674 WAVE exposed toilet flushometer - 1.6 gpf (6 lpf) ❑ CP 

K-10957 Touchless DC toilet flushometer - 1.6 gpf (6 lpf) ❑ CP 

K-13516 Manual toilet flushometer - 1.6 gpf (6 lpf) ❑ CP 


The elongated bowl shall be made of vitreous china. Bowl shall be 26-1/2″ (673 mm) in length, 16-1/2″ (419 mm) in width, and 

13-1/4″ (337 mm) in height. The bowl shall be wall-mount with a 1-1/2″ top spud. Bowl shall have siphon jet. Bowl shall have 

bedpan lugs (-L). Bowl shall feature 1.28 gpf (4.8 lpf) or 1.6 gpf (6 lpf) depending on flushometer specified. Bowl shall have 

10-1/2″ (267 mm) x 9″ (229 mm) water area. Bowl shall be Kohler Model K-4325-______. 

Page 1 of 2 

1100684-4-H 


(1-800-456-4537) 

www.kohler.com

KINGSTONTM 


Fixture: 

Configuration top spud, elongated 

Water per flush 1.28 gal (4.8 L) or 1.6 gal (6 L)* 

Spud size 1-1/2″ 

Passageway 

2-1/8″ (54 mm) 

Water area 

10-1/2″ (267 mm) x 9″ (229 mm) 

Water depth from rim 5-1/4″ (133 mm) 

Seat post hole 5-1/2″ (140 mm) 

centers 

Minimum static 35 psi (241.3 kPa) 

pressure required 

Maximum static 80 psi (551.6 kPa) 

pressure 

Minimum flowing 25 psi (172.4 kPa) 

pressure required 

Required supply 25 gpm (94.6 lpm) 

minimum 

* Based upon use of a 1.28 gal (4.8 L) or 1.6 gal (6 L) 

flushometer valve. 


Spud 18357 



Refer to manufacturer’s instructions and local codes for 

flushometer requirements. 

Will comply with the American Disabilities Act (ADA) when 

installed per the requirements of the Accessibility Guidelines, 

Section 604 Water Closets, of the Act. The Model Plumbing 

Codes require the installation of elongated open-front toilet 

seats in public bathrooms. 

For TAS compliance the required seating height with the toilet 

seat installed is: 

Adults – 17″ (432 mm) to 19″ (483 mm) 

Children (Elementary Grade Levels 6 through 8 or 9) – 15″ 

(381 mm) to 17″ (432 mm) 



Will comply with OBC Barrier Free requirements when 

installed per Clause 3.8.3.8 and 3.8.3.9. 

1/16" 

(2 mm) 

2-3/4" 

(70 mm) 

Finished Wall 

26-1/2" (673 mm) 

1-1/2" Spud 

16-1/2" (419 mm) 

9" (229 mm) 

1-5/8" 

(41 mm) 

CL Of Outlet 

15" 

(381 mm) 

2-1/2" (64 mm) 

7-1/2" 

(191 mm) 

5" 

(127 mm) 

13-1/4" 

(337 mm) 

Finished Floor 

Product Diagram 

KINGSTONTM BOWL 

Page2of2 

1100684-4-H

O P T I M A S Y S T E M S 

Battery Powered Flushometers 





8111-1.28 

u 

Description 

Exposed, Battery Powered, Sensor Operated G2 ® Model Water Closet Flushometer for floor 

mounted or wall hung top spud bowls. 

u 

Flush Cycle 

Model 8111-1.28 High Efficiency (1.28 gpf/4.8 Lpf) 

Note: Valve may not function with all bowls. Be sure to verify flow requirements with bowl 

manufacturer or call Sloan Valve Company. 

u 


Quiet, Exposed, Diaphragm Type, Chrome Plated Closet Flushometer for either left or right 

hand supply with the following features: 

• PERMEX ® Synthetic Rubber Diaphragm with Dual Filtered Fixed Bypass 

• Flex Tube Diaphragm designed for improved life and reduced maintenance 

• ADA Compliant OPTIMA Plus ® Battery Powered Infrared Sensor for automatic “No 

Hands” operation 

• Infrared Sensor with Multiple-focused, Lobular Sensing Fields for high and low target 

detection 

• Latching Solenoid Operator 

• Engineered Metal Cover with replaceable Lens Window 

• User friendly three (3) second Flush Delay 

• Courtesy Flush ® Override Button 

• Four (4) Size AA Batteries factory installed 

• “Low Battery” Flashing LED 

• Infrared Sensor Range Adjustment Screw 

• Initial Set-up Range Indicator Light (first 10 minutes) 

• 1” I.P.S. Screwdriver Bak-Chek ® Angle Stop 

• Free Spinning, Vandal Resistant Stop Cap 

• Adjustable Tailpiece 

• High Back Pressure Vacuum Breaker Flush Connection with One-piece Bottom Hex 

Coupling Nut 

• Spud Coupling and Flange for 1½” Top Spud 

• Sweat Solder Adapter with Cover Tube and Cast Set Screw Wall Flange 

• High Copper, Low Zinc Brass Castings for Dezincification Resistance 

• Fixed Metering Bypass and No External Volume Adjustment to Ensure Water 

Conservation 

• Flush Accuracy Controlled by CID Technology 

• Diaphragm, Stop Seat and Vacuum Breaker molded from PERMEX ® Rubber Compound 

for Chloramine resistance 

• 100% of the energy used in manufacturing is offset with Renewable Energy Sources 

– Wind Energy 

Valve Body, Tailpiece and Control Stop shall be in conformance with ASTM Alloy 

Classification for Semi-Red Brass. Valve shall be in compliance with the applicable sections 

of ASSE 1037. Installation conforms to ADA requirements. 

u 

u 

u 

u 

u 

ADA Compliant 

Automatic 

Sloan G2 Optima Plus ® Flushometers activate via multi-lobular 

sensor detection to provide the ultimate in sanitary protection and 

automatic operation. A battery powered infrared sensor sets the 

flushing mechanism after the user is detected and completes the 

flush when the user steps away. 

Functional & Hygienic 


Touchless, sensor operation eliminates the need for user contact to 

help control the spread of infectious diseases. The G2 Optima Plus 

Flushometer is provided with an Override Button to allow a 

"courtesy flush" for individual user comfort. 

Economical 

Sloan installed batteries speed installation and provide years of 

metered flushing to control the use of water and energy. Batteries 

can be changed without turning off the water. 

Warranty 


Made with 


Made with 

u 

Special Finishes 

£ PB Polished Brass (PVD Finish) 

£ BN Brushed Nickel (PVD Finish) 

£ SF Satin Chrome 


Job Name 


Date 

Quantity 



Contractor 

Architect 

G2 Optima Plus 8111-1.28 S.S. — Rev. 0a (06/11) 





8111-1.28 


u 

Description 

Exposed, Battery Powered, Sensor Operated G2 ® Model Water Closet Flushometer for floor 

mounted or wall hung top spud bowls. 

u 

Flush Cycle 

Model 8111-1.28 High Efficiency (1.28 gpf/4.8 Lpf) 

Note: Valve may not function with all bowls. Be sure to verify flow requirements with bowl 

manufacturer or call Sloan Valve Company. 

2¼” MIN. 

(57 mm) 

4 ¾” 

(121 mm) 

u 

u 

u 



Solid State 

6 VDC Input 

8 Second Arming Delay 

3 Second Flush Delay 

OPTIMA Sensor Type 

Active Infrared 

OPTIMA Sensor Range 

Nominal 22” - 42” (559 mm -1067 mm), 

Adjustable ± 8” (203 mm) 

u 

u 

u 

u 

u 

Battery Type 

(4) AA Alkaline 

Battery Life 

3 Years @ 4,000 Flushes/Month 

Indicator Lights 

Range Adjustment/Low Battery 

Operating Pressure 

15 - 100 psi (104 - 689 kPa) 

Sentinel Flush 

Once Every 24 Hours After the Last Flush 

C/L OF 

FIXTURE 

16½” 

(419 mm) 

C/L OF 

FIXTURE 

C/L OF 

SUPPLY 

1” I.P.S. 

SUPPLY 

(DN 25 mm) 

5” 

(127 mm) 

11½” 

(292 mm) 

OPERATION 

1. A continuous, invisible light 

beam is emitted from the 

OPTIMA Plus Sensor. 

2. As the user enters the 

beam’s effective range (22” 

to 42”) the beam is reflected 

into the OPTIMA Plus 

Scanner Window and 

transformed into a low 

voltage electrical circuit. 

Once activated, the Output 

Circuit continues in a “hold” 

mode for as long as the user 

remains within the effective 

range of the Sensor. 

3. When the user steps away 

from the OPTIMA Plus 

Sensor, the circuit waits 3 

seconds (to prevent false 

flushing) then initiates an 

electrical signal that operates 

the Solenoid. This initiates 

the flushing cycle to flush the 

fixture. The Circuit then 

automatically resets and is 


VALVE ROUGH-IN 

Typical Water Closet Installation 

Model 8111 

2¼” (57 mm) MIN. 

1” I.P.S. 

(25 mm DN) 

SUPPLY 

11½” 

(292 mm) 

16½” 

(419 mm) 

C/L OF 

FIXTURE 

4¾” 

(121 mm) 

When installing the G2 Optima Plus in a handicap stall: 

Per the ADA Guidelines (section 604.9.4) it is 

recommended that the grab bars be split or shifted to 

the wide side of the stall. 

FINISHED 

WALL 

C/L OF WASTE 

FINISHED 

FLOOR 



Copyright © 2011 Sloan Valve Company G2 Optima Plus 8111-1.28 S.S. — Rev. 0a (06/11)

Series 4302 & 4382 

dualARM Vertical In-Line Pumps 

FILE NO: 43d.12 

DATE: jan 05, 2012 

SUPERSEDES: 43d.12 

DATE: feb. 10, 2011

Series 4302 & 4382 

Smart pumps 

for the 

commercial 

hvac market. 

• Armstrong Vertical In-Line pump, the best design for hvac 

systems, introduced in 1969. 

• Armstrong dualARM Vertical In-Line pump, introduced in 1994. 

• dualARM Series 4302 & 4382 contain all the features and 

advantages of two Armstrong time proven Vertical In-Line pumps, 

in one casing. 

Series 4302 , shown with one guard removed to reveal outside balanced 

seal, and a cutaway to show the isolation valve. 

Adding Value to Hydronic Systems 

Floor Space Value: 

In a typical system, for example 1000 USgpm flow at 50 ft head (63.1 L/s at 15.2 m), the dualARM needs only one quarter of the space 

required for two end suction base mounted pumps and one eighth the space required for two split case horizontal pumps. 

Installation Value: 

Vertical In-Line pumps become an integral component of the piping system. This configuration eliminates the need for flexible 

connectors, inertia bases, grouting and field alignment. 

Maintenance Value: 

Mechanical seals require the greatest amount of maintenance in any pump. Service is performed on any Vertical In-Line pump without 

removing the casing from the piping. The Series 4302 split-spacer coupling design allows the mechanical seals to be serviced without 

disturbing the pump or motor connections. 

System Value: 

Standby and parallel pump systems may now be designed using only one pump piping set. Two pumps in a single large port casing 

allow both pumps to operate simultaneously, in true parallel fashion, with no loss in single pump efficiency. 

Design Value: 

dualARM Vertical In-Line pumps, designed with a swing split-flapper valve in the discharge port, prevent liquid recirculating when only 

one pump is operating. Unique Armstrong isolation valves allow one pump to be isolated and removed for service while the second 

pump remains in operation.

dualARM Vertic al In-Line Pumps 

Series 4302 

Designed to incorporate two Armstrong standard Series 4300 split coupled Vertical In-Line pumps in a single casing. All existing 4300 

series catalogue information and performance curves may be used, or doubled in the case of parallel operation, for the Series 4302 Vertical 

In-Line pump. 

1 

2 

6 

5 

3 

3 

11 

9 

11 

8 7 

10 

1 Motor: Industry standard, designed for in-line service. 

2 Motor shaft: Run-out limited to 0.001" (0.03 mm) tir (Total 

Indicated Reading). 

3 Coupling: Axially split type spacer permits removal of seal 

without disturbing pump or motor. 

4 Shaft: Stainless Steel with deflection at mechanical seal limited 

to 0.002" (0.05 mm) tir. 

5 Mechanical seal: Outside balanced or inside type, accessible 

and easily replaced. 

6 Seal plate: Flush connection ensures lubrication at the seal faces 

and positive venting of seal chamber. 

7 Impeller: Dynamically balanced to ensure smooth vibration-free 

operation. 

8 Volute: Radially split, with equal suction and discharge flange 

sizes. Separate tapped openings for gauge, flush and drain 

connections. 

9 Gasket: Confined casing gasket to meet stringent industrial 

temperature and pressure applications. 

10 Flapper valve: Hydraulically isolates casings preventing 

recirculation when only one pump operates. 

11 Isolation valves: Allow one unit to be isolated and removed for 

service with the second unit still operating. 

12 Coupling guards: Fully enclose all access openings. (Not shown.)

Series 4382 

Designed to incorporate two Armstrong standard Series 4380 close coupled Vertical In-Line pumps in a single casing. All existing 4380 

series catalogue information and performance curves may be used, or doubled in the case of parallel operation, for the Series 4382 

Vertical In-Line pump. 

1 

6 

3 

2 

8 

8 

5 4 

7 

1 Motor: Industry standard, designed for in-line service. 

2 Flush and vent connection: - Removes entrained air ensuring 

lubricating liquid is at the seal faces at all times. Piped to pump 

suction. 

3 Mechanical seal: - Inside type with Silicon Carbide seat, 

serviceable without disturbing the pipe connections. 

4 Impeller: Dynamically balanced to ensure smooth vibration-free 

operation. 

5 Volute: Radially split, with equal suction and discharge flange 

sizes. Separate tapped openings for gauge, flush and drain 

connections. 

6 Gasket: Confined casing gasket to meet stringent industrial 

temperature and pressure applications. 

7 Flapper valve: Hydraulically isolates casings preventing 

recirculation when only one pump operates. 

8 Isolation valves: Allow one unit to be isolated and removed for 

service while the second unit remains in operation.

dualARM Vertic al In-Line Pumps 

4302 Sealing Arrangements 

Armstrong Series 4302 split coupled Vertical In-Line pump is available with two normal mechanical seal arrangements. Each arrangement 

may be removed quickly and easily for servicing, without costly removal of the motor or rotating assembly from the pump casing. The high 

performance outside seal combines the advantages of a balanced seal with premium quality. The internal mechanical seal provides an 

economical alternative. 

Outside Balanced Mechanical 

Seal Arrangement 

Inside Unbalanced Mechanical 

Seal Arrangement 

1 

2 

5 

7 

3 

4 

6 

1 

7 

6 

5 

4 

2 

3 

1 Pump Shaft 

2 Rotating Hardware 

3 Spring(s) 

4 Secondary Seal 

5 Rotating Face 

6 Stationary Seat 

8 

8 

7 Gland Plate 

8 Throttle Bushing 

4382 Sealing Arrangements 

Armstrong Series 4382 close coupled Vertical In-Line pump is supplied with an economical internal single spring unbalanced mechanical 

seal. The seal is serviced by removing the rotating element from the casing. The pump casing typically remains in the piping. 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

4 

6 

7 

1 Motor Shaft 

2 Shaft Sleeve 

3 Stationary Seat 

4 Secondary Seal 

5 Rotating Face 

6 Spring 

7 Rotating Hardware 

dualARM Pressure/Temperature Parameters 

pressure psig (bar) 

(20.00) 300 

(17.24) 250 

(13.79) 200 

(10.34) 150 

(6.90) 100 

(3.45) 50 

b 

a 

legend 

a 4302 & 4382 bf 

b 4302 & 4382 dbf 

All seals supplied with Silicon carbide seats. 

(0) 0 

0 

(-18) 

50 

(10) 

100 

(38) 

150 

(66) 

temperature °f(°c) 

200 

(93) 

250 

(121) 

notes: For clean untreated water. For pumping temperatures above 200°f, 

longer mechanical seal life can be achieved on Series 4302 if flushing 

liquid is cooled by an external heat exchanger to maintain seal flush 

water below 200°f.

Armstrongest System Value 

Armstrong dualARM Vertical In-Line pumps, when installed with Armstrong Suction Guides 1 and Armstrong Flo-Trex combination valves 

2, result in the greatest added value and lowest life cycle cost of any equipment that can be designed into today’s commercial, industrial, 

hvac and packaged systems. 

1 The Armstrong Suction Guide, designed with flow stabilizing 

plates in the outlet port, allows the guide to be bolted directly 

onto the pumpsuction flange, enabling the vertical piping to 

turn 90° into the pump. A disposable fine mesh start-up 

strainer and permanent perforated stainless steel strainer 

complete this valuable fitting. 

The Suction Guide eliminates the need for a separate suction 

strainer, long radius elbow and minimum straight pipe run to 

the pump suction. 

2 The Armstrong Flo-Trex triple function combination valve is 

designed to operate equally as a non-slam check valve, drip 

tight isolation valve and properly designed throttling valve. The 

throttling feature enables a system head increase to operate 

the pump at design conditions. The Armstrong uniquely 

designed valve is field convertible from 90° angle type to 180° 

straight type. 

The Flo-Trex combination valve eliminates the need for a 

discharge elbow, a separate check valve and a throttling type 

isolation valve. 

2 armstrong flo-trex 

combination valve 

1 armstrong 

suction guide 

armstrong dualARM 

vertical in-line pump

Typical Specifications 

Series 4302 Split Coupled 

Vertical In-Line Pump 

Supply and install as shown on the plans and specifications, 

Armstrong Series 4302 dualARM split coupled Vertical In-Line 

centrifugal pumping unit. The cast casing with equal size suction 

and discharge flanges, having separate tapped flush line and 

pressure gauge connections, shall incorporate two radially split, 

single stage centrifugal pumps. Each pump shall have a cast bronze 

dynamically balanced impeller, stainless steel shaft, lower seal flush 

throttle bushing, outside balanced mechanical seal with stainless 

steel parts, Viton secondary seal, carbon vs silicone carbide faces 

and stainless steel gland plate and hardware. Each pump shall be 

fitted with a factory furnished flush line to the mechanical seal. The 

flush line is to be fitted with a manual air vent. 

Each driving motor shall be an industry standard vertical solid 

shaft, squirrel cage induction type, built to nema standards(motor 

efficiency levels may be specified). The motor shall have 

enclosure and be suitable for a Hz, Phase, 

Volt power supply and shall be connected to the pump by means 

of a rigid split type spacer coupling that permits removal of the 

mechanical seal without disturbing the pump or motor connections. 

The inlet and outlet ports on the casing shall be at least one size 

larger than the single pump size, so that both units may operate 

in parallel with no loss of single pump efficiency. Each port shall 

be fitted with an isolation valve that allows the units to operate in 

parallel or standby. It may also be used to isolate one pumping unit 

for servicing or removal, while the other pump remains operating. 

Series 4382 Close Coupled 

Vertical In-Line Pump 

Supply and install as shown on the plans and specifications, 

Armstrong Series 4382 dualARM close coupled type Vertical In 

-Line centrifugal pumping unit. The cast casing with equal size 

suction and discharge flanges, having separate tapped flush line 

and pressure gauge connections, shall incorporate two radially 

split, single stage centrifugal pumps. Each pump shall have a 

cast bronze dynamically balanced impeller, bronze shaft sleeve 

and inside type single spring mechanical seal with carbon* vs 

silicone carbide faces. Each pump shall be complete with a factory 

furnished flush and vent line. 

Each driving motor shall be an industry standard vertical solid 

shaft, squirrel cage induction type, built to nema standards(motor 

efficiency levels may be specified). The motor shall have 

enclosure and be suitable for a Hz, Phase, 

Volt power supply. The inlet and outlet ports on 

the casing shall be at least one size larger than the single pump 

size, so that both units may operate in parallel with no loss of 

single pump efficiency. Each port shall be fitted with an isolation 

valve that allows the units to operate in parallel or standby. It may 

also be used to isolate one pumping unit for servicing or removal, 

while the other pump remains operating. 

* For liquids above 200°f / 93°c use: antimony loaded carbon 

For Glycols greater than 30% by wt use: silicon carbide 

Flush line option: 

Supply in the flush line to the mechanical seal a 50 micron cartridge 

type filter (if the differential pressure exceeds 30 psig [2 bars], a 

Cyclone separator may be specified) and a sight flow indicator. The 

mechanical contractor shall change the filter cartridge after the 

system has been flushed and on a regular basis thereafter, until the 

building is turned over to the owner.

s. a. armstrong limited 

23 Bertrand Avenue 

Toronto, Ontario 

Canada, m1l 2p3 

t 416 755 2291 

f 416 759 9101 

armstrong pumps inc. 

93 East Avenue 

North Tonawanda, New York 

U.S.A., 14120-6594 

t 716 693 8813 

f 716 693 8970 

armstrong integrated limited 

Wenlock Way 

Manchester 

United Kingdom, m12 5jl 

t +44 (0) 8444 145 145 

f +44 (0) 8444 145 146 

© s. a. armstrong limited 2012 

For Armstrong locations worldwide, please visit www.armstrongintegrated.com

30 

HE4XINV 

Indoor Unit 

G5 Performance 

Effectiveness (%) 

80 

60 

40 

Airflow Performance 

Motor 

HP 

2 

3 

CFM 

1,000 2,000 3,000 4,000 

*At AHRI 1060 standard conditions 

(See certified data on page 73 for core components.) 

Blower 

RPM 

Turns 

Open 

Sensible 

Winter Total 

Summer Total 

(800) 627-4499 • Fax: (608) 221-2824 


Ventilation Type: Static Plate, Heat and Humidity Transfer 

Typical Airflow Range: 1,000-4,400 CFM 

AHRI 1060 Certified Core: Four L125-00 

Airflow Rating Points (for AHRI): 3,000 CFM and 2,250 CFM 

Number Motors: Two belt drive blower/motor packages 

with adjustable sheaves 

HP Volts HZ Phase 

FLA 

(per motor) 

External Static Pressure (in. w.g.) 

0.00 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 

SCFM BHP SCFM BHP SCFM BHP SCFM BHP SCFM BHP SCFM BHP SCFM BHP 

1191 4 3330 1.4 3015 1.2 2690 1.0 1915 0.8 1085 0.6 

1329 2 3715 1.9 3440 1.7 3100 1.5 2485 1.3 2000 1.0 1200 0.8 

1432 0.5 4000 2.4 3740 2.2 3480 2.0 3050 1.7 2490 1.5 1900 1.2 1100 0.9 

1466 0 3200 1.9 2650 1.6 2120 1.3 1385 1.1 

1462 3 4060 2.6 3810 2.4 3550 2.1 3180 1.9 2645 1.6 2075 1.3 1345 1.0 

1503 2.5 4175 2.8 3940 2.6 3700 2.4 3340 2.1 2885 1.7 2300 1.5 1600 1.2 

1586 1.5 3950 2.8 3640 2.5 3250 2.3 2745 2.0 2170 1.7 

1668 0.5 3900 3.0 3600 2.7 3155 2.4 2640 2.1 

1710 0 3750 3.0 3350 2.7 2975 2.4 

1627 4 4393 3.9 4210 3.7 4050 3.6 3800 3.3 3490 3.1 3020 2.7 2385 2.4 

5 1731 2 4350 4.3 4150 4.1 3895 3.8 3515 3.5 3055 3.2 

1836 0 4400 5.0 4250 4.7 3970 4.4 3550 4.0 

Note: Brake Horse Power (BHP) is for one blower motor package only. 

Operation in this zone will likely exceed FLA limits. Operation in this zone outside of core airflow limits. 

2 

3 

5 

2 

3 

5 

115 

208-230 

208-230 

460 

575 

208-230 

208-230 

460 

575 

208-230 

460 

575 

60 

60 

60 

60 

60 

60 

60 

60 

60 

60 

60 

60 

Single 

Single 

Three 

Three 

Three 

Single 

Three 

Three 

Three 

Three 

Three 

Three 

20.0 

10.8-10.0 

6.1-5.8 

2.9 

2.4 

13.0-11.8 

9.4-8.5 

4.2 

3.3 

14.5-13.4 

6.7 

5.3 

Min. 

Cir. 

Amps 

45.0 

24.3 

13.6 

6.5 

5.4 

29.3 

21.1 

9.5 

7.4 

32.6 

15.1 

11.9 

Max. Overcurrent 

Protection Device 

60 

35 

15 

15 

15 

40 

25 

15 

15 

45 

20 

15 

Optional Factory Installed VFD Electrical Specifications 

208-230 

208-230 

460 

575 

208-230 

208-230 

460 

575 

208-230 

460 

575 

60 

60 

60 

60 

60 

60 

60 

60 

60 

60 

60 

Single 

Three 

Three 

Three 

Single 

Three 

Three 

Three 

Three 

Three 

Three 

6.1-5.8 

6.1-5.8 

2.9 

2.4 

9.4-8.5 

9.4-8.5 

4.2 

3.3 

14.5-13.4 

6.7 

5.3 

26.0 

15.0 

7.2 

5.9 

40.2 

23.2 

10.5 

8.2 

35.9 

16.6 

13.1 

30 

15 

15 

15 

45 

25 

15 

15 

45 

20 

15 

Standard Features: Totally Enclosed Premium Efficiency Motors 

Motor Starters, Non-fused Disconnect 

24 VAC Transformer/Relay Package 

Filters: Eight total, MERV 8, 2” pleated, 20” x 20” nominal size 

Weight: 841 lbs (unit), 950 lbs (shipping weight, on pallet) 

Shipping Dimensions: 54” L x 90” W x 68” H 

Options: 

Fused disconnect 

Double wall construction 

Factory supplied and mounted Variable 

Frequency Drives (VFDs) - one or both airstreams 

Motorized isolation dampers, OA, EA or both airstreams 

Factory mounted Filter Alarms (2)

HE4XINV 

Unit Dimensions 

14" X 34" 

DUCT FLANGE 

81 1/2" 

RA 

73 1/2" Power & 

Control Wiring Inlets 

(4) Pressure Taps 

35 1/4" 

14" X 34" 

DUCT FLANGE 

1" 

RA 

OA 

OA 

Disconnect 

Switch 

FA 

EA 

EA 

47" 

4 1/4" 4 1/4" 

(2)Ø 7/8" 

Wiring Inlets 

5 3/4" Power In 

2 5/8" Control In 

FRONT VIEW 

12" x 32" 

DUCT FLANGE 

EA Damper 

Location 

(Optional) 

RIGHT VIEW 

37 7/8" 

10 1/8" 

10 1/4" 

4" 

62" 

47" 

FA 

LEFT VIEW 

115 1/2" 

Servoce Area 

EA: Exhaust Air to outdoors 

OA: Outdoor Air intake 

RA: Room Air to be exhausted 

FA: Fresh Air to inside 

OA 

EA 

43 5/8" 

with flanges 

47" 

Service Area 

RA 

FA 

81 1/2" Unit 

TOP VIEW 

E-Box 

12" X 32" 

DUCT FLANGE 

FA Damper 

Location 

(Optional) 

For the most complete and current information visit www.RenewAire.com 

31

Model: CMB-P1016NU-HA 

Job Name: 

Schedule Reference: 

Date: 

Refrigerant Piping Diameter 

To Outdoor and Water-source Units 

P72 

High Pressure Pipe ........5/8" / 15.88 mm Brazed 

Low Pressure Pipe ........3/4" / 19.05 mm Brazed 

P96 


Low Pressure Pipe .........7/8" / 22.2 mm Brazed 

BC Controller FEATURES 

• R410A refrigerant 

• Use with modular R2-Series outdoor units and 

WR2-Series water-source units with R410A refrigerant 

(T[S]HMU, Y[S]HMU, T[S]JMU, and Y[S]JMU versions) 

• Each branch supports 54,000 Btu/h or less 

• Use optional port connector when combining two 

branches if the total unit capacity is more than 

54,000 Btu/h 

• Included reducers are necessary for indoor units 

18,000 Btu/h or less 

Main BC Controller Specifications 

Power 

Power Source……………….208 / 230V, 1 phase, 60Hz 

Power Input 

Cooling…………………………….0.274 / 0.353 kW/h 

Heating…………………………….0.137 / 0.177 kW/h 

Current 

Cooling (208 / 230)………………………1.32 / 1.54 A 

Heating (208 / 230)………………………0.66 / 0.77 A 

Minimum Circuit Ampacity (MCA)…………………1.63 A 

Maximum Overcurrent Protection (MOCP)………...15 A 

External Finish………………....Galvanized Steel Plate 

Lower Drain Pan: Pre-coated Galvanized Sheets 

with Powder Coating 

External Dimensions 

Inches…………………11-7/16 H x 43-3/4 W x 20-1/2 D 

mm……………………………..289 H x 1,110 W x 520 D 

Net Weight………………………………..172 lbs. / 78 kg 

Number of Branches…………………………………..16 

Indoor Unit Capacity 

Connectable to one Branch 

• Model P54 or smaller 

• Use optional port connector when combining two 

branches if the total unit capacity exceeds 54,000 Btu/h 

• Use the reducer (standard accessory) when an 

indoor unit of 18,000 Btu/h or smaller is connected 

Refrigerant…………………………………………R410A 

P120 


Low Pressure Pipe ......1-1/8" / 28.58 mm Brazed 

P144/P168/P192 

High Pressure Pipe .........7/8" / 22.2 mm Brazed 


P216 

High Pressure Pipe ......1-1/8" / 28.58 mm Brazed 


P240 


Low Pressure Pipe (R2) ..1-3/8" / 34.93 mm Brazed 

Low Pressure Pipe (WR2) 1-1/8" / 28.58 mm Brazed 

P264/P288 



To Indoor Unit 

Liquid Pipe. ................3/8" / 9.52 mm Flare 

(1/4" / 6.35 mm with attached reducer used 

1/2" / 12.7 mm with optional port connector used) 

Gas Pipe .................5/8" / 15.88 mm Flare 

(1/2" / 12.7 mm with attached reducer used, 

3/4" / 19.05 mm and 7/8" / 22.2 mm 

with optional port connector used) 

To Sub BC Controller 

Total indoor unit capacity ≤72,000 Btu/h 

High Gas Pressure Pipe ....5/8" / 15.88 mm Brazed 

Low Gas Pressure Pipe. ....3/4" / 19.05 mm Brazed 

Liquid Pipe. ...............3/8" / 9.52 mm Brazed 

Total indoor unit capacity 73,000 to 108,000 Btu/h 

High Gas Pressure Pipe ....3/4" / 19.05 mm Brazed 

Low Gas Pressure Pipe. .....7/8" / 22.2 mm Brazed 













Liquid Pipe. ..............5/8" / 15.88 mm Brazed 

Drainpipe. ................... 

O.D. 1-1/4" / 32 mm 

OPTIONS 

□ Joint Adapter (Port connector). ........CMY-R160-J 

□ Branch Joint (T-Branch) ...........CMY-Y102S-G2 

□ Condensate Pump ..................SI3100-230 

□ Ball Valve (3/8" SAE Flare) .............BV38FFSI 

□ Ball Valve (5/8" SAE Flare) .............BV58FFSI 

Specifications are subject to change without notice. 

© 2012 Mitsubishi Electric & Electronics USA, Inc.

Model: CMB-P1016NU-HA – DIMENSIONS 

FORM# CMB-P1016NU-HA - 201205 


© 2012 Mitsubishi Electric & Electronics USA, Inc. 

3400 Lawrenceville Suwanee Rd 

Suwanee, GA 30024 

Tele: 678-376-2900 • Fax: 800-889-9904 

Toll Free: 800-433-4822 (#3) 

www.mehvac.com 

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

Model: PLFY-P15NCMU-ER4 

Job Name: 

Schedule Reference: 

Date: 


Capacity* 

Cooling……………………..............................15,000 Btu/h 

Heating……………………..............................17,000 Btu/h 

Power 

Power Source……………….........208 / 230V, 1-phase, 60Hz 

Power Consumption 

Cooling………………………………………………..0.06 kW 

Heating………………………………………………..0.06 kW 

Current 

Cooling……...............................................................0.28 A 

Heating……...............................................................0.28 A 

Minimum Circuit Ampacity (MCA)……………………......0.35 A 

Maximum Overcurrent Protection (MOCP) Fuse..….......15 A 

External Finish…Grille (White; Munsell No. 6.4Y 8.9 / 0.4) 

General FEATURES 

• Dual set point functionality 

• Lightweight, low-profile compact design 

• 2' x 2' size matches size of many ceiling tiles 

• Three-speed fan settings 

• Auto fan 

• Corner-pocket design for simplified installation 

• Built-in condensate lift mechanism; lifts to 19-11/16 in. 

• Ventilation air intake supported 

OPTIONS 

□□ 

External Heater Adapter……...…………CN24RELAY-KIT-CM3 

** PLFY-P-NCMU-ER4 should be used with the SLP-15AAUW. 

Service Access Note: If the PLFY-NCMU-ER4 indoor unit is to be installed 

in a non-accessible location, such as a gypsum ceiling, an access panel 

meeting the minimum size requirements shown on the dimension page 

shall be required for service and maintenance. 


Inches………………….8-3/16 H x 22-7/16 W x 22-7/16 D 

mm………………………………...208 H x 570 W x 570 D 

Grille 

Inches……………….25/32 H x 25-19/32 W x 25-19/32 D 

mm……………………………..........20 H x 650 W x 650 D 

Net Weight 

Unit………………..…...……………................37 lbs. / 17 kg 

Grille……….………..………..………..…..........7 lbs. / 3 kg 

Coil Type.………………..…...……………..............Cross Fin 

(Aluminum Plate Fin and Copper Tube) 

Fan 

Type x Quantity……………................................Turbo Fan x 1 

Airflow Rate (Low - Med - High)…….………...320 - 350 - 390 CFM 

Motor Type……………....…………….Single-phase Induction 

Air Filter…………......…………..Polypropylene Honeycomb 

Refrigerant Piping Dimensions 

R410A 

Liquid (High Pressure)………………..1/4" / 6.35 mm Flare 

Gas (Low Pressure)…………………..1/2" / 12.7 mm Flare 

Drainpipe Dimension………………...O.D. 1-1/4" / 32 mm 

Sound Pressure Level 

(Low - Med - High)…………...……………...31 - 35 - 40 dB(A) 

* Cooling / Heating capacity indicated at the maximum value at operation under the following conditions: 

Cooling | Indoor: 80° F (27° C) DB / 67° F (19° C) WB, Outdoor 95° F (35° C) DB 

Heating | Indoor: 70° F (21° C) DB, Outdoor 47° F (8° C) DB / 43° F (6° C) WB 

Notes: 


© 2012 Mitsubishi Electric & Electronics USA, Inc.

Unit : in.(mm) 

Model: PLFY-P15NCMU-ER4 – DIMENSIONS 

19/32~1-15/32(15~37) 19/32~1-15/32(15~37) 

Ventilation air intake 

22-11/16~24-13/32(576~620) Ceiling hole 

16-17/32(420) 

Suspension bolt pitch 

20-7/8(530) 

Suspension bolt pitch 

22-7/16(570) 

13-3/16(335) 

1-7/32(31) 

22-7/16(570) 

Detail drawing of ventilation air intake 

3-15/16( 100) 

3- 1/8( 2.8) 

Burring hole 

120° 

4-21/32(118) 

Ceiling surface 

1(25) 

2-7/8( 73.4) 

Cut out hole 

120° 

2-1/14(57) 

2-7/32(56) 

13-27/32(352) 

13-3/16(335) 

7-27/32(199) 

19/32~1-15/32(15~37) 22-11/16~24-13/32(576~620) Ceiling hole 19/32~1-15/32(15~37) 

3-7/16(87) 

4-3/4(121) 2-19/32(66) 

3-21/32(93) 

1-1/2~2-9/32(38~58) 

2 

1 

7-15/16(202) 

Terminal block 

9-1/16(230) 

Grille 

Ceiling surface 

Drainpipe 

VP-25 connection 

(O.D. 1-1/4( 32)) 

Suspension bolt M10 or W3/8 

7-19/32(193) 

8-3/16(208) 

9-1/4(235) 

+3/16 + 

0 

(27 0 

) 

25/32(20) 

1-1/16 

Wiring entry 

7-5/32(182) 

Models 

1 

Unit : in.(mm) 

2 

1-3/8(35) 

25-19/32(650) 

11-27/32(301) 

Air outlet hole 

Brand label 

PLFY-P08NCMU-ER4 



Refrigerant pipe 

(1/4 (6.35) dia.) 

flared connection 

1/4F 

Refrigerant pipe 

(1/2 (12.7) dia.) 

flared connection 

1/2F 

Grille 

2-5/32(55) 

Drain hole 

Auto vane 

25-19/32(650) 

11-27/32(301) 

Air outlet hole 

14-27/32(377) 

Air intake hole 

Service Access Required 

1-7/8(48) 

Air intake grille 

14-27/32(377) 

Air intake hole 

1-3/8(35) 2-5/32(55) 

Vane motor 

FORM# PLFY-P15NCMU-ER4 - 201207 


© 2012 Mitsubishi Electric & Electronics USA, Inc. 

3400 Lawrenceville Suwanee Rd 


Tele: 678-376-2900 • Fax: 800-889-9904 

Toll Free: 800-433-4822 (#4) 

www.mitsubishipro.com 


Model: AG-150 

(AG-150 Standard Package) 

Job Name: 

Location: 

Drawing Reference: 

Schedule No. 

System No.: 

Date: 

AG-150 STANDARD PACKAGE 

• AG-150 Centralized Controller 

• PAC-SC51KUA Power Supply 

• SW-Mon: PC Monitoring 

• SW-Sch: PC Scheduling 

• SW-Email: Online Error Email 

• SW-Maint: Online Maintenance Tool 

• SW-TG-2000: TG-2000 Software 

Optional Software 

• SW-Charge: Tenant billing 

• SW- Pweb: Online Personal Browser 

OVERVIEW OF CITY MULTI ® CONTROLS 

NETWORK (CMCN) 

• Consists of TG-2000 integrated system software, AG-150/ 

GB-50ADA/GB-24/TC-24 centralized controllers, web 

browsers, timers, remote controllers, and BMS interfaces. 

• TG-2000 integrated system software supports up to 40 

AG-150/GB-50ADA centralized controllers (licensed for 

PC software features) for a maximum of 2,000 indoor 

units from a single PC. 

• AG-150 centralized controller operates up to 50 indoor 

units with optional control via a field-supplied PC with 

licensed software. 

• GB-50ADA centralized controller operates up to 50 

indoor units via a field-supplied PC with licensed 

software. 

• GB-24 central controller operates up to 24 indoor units 

via a field-supplied PC with licensed software. 

• TC-24 standalone centralized controller operates up to 24 

indoor units via an integral touch screen interface. 

• Remote controllers consist of Deluxe MA, Simple MA 

Wireless MA, and ME. 

• I/O controllers consist of DIDO (PAC-YG66DCA) and 

AI (PAC-YG63MCA) for third-party equipment control. 

• LonWorks ® and BACnet ® interfaces also available. 

• Interlocking of LOSSNAY ® ERV units for control via 

the AG-150/GB-50ADA/GB-24/TC-24 centralized 

controllers. 

Software Features 

• SW-Mon: Monitoring enables building manager to 

customize and operate all indoor units from a network PC’s 

web browser for up to 50 units per AG-150. 

• SW-Sch: PC Scheduling enables building manager to 

customize daily, weekly and annual schedules from a 

network PC’s web browser from up to 50 indoor units per 

AG-150. Schedules can be applied to a single indoor unit, a 

group of indoor units or collectively (batch) to all indoor 

units controlled by the AG-150. 

• SW-Email: Online Error Email Distribution when an error 

occurs on the CITY MULTI system monitored by the 

AG-150. The fault will be detected and a detailed alert will 

be sent via email to the necessary personnel. 

• SW-Maint: Online Maintenance Tool software performs 

maintenance diagnostics via network PC and AG-150 

Centralized Controller. Does not require CMS-MNG-E 

convert/cable. 

• SW-TG-2000: TG-2000 Integrated System Software enables 

the building manager to control up to 40 AG-150 Central 

Controllers with a maximum of 2,000 indoor units across 

multiple CITY MULTI outdoor units. Requires a dedicated 

networked PC and AG-150 software licenses (per AG-150 

per function.) 

Optional Software Features 

• SW-Charge: Tenant “Charge” Billing calculates per tenant 

CITY MULTI energy usage in kWh and in monetary amount 

based on the energy consumption of the outdoor unit(s) 

divided among the associated indoor units. Requires 

TG-2000 software on a dedicated network PC connected to 

RS-485 watt hour meter (WHM.) 

• SW-Pweb: Online Personal Web Browser allows individual 

user (up to 50) to control his/her zone conditioning via 

personal networked PC with or without a remote controller.

Model: AG-150 

AG-150 CENTRALIZED CONTROLLER SPECIFICATIONS 

• 9 inch back lit, high resolution LCD color, touch panel display. 

• Manages up to 50 indoor units. Units can be controlled individually, 

in a group or in a collective batch operation. 

• Monitoring and Operation mode selection (Cool, Heat, Auto 

(R2-Series only), Dry, Fan), temperature setting and air flow direction. 

• Scheduling: Supports daily, annual and a two pattern weekly 

seasonal schedule (SW-Sch required; single weekly schedule does 

not require SW-Sch) that can be scheduled for seasonal switch over. 

Supports scheduling fan speed and vane direction. 

• Monitor/Control of I/O (AI and DIDO) controllers via touch screen 

or PC browser. 

• 24 hour clock or 12 hour clock (AM/PM). 

• SSL (Secure Socket Layer) Security protocol for network 

communications. 

• Memory back up via USB (universal serial bus) port. 

Power Supply 

Item 

Environmental Conditions 

Weight 

Dimensions (W x H x D) 

WEB BROWSER REQUIREMENTS 

Item 

CPU 

Memory 

Screen Resolution 

Compatible 

Browser 

Windows® 

Macintosh® 

Onboard LAN Port or LAN Card 

Other 

TG-2000 REQUIREMENTS 

• RJ-45 100BASE-TX Ethernet port supports interconnection directly 

to PC or to Local Area Network (LAN), PC browser and TG-2000 

software functions require Mitsubishi Electric HVAC issued 

software licenses. 

• Permits or prohibits remote controller functions such as On/Off, 

Change Operation Mode and Set Temperature adjustment. 

• Error code display with built in HELP Menu for troubleshooting and 

maintenance diagnostics. 

• Requires manual addressing through touch screen or initial settings 

browser to the M-NET communication bus (default address is 000.) 

• Wiring: requires power supply unit (PAC-SC51KUA). 

• Dimensions: 7-5/16 H x 11-13/16 W x 1-1/16" D 

• External input/output signals can be used for batch operations such 

as Start/Stop and Emergency Stop. 


M-Net Terminal 

17VDC-32VDC 

*Power Supply: PAC-SC51KUA 

Controller Drive 

24VDC 

Operating Range 

32° - 104°F (0° - 40°C) 

Temperature 

Non-operating Range 

-4° - +140°F (-20° - +60°C) 

Humidity 

30-90% RH (No condensation) 

4-5/8 lbs. (2.1kg) 

11-13/16 x 7-5/16 x 2-13/16" (1-1/16") / 300 x 185 x 70.3mm (25.6 mm) *( ): indicates the thickness from the wall 

Requirements 

Pentium® 300MHz or faster 

64MB or more (128MB or more recommended) 

1024 x 768 or higher recommended 

Microsoft® Internet Explorer 6.0 or later (Note: Java® execution environment is required [Sun Microsysems® Java 

Plug-in Ver. 1.6.0 or later]. Check the Sun Microsystems Java Plug-in version in “Java” in the control panel). 

Safari® (with Mac® OS X) (Note: Java execution environment is required [Sun Microsystems Java Plug-in Ver. 1.4.2 or 

later; can download from Apple® Computer’s homepage.]. Check the Sun Microsystems Java Plug-in version at the 

[Help]-[Installed Plug-ins] on the Safari browser.) 

One connector (100BASE-TX) 

Pointing device such as a mouse. 

Item Requirements Recommendations/Notes 

When in use with 

TG-2000 Version 5.50 or later (purchase the option or use equipment recommended when purchasing the PC); OS: Windows Vista® / XP 

AG-150 

PC PC/AT Interchangeable Machine Dell ® , IBM ® , Compaq ® 

Core TM 2 Duo: 1.66GHz or faster 

Core 2 Duo: 2.4GHz or faster 

(Windows Vista for Core 2 Duo) 

CPU 

Pentium ® Pentium M: 2.0GHz or faster 

M: 1.7GHz or faster 

Pentium ® Pentium 

IV: 2.4Ghz or faster 

® IV 2.8GHz or faster 

OS 

Memory 

HDD 

Standard 

Windows Vista® Business Service Pack 1 

Windows XP Professional Service Pack 3 

Windows 2000 Professional Service Pack 4 

Windows Vista: 1GB or more 

Windows XP®/ 2000: 512MB or more 

6GB or more (2GB or more of C-drive free space 

necessary) 

English version only. Computer must support each OS. Correct Service Pack 

version must be installed; if not, TG-2000 will not be set up properly. 

Windows Vista: 2GB or more 

Windows XP / 2000: 1GB or more 

40GB or more of C-drive free space recommended. When using the trend function, 

the drive used for automatic control must have the following free space according to 

the number of groups: 200 groups = 2GB; 500 groups = 5GB; 

1,000 groups = 10GB; 2,000 groups = 20GB. 

Wide Area 20GB or more (Free space) Standard: Max. 200MB/site 

Serial Port One port or more Required when using RS-485 communication for WHM 

LAN 

10Base-T/100Base-TX 

Purchase the option, or use the equipment recommended for the computer when 

purchasing. 

USB Two ports or more For use in data backup 

Storage Device CD, USB, etc. Optional 

Resolution 

1024 x 768 or higher, 65,536 colors or more 

Other 

Computer must be dedicated for use of TG-2000. 

Requires constant 24-hour operation, Requires UPS. 

Requires constant 24-hour operation.

CENTRALIZED CONTROLLER AG-150A 

Model: AG-150 

AG-150 CENTRALIZED CONTROLLER DIMENSIONS 

300 (11-13/16) 

25.6 44.7 

(1-1/16)(1-13/16) 

Unit:mm[in.] 

185 (7-5/16) 

A type installation plate 

290.8 (11-1/2) 

273 (10-3/4) 

250 (9-7/8) 

200 (7-7/8) 

B type installation plate 

300 (11-13/11) 

278 (10-15/16) 

250 (9-7/8) 

200 (7-7/8) 

272 (10-3/4) 

Back View 

272 (10-3/4) 

250 (9-7/8) 

147 (5-13/16) 

163.4 (6-7/16) 

167 (6-5/8) 

175.8 (6-15/16) 

146 (5-3/4) 

167 (6-5/8) 

152 (6) 

163.4 (6-7/16) 

167 (6-5/8) 

185 (7-5/16) 

6 4 

(1/4)(3/16) 

4 6 

(3/16) (1/4) 

8 (3/8) 

4.5(3/16)

Model: PAC-SC51KUA 

POWER SUPPLY (PAC-SC51KUA) SPECIFICATIONS 

• Rated input voltage and current: 100 - 240VAC ±10 %; 0.8A – 0.4A; 50Hz/60Hz single-phase. 

• Fuse: 6.3A time delay type. 

• Output voltage/current: M-NET: 23.0 – 32.0VDC; DC power supply: 24VDC ±5% 0-7.5A. 

• Dimensions: (H x W x D) 6-11/16 x 10-11/16 x 2-7/8". 

• Weight: 3-1/8 lbs. 

• Indoor installation in control panel or surface mount attachment (sold separately). 

Item 

Source Power Requirements 

Output Voltage / Current 

Load Capacity 

Environmental Conditions 

Dimensions (H x W x D) 

Weight 

Installation Environment 


Rated Input Voltage / 100 - 240VAC ±10%; 0.8A - 0.4A, 50/60Hz 

Current 

single phase 

Fuse: 6.3 time delay type (IEC127-2 S.S.5) 

M-NET 

23.0 - 32.0VDC 

DC Power Supply 24VDC ±5%; 0 - 0.75A 

One AG-150 Central Controller 

Operating Range 14° - 131°F (-10° - +55°C) 

Temperature 

Storage Range -4° - +140°F (-20° - +60°C) 

Humidity 

30-90% RH (no condensation) 

6-11/16 x 10-11/16 x 2-7/8" (169 x 271 x 72mm) 

3-1/8 lbs. (1.4kg) 

Indoor installation in field-supplied control panel or surface mount attachment 

(sold separately). 

PAC-SC51KUA External dimension POWER SUPPLY DIMENSIONS 

Unit:mm[in.] 

271(10- 11 /16) 

90(3- 9 /16) 

72(2- 7 / 8) 

This device complies with Part15 of the FCCRules.Operation is 

subject to the following two conditions:(1)this device may not cause 

harmful interference,and(2)this device must accept any interference 

received,including interference that may cause undesired operation. 

UP 

130(5- 1 / 8) 

155(6- 1 / 8) 

169(6- 11 / 16) 

T 

TB2,TB3 

TB1 

Certificate Number FM33568 

Mitsubishi Electric Air Conditioning & Refrigeration Systems Works acquired ISO 

9001 certification under Series 9000 of the International Standard Organization (ISO) 

based on a review of quality warranties for the production of refrigeration and air 

conditioning equipment. 

ISO Authorization System 

The ISO 9000 series is a plant authorization system relating to quality warranties as 

stipulated by the ISO. ISO 9001 certifies quality warranties based on the "design, 

development, production, installation and auxiliary services" for products built at 

an authorized plant. 

HVAC Advanced Products Division 

Mitsubishi Electric & Electronics USA, Inc. 

Certificate Number EC97J1227 

Mitsubishi Electric Air Conditioning & Refrigeration Systems Works acquired environmental 

management system standard ISO 14001 certification. 

The ISO 14000 series is a set of standards applying to environmental protection set by the 

International Standard Organization (ISO). 

C SD - AG-150 Standard Package - 1 - 201008 © MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC / HVAC 2010 

3400 Lawrenceville Suwanee Rd. 


Tele: 678-376-2900 • Fax: 800-889-9904 

Toll Free: 800-433-4822 (#4) 



Model: PKFY-P30NKMU-E 

Job Name: 

Location: 


Schedule No. 

System No.: 

Date: 

GENERAL FEATURES 

Net Weight 

Unit………………..…...……………..................46 lbs. / 21 kg 

Coil Type………………...........................................….Cross Fin 



• Seven sizes from 6,000 to 30,000 Btu/h 

• Powerful airflow (CFM) 

• Compact, lightweight, shiny-white, flat-panel design 

• Quiet operation 

• Multiple fan-speed settings 

• Intake grille filter is easily removed for cleaning 

• Built-in receiver is standard 

Fan 

Type x Quantity………………..…………...Line Flow Fan x 1 

Airflow Rate (Low-High)...…….…….…………...710 - 850 CFM 

Motor 

Type………..………..………..………..Direct-drive DC Motor 

Output………..………..………..………..………..….0.056 kW 

Air Filter..…………………………….Polypropylene Honeycomb 


Liquid (High Pressure)……............…3/8" / 9.52 mm (Flare) 

Gas (Low Pressure)………………..…5/8" / 15.88 mm (Flare) 

Drainpipe Dimension……............……...…….I.D. 5/8" / 16 mm 

Sound Pressure Levels 

Low-High….…………….………….……………43 - 49 dB(A) 


Capacity* 

Cooling……………………………………………....30,000 Btu/h 

Heating……………………………………………....34,000 Btu/h 

Power 

Power Source………………..........208 / 230V, 1-phase, 60Hz 


Cooling…………………………………………….………0.06 kW 

Heating…………………………………………….………0.06 kW 

Current 

Cooling……...................................................……………0.43 A 

Heating……...................................................……………0.43 A 

Minimum Circuit Ampacity (MCA)……………….…..……...0.54 A 

Maximum Overcurrent Protection (MOCP) Fuse..….......…..15 A 

OPTIONS 

□ Condensate Pump…………………………………SI1730-230 

□ External Heat Adapter……………………….……PAC-725AD 

□ CN24 Relay Kit…………………………CN24RELAY-KIT-CM 

* Cooling / Heating capacity indicated at the maximum value at 

operation under the following conditions: 

Cooling: Indoor 80°F (27°C) DB / 67°F (19°C) WB, Outdoor 95°F 

(35°C) DB 

Heating: Indoor 70°F (21°C) DB, Outdoor 47°F (8°C) DB / 43°F (6°C) WB 

Note: Ventilation air: Providing sufficient ventilation air is an important 

part of every building design. ASHRAE Standard 62 provides 

the minimum ventilation air requirement. Also, check local codes. 

External Finish……………...….………Munsell No. 1.0Y 9.2 / 0.2 


Inches………………………..14-3/8 H x 46-1/16 W x 11-5/8 D 

mm…………………………………….365 H x 1,170 W x 295 D

0 

0 

0 

Model: PKFY-P30NKMU-E – DIMENSIONS 

Top side 

5-17/132(140.3) 

2-9/16(65.2) 

16-11/16(423.7) 

17(431.7) 

Unit : in(mm) 

Front side 

14-3/8(365) 

2-29/32(74) 

33-21/32(855) 

46-1/16(1170) 

Front side(Grille open) 

9-1/2(241) 

Operation lamp 

DEFROST/STAND BY lamp 

Receiver 

Terminal block for power supply 

Terminal block for transmission 

Terminal block for 

MA-remote controller 

Filter hook 

17-15/32(444)Gas pipe 

18-31/32(482)Liquid pipe 

4-27/32(123) 

6-1/16(154) 

23-1/32(585)Drain hose 3 

5-9/32(134) 

Under side 

Emergency operation switch 

(cooling/heating) 

Knock out hole for piping 

Min.9/32(7) 

C 

A 

Center measurement hole 

3/32( 2.5) 

2-1/8(54) 

1/8(3) 

4- 11/32( 9) Bolt hole 

75- 3/16( 5.1) 

Tapping 

screw hole 

5/8(15.5) 

0 

31/32(25) 

1-31/32(50) 

2-15/16(75) 

3-15/16(100) 

4-19/32(117) 

4-29/32(125) 

5-19/32(142) 

7-9/16(192) 

9-17/32(242) 

11(279.5) 

11-1/2(292) 

20-3/8(517.4) 

17-7/8(454) 

17-9/32(439) 

16-3/32(408.5) 

15-1/8(384) 

14-11/32(364) 

12-3/8(314) 

4-11/32(110) 

2-3/8(60) 

13/32(10) 

13/32(10) 

2-3/8(60) 

4-11/32(110) 

Mount board 

12-3/8(314) 

14-11/32(364) 

15-1/8(384.5) 

16-3/32(408.5) 

17-9/32(439) 

17-7/8(454) 

18-5/16(465.5) 

Indoor unit outline 

2-1/8(54) 

1-1/4(32) 

31/32(25) 

1/2(12.5) 

0 

1/2(12.5) 

1-15/32(37.5) 

2-15/32(62.5) 

3-7/16(87.5) 

4-1/8(104.5) 

5-3/32(129.5) 

6-9/16(167) 

8-17/32(217) 

9-1/32(229.5) 

10-13/32(264) 

11-1/2(292) 

12-5/32(308.5) 

12-1/4(311) 

23-1/32(585) 

20-7/8(530.5) 

16-15/16(430.5) 

15-1/8(384) 

13-11/32(339) 

7-7/16(189) 

8-17/32(216.5) 

R1-15/32(R37.5) 

13-11/32(339) 

13-3/4(349.2) 

15-1/8(384) 

17-11/16(449.2) 

23-1/32(585) 

7/16(11) 

Left side 

Right side 

Mount board 

Knock out hole 

for left piping 

C 

A 

11-5/8(295) 3/16(5) 


for right piping 

2-3/32(53) 

1-1/4(32) 

23/32(18) 

1-3/16(30) 

1-3/8(35) 

2-19/32(66) 

2 

1 

Vane(auto) 

Louver(manual) 

Refrigerant pipe: 3/8 O.D( 9.52) 

1 Liquid pipe 

B 

B 

Flared connection: 3/8F 


for lower piping 

Sleeve 

Refrigerant pipe: 5/8 O.D( 15.88) 

(purchased locally) Through hole 

2 Gas pipe 

Flared connection: 5/8F 

2-15/16 

( 75) 

2-15/16~ 3-5/32 

( 75~ 80) 

Piping connection department 

3 Drain hose 

5/8( 16) I.D 

Required space(Indoor unit) 

(inch) 

Air inlet 

Min.8-21/32(220) 

Min.2-27/32(72.4) 

Min.2(50.5) 

Air outlet 

Min.9-27/32(250) 

Min.1-7/8(48) 

2-5/8(67) 

3-1/32(77) 

5/16(7.8) 

2-9/16(65) 

2-9/16(65) 

B 

3-1/32(77) 

3-7/16(87) 

13/32(10.7) 

5/16(7.8) 

3-1/32(77) 

2-5/8(67) 

2-9/16(65) 

Wall hole for 

left rear piping 

Knock out hole for 

left rear piping 

2-15/16×18-29/32(75×480) 

Wall hole for 

right rear piping 







C SD - PKFY-P30NKMU-E - 1 - 201104 














Tele: 678-376-2900 • Fax: 800-889-9904 

Toll Free: 800-433-4822 (#4) 



Model: PEFY-P48NMAU-E 

Job Name: 

Location: 


Schedule No. 

System No.: 

Date: 

Net Weight 

Unit………………..…...……………..................93 lbs. / 42 kg 

Coil Type………………...........................................….Cross Fin 


GENERAL FEATURES 


• 9-7/8" (250mm) high for low ceiling heights 

• Eleven sizes from 6,000 to 54,000 Btu/h 

• Ducted fan coil supporting multiple configurations for 

flexible installation 

• Five static pressure settings from 0.14"WG up to 

0.60"WG 

• Choice of fan speed settings 

• Built-in condensate lift; lifts to 27-9/16" (700mm) 

• Auto fan mode 

• Quiet operation from 26 to 45 dB(A) 


Capacity* 

Cooling……………………………………………....48,000 Btu/h 

Heating……………………………………………....54,000 Btu/h 

Power 

Power Source………………..........208 / 230V, 1-phase, 60Hz 


Cooling…………………………………………….………0.34 kW 

Heating…………………………………………….………0.32 kW 

Current 

Cooling……...................................................……………2.08 A 

Heating……...................................................……………1.97 A 

Minimum Circuit Ampacity (MCA)……………….…..……...3.41 A 

Maximum Overcurrent Protection (MOCP) Fuse..….......…..15 A 

Fan 

Type x Quantity………………..…………......…..Sirocco Fan x 2 

Airflow Rate (Low-Mid-High)...……………989 - 1,201 - 1,412 CFM 

External Static Pressure…..0.14 - 0.20 - 0.28 - 0.40 - 0.60"WG 

(External static pressure is factory set to 0.20"WG) 

Motor 

Type………..………..………..…………..DC Brushless Motor 

Output………..………..………..………..………..…..0.244 kW 

Air Filter..…………………………….Polypropylene Honeycomb 


Liquid (High Pressure)……...............3/8" / 9.52 mm (Brazed) 

Gas (Low Pressure)………………..…5/8" / 15.88 mm (Brazed) 

Drainpipe Dimension……............……...…O.D. 1-1/4" / 32 mm 

Sound Pressure Levels 

Low-Mid-High….…………….……………...35 - 40 - 44 dB(A) 

OPTIONS 

□ External Heater Adapter……………CN24RELAY-KIT-CM3 

□ Filter Box (Includes 2" MERV 13 filter)……………FBM2-4 

* Cooling / Heating capacity indicated at the maximum value at 

operation under the following conditions: 

Cooling: Indoor 80°F (27°C) DB / 67°F (19°C) WB, Outdoor 95°F 

(35°C) DB 

Heating: Indoor 70°F (21°C) DB, Outdoor 47°F (8°C) DB / 43°F (6°C) 

WB 

Note: Ventilation air: Providing sufficient ventilation air is an important 

part of every building design. ASHRAE Standard 62 provides 

the minimum ventilation air requirement. Also, check local codes. 

External Finish……………...….…….….Galvanized-steel Sheet 


Inches………………………….9-7/8 H x 55-1/8 W x 28-7/8 D 

mm………………………………………250 H x 1,400 W x 732 D

2 

Model: PEFY-P48NMAU-E – DIMENSIONS 

Drain pipe(O.D. Ø32(1-1/4)) 

(Emergency draining) 

378 (14-15/16) 

153 (6-1/16) 

Ventilation air intake Ø100(3-15/16) 

knock out hole Note 5 

3-Ø2.9(1/8) mounting hole 

J 

2xE-Ø2.9(1/8) 

Suspension bolt hole 

4-14x30(9/16X1-3/16) Slot 

Air 

outlet 

Air 

inlet 

Air filter 

Refrigerant piping 

brazing connection (liquid) 

2×2-Ø2.9(1/8) 

Refrigerant piping 

brazing connection (gas) 

Drain pipe 

(O.D.Ø32(1-1/4)) 

Drain pump 

Control box 

Terminal block(Transmission) 

Terminal block(Power source) 

Drain pipe(O.D.Ø32(1-1/4))(Spontaneous draining) 

Model 

PEFY-P06,08,12NMAU-E 

PEFY-P15,P18NMAU-E 

PEFY-P24,27,30NMAU-E 

PEFY-P36,48NMAU-E 

J 

PEFY-P54NMAU-E 

A B C D E 

700 754 800 660 

900 954 1000 860 

800 858 

9 

(35-7/16) (37-9/16) (39-3/8) (33-7/8) (31-1/2) (33-13/16) 

1100 1154 1200 1060 

11 

1000 1058 

(43-5/16) (45-7/16) (47-1/4) (41-3/4) (39-3/8) (41-11/16) 

1400 1454 1500 1360 

14 

1300 1358 

(55-1/8) (57-1/4) (59-1/16) (53-9/16) 

(51-3/16) (53-1/2) 

1600 1654 1700 1560 

16 

1500 1558 

(63) (65-1/8) (66-15/16) (61-7/16) (59-1/16) (61-3/8) 

7 

F 

600 

G 

658 

L 

Ø12.7 

(1/2) 

Ø6.35 

(1/4) 

Ø15.88 

(5/8) 

Ø9.52 

(3/8) 

1 

120° 

Ø125 

(4-15/16) 

120° 

(DUCT) 

23 (15/16) 

21 (7/8) 

200(7-7/8) 

(5-3/8) 

135 

15 (5/8) 

(8-5/16) 

18 (3/4) 210 

58 (2-5/16) 

73 (2-7/8) 

(Suspension bolt pitch) 

643 (25-3/8) 

(5-3/8) 

136 

(2-11/16) 

(27-9/16) (29-11/16) (31-1/2) (26) (23-5/8) (25-15/16) 

100 (3-15/16) 

40 (1-5/8) 

40 (1-5/8) 

100 (3-15/16) 

40 (1-5/8) 

33 (1-5/16) 122 (4-13/16) 

41 (1-5/8) 

217 (8-9/16) 

250 (9-7/8) 

20 (13/16) 

30 (1-3/16) 

100(3-15/16) 

D(Duct) 

100(3-15/16)X(E-1)=F 

G 

32 (1-5/16) 

238 (9-3/8) 

10 (7/16) 

356 (1/16) 

732 (28-7/8) 

700 (27-9/16) 

23 (15/16) 

67 

178 (7-1/16) 

A 

B(Suspension bolt pitch) 

C 

112 112 11(7/16) 

(4-7/16) (4-7/16) 

(11-13/16) 

777(30-5/8) 

H 

50(2) 

450(17-3/4) 

More than 300 

250~300 

(9-7/8~11-13/16) 

450(17-3/4) 

10 (7/16) 

57 (2-1/4) 

P- 2.9(1/8) 

H J K L M N P 

800 (31-1/2) 44 (1-3/4) 150 (5-15/16) 300 

(11-13/16) 

10 

1000 54 260 

780 

(39-3/8) (2-3/16) (10-1/4) 4 (30-3/4) 10 

1200 (47-1/4) 1500 (59-1/16) 49 (1-15/16) 54 (2-3/16) 330 

(13) 

320 

(12-5/8) 

4 5 990 

(39) 1280 

(50-7/16) 10 

12 

1700 (66-15/16) 54 (2-3/16) 370 

(14-5/8) 

5 1480 

(58-5/16) 12 

(A) 

(B) 

0 

(2-9/16 -7/16 ) 65 -10 

0 

(Actual length) 

(11-13/16) 

Less than 300 

(27-9/16) 

Less than 700 

6(1/4) 

K 

Kx(M-1)=N 

K 

Unit:mm(in.) 

1 Gas pipe 2 Liquid pipe 

50(2) 

Note2 

Ceiling surface Access door 

Drain hose (I.D. 32(1-1/4)) 

 

Access door 

More than 20(13/16) 

More than 10(7/16) 

(A) 

(B) 

Note 

Space required for service and maintenance. 

Provide an access door for maintenance at the bottom. 

1 Use M10 suspension bolts. (not supplied) 

2 Provide an access door for maintenance at the bottom. 

3 The dimensions in the table are those of the PEFY-P24, 27, 30, 36, 48, 54NMAU-E models, which have 2 

fans. The PEFY-P06, 08, 12, 15, 18NMAU-E model have 1 fan. 

4 To connect an intake duct, uninstall the air filter on the unit, and install a field supplied air filter on the intake 

duct on the intake side. 

5 If using a ventilation air connection, air temperature must be at neutral conditions. 







C SD - PEFY-P48NMAU-E - 1 - 201103 














Tele: 678-376-2900 • Fax: 800-889-9904 

Toll Free: 800-433-4822 (#4) 



Water-source Unit: 20-TON PQRY-P240TSHMU-A 

(Consists of Two PQRY-P120THMU-A and One CMY-Q100VBK Twinning Kit) 

Job Name: 


Location: 

Schedule No. 

System No.: 

MODULAR WATER-SOURCE VRF HEAT RECOVERY SYSTEM FEATURES 

• 3-phase, 208/230V 

• Modular variable refrigerant flow zoning (VRF) systems; 

smaller capacity units can be piped together to form a single, 

large-capacity two-pipe system 

• Designed for closed water loops; water quality must meet 

regulations 

• Self-cooling cabinet design 

• Compact size for each water-source module 

• Max. Total Refrigerant Piping Length: 1,804' (P72,96,120), 

2,461' (P144,168,192,216,240); Max. Refrigerant Line Length: 

541'; Max. Control Wiring Length: 1,640' 

• Connects to CITY MULTI indoor units; controlled via 

CITY MULTI Controls Network (CMCN) 

• External finish: Acrylic-painted Steel Sheets 

• Operating Indoor Temperature Range 

Cooling: 59° ~ 75°F (15° ~ 24°C) WB 

Heating: 59° ~ 81°F (15° ~ 27°C) DB 

• Operating Water Temperature Range 

Cooling: 23° ~ 113°F (-5° ~ 45°C)* 

Heating: 23° ~ 113°F (-5° ~ 45°C)* 

*If using circulating water temperatures between 23° and 

50° F, Dip switch 3-9 must be turned on and glycol must 

be added to the water loop to prevent freezing down to 5°F 

Date: 

PQRY-P120THMU-A 


OPTIONAL PARTS 

□ Twinning Kit*.…………………………………...……...CMY-Q100VBK 

□ Branch Joint (T-Branch: ≤72,000 Btu/h).……………CMY-Y102S-G2 

□ Branch Joint (T-Branch: ≤144,000 Btu/h).………………CMY-Y102L-G2 

□ Branch Joint (T-Branch: ≤ 234,000 Btu/h)…….…………CMY-Y202-G2 

□ Joint Adapter (Port Connector > 54,000 Btu/h).…………..CMY-R160J 

□ Main BC Controller.………………….CMB-P108/1010/1013/1016NU-GA 

□ Sub BC Controller.…………………CMB-P104/108NU-GB/-1016NU-HB 

* Twinning Kit is necessary to combine the refrigerant flows of the 

modules and is included in the water-source unit set. 

Specifications System Module 1 Module 2 

Unit Type PQRY-P240TSHMU-A PQRY-P120THMU-A PQRY-P120THMU-A 

Nominal Cooling Capacity Btu/h 240,000 120,000 120,000 

Nominal Heating Capacity Btu/h 270,000 135,000 135,000 

External Dimensions (H x W x D) In. / mm Refer to Module Data 

43-5/16 x 34-11/16 x 21-11/16 / 

1,100 x 880 x 550 

** Each individual module requires a separate electrical connection. Reference electrical data for each individual module. 

43-5/16 x 34-11/16 x 21-11/16 / 

1,100 x 880 x 550 

Net Weight Lbs. / kg 804 / 364 402 / 182 402 / 182 

Electrical Power Requirements Voltage, Phase, Hertz Refer to Module Data** 208/230V, 3-phase, 60Hz 

Cooling Power Input kW 15.93 

Heating Power Input kW 15.7 

Refer to System Data 

Cooling Current (208/230V) A 48.7 / 44.0 

Heating Current (208/230V) A 48.4 / 43.8 


Minimum Circuit Ampacity (MCA)** A Refer to Module Data** 30 / 27** 30 / 27** 

Recommended Fuse/Breaker Size** A Refer to Module Data** 40 / 40** 40 / 40** 

Maximum Fuse Size** A Refer to Module Data** 50 / 40** 50 / 40** 

Circulating Water (quality must meet regulations) 

Flow Rate GPM / L/s 50 / 4 25 / 2 25 / 2 

Pressure Drop Ft. / psi 12 / 6 6 / 3 6 / 3 

Operation Volume Range GPM / L/m 40 - 64 / 150 - 240 20 - 32 / 75 - 120 20 - 32 / 75 - 120 

Maximum Water Pressure MPa / psi 4 / 580 2 / 290 2 / 290 

Water-source Connections 

(Each for Inlet and Outlet) 

In. Refer to Module Data** 1-1/2 FPT 1-1/2 FPT 

Piping Diameter 

From Twinning Kit to Indoor Units 

(Brazed) (In. / mm) 

Liquid (High Pressure) 1-1/8 / 28.58 

Gas (Low Pressure) 1-1/8 / 28.58 


From Modules to Twinning Kit Liquid (High Pressure) 

3/4 / 19.05 3/4 / 19.05 

Refer to Module Data 

(Brazed) (In. / mm) 

Gas (Low Pressure) 7/8 / 22.2 - 

Total Capacity 

50 to 150% of WSUs 

Indoor Unit 

Model / Quantity 

P06 ~ P96 / 2 to 50 

Max. No. Connectable 

Branch Pipes: 48 


Sound Pressure Levels dB(A) 54 51 51 

Compressor Operating Range 7 - 100% Refer to System Data 

Compressor Type x Quantity 

Inverter-driven Scroll Hermetic x 1 Inverter-driven Scroll Hermetic x 1 

Compressor Motor Output kW Refer to Module Data 

8.5 8.5 

Compressor Crankcase Heater kW 0.051 0.051 

Refrigerant 

R410A 

Refer to Module Data 

Lubricant 

MEL32 

High-pressure Protection Device 

601 psi / 4.15 MPa 601 psi / 4.15 MPa 

Compressor / Fan Protection Device Refer to Module Data Overheat Protection Overheat Protection 

Inverter Protection Device Overheat / Overcurrent Protection Overheat / Overcurrent Protection

Outdoor Unit: PQRY-P240TSHMU-A – DIMENSIONS 

PQRY-P144,168,192,216,240TSHMU-A 

Unit : mm(in) 

1780(70-3/32) 

550(21-21/32) 

880(34-21/32) 20(13/16) 

880(34-21/32) 

Heat Source unit 1 


Twinning pipe(Low pressure) 

 

1100 (43-5/16) 

Note 1.Connect the pipes as shown in the figure below. Refer to the table below for the pipe size. 

2.Twinning pipe (High pressure) should not be tilted more than 15 degrees from the horizontal plane. 

3.See the Installation Manual for the details of Twinning pipe installation. 

4.Only use the Twinning pipe by Mitsubishi (optional parts). 

c 

d 

Twinning pipe connection size 

Package unit name 

PQRY-P144TSHMU-A PQRY-P168TSHMU-A 

Component unit name 

Twinning pipe Kit(optional parts) 

BC controller~Twinning pipe 

Heat Source unit 1 PQRY-P72THMU-A PQRY-P96THMU-A 


High pressure 

Low pressure b 


a 


ø22.2(7/8) 

PQRY-P192TSHMU-A 



CMY-Q100VBK 

ø28.58(1-1/8) 




ø28.58(1-1/8) 




Twinning pipe~Heat source unit 

Unit model 

P72 

P96 

P120 

High 

pressure 

Low 

pressure 

c or e d 

ø19.05(3/4) ø22.2(7/8) 

e 

Unit: mm (in.) 

a 

Twinning pipe(High pressure) 

 

b 

To BC controller 

To BC controller

Twinning Kit: CMY-Q100VBK 

CMY-Q100VBK 

Low-pressure pipe twinning kit 

 

(Outside diameter) 

50 

28 

 

High-pressure twinning pipe 

 


62 

 

54 

154 

61 

41 

160 

36 

50 

36 

46 

108 

23 

432 

122 

23 


95 

132 

35 

80

PQRY-P72,96,120THMU-A 

Modules 1 and 2: PQRY-P120THMU-A – DIMENSIONS 

Unit : mm(in) 

85 

77 

(3-1/16) 

Top view 

Service space 

(front side) 

880(34-21/32) 

Service space 

(front side) 

8 (2-15/16) 74 

8 

(Mounting pitch) 

720 (28-3/8) 

(Installation support hole pitch) 

834(32-27/32) 

20 

2X2-14(9/16)X20(13/16) Oval hole 

2X2-14(9/16)X20(13/16) Oval hole 

(Installation support hole) 

(Installation support 

hole pitch) 

(18-17/32) 

40 470(467~473) 

(1-19/32) (18-13/32~18-5/8) 

(Mounting pitch) 

(19-15/16) 

22 506(503~509) 

22 

(7/8) (19-13/16~20-1/16) (7/8) 

(550)(21-21/32) 

40 

(1-19/32) 

600 (23-5/8) 

450 

170 

350 

725 (28-9/16) 

The space for 

control box 

replacement 

80 

23 

(880)(34-21/32) 

80 

(3-5/32) 

23 

(29/32) 

450 

170 

600 (23-5/8) 

1100 (43-5/16) 

(530) 550 

(20-7/8) (21-21/32) 

141 

213 

(8-13/32) 

240 

(9-15/32) 

1100 (43-5/16) 

(13-25/32) 

(53) 

(102) 

78 

433(17-1/16) 

548 (21-19/32) 

608 (23-15/16) 

563 (22-3/16) 

584(23) 

75 

140 

83(3-9/32) 

58(2-5/16) 

18 

(4-25/32) 

121 226 (8-29/32) 

550(21-21/32) 

Service 

panel 

6 

7 

880(34-21/32) 

Control box 

Refrigerant service 

valve 

3 

2 

1 

Refrigerant service 

valve 

4 

5 

(6-23/32) 

(17-23/32) 

(3-3/8) 

(17-23/32) 

(6-23/32) 

(3-5/32) 

(29/32) 

(3-3/32) 

(5-17/32) 

(2-31/32) 

(13/16) 

(23/32) 

(5-9/16) 

Note1.Seal around the water piping,the refrigerant piping, 

the power supply,and the control wiring and unused knockout 

holes with the putty, etc., to prevent moisture or dirt from entering 

cabinet. 

Note2.At the time of product shipment,the front side piping 

specification serves as the local drainage connection. 

When connecting on the rear side, please remove the 

rear side plug sealing corks, and attach a front side. 

Ensure there is no leak after the attachment has been fitted. 

Note3.Take notice of service space as Fig.A.(In case of single 

installation,600mm(23-5/8) or more of back space as front space 

makes easier access when servicing the unit from rear side) 

Note4.If water pipes or refrigerant pipes stretch upward, 

required space for service and maintenance due to 

replacement of control box is shown in Fig.B. 

Note5.Environmental condition for installation; 32~104°F 

as indoor installation. 

Note6.In case the temperature around the heat source unit has 

possibility to drop under 0°C(32°F), be careful for the following 

point to prevent the pipe burst by the water pipe freeze-up. 

·Circulate the water all the time even if the heat source 

unit is not in operation. 

·Drain the water from inside of the heat source unit when 

the heat source unit will not operate for a long term. 

Note7.Ensure that the drain piping is downward with a pitch of 

more than 1/100. 

Note8.At brazing of pipes,wrap the refrigerant service valve 

with wet cloth and keep the temperature of 

refrigerant service valve under 120°C(248°F). 

(2-3/32) 

(4-1/32) 

Fig.A 

Fig.B 

Connecting pipe specifications 

Model 

Connection specifications for 

the refrigerant service valve 

High pressure 

Low pressure 

ø15.88 Brazed *2 ø19.05 Brazed *2 


(5/8) 

(3/4) 



ø19.05 Brazed *1 ø22.2 Brazed *2 

(3/4) (7/8) 

*1.Expand the field pipes and connect directly to the valve. 

*2.Connect by using the connecting pipes that are supplied. 

Unit: mm (in.) 

 

·Refrigerant (high pressure) conn. pipe ····· 1pc. 

(P72 ; Packaged in the accessory kit) 

·Refrigerant (low pressure) conn. pipe ····· 1pc. 

(P72/P96/P120 ; Packaged in the accessory kit) 

NO. 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

For pipes 

For wires 

For transmission 

cables 

Water pipe 

Drain pipe 

Usage Specifications 

Front through hole 


(Uses when twinning kit 

(optional parts) is mounted.) 




inlet 

outlet 

Rc3/4 FPT 

140 × 77 Knockout hole 

(5-17/32) (3-1/16) 

ø45 Knockout hole 

(1-25/32) 

ø62.7 or ø34.5 Knockout hole 

(2-15/32) (1-3/8) 

ø43.7 or ø22.2 Knockout hole 

(1-3/4) (7/8) 

ø34 Knockout hole 

(1-11/32) 

Rc1-1/2 FPT 

Rc1-1/2 FPT 


















C SD - PQRY-P240TSHMU-A - 1 - 201006 © MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC / HVAC 2010 



Tele: 678-376-2900 • Fax: 800-889-9904 

Toll Free: 800-433-4822 (#4) 



POWER-STYLE ® QED 

Switchboards 

Setting standards for today, 

building foundations for tomorrow

With a tradition of distinction 

SQUARE D ® POWER-STYLE ® Switchboards set the 

standard for the system solutions of today and 

those of tomorrow 

These quality products are built according to your specifications in strict 

adherence to NEC, NEMA and UL standards at factories certified to ISO 9002 

quality standards. The versatility in our switchboard design helps you meet and 

exceed today’s complex electrical distribution requirements. Features include 

front or rear accessibility, fixed or drawout construction, and individually or 

group-mounted circuit breakers or fusible switches. POWER-STYLE switchboards 

are also designed with durability in mind. Sturdy frames and standard bolted 

base channels all contribute to durability. 

Quality, versatility and durability also define our SPEED-D ® ready-to-assemble 

switchboards. Living up to its name, the SPEED-D line offers shipment of service 

section switchboards that’s measured in days, not weeks. 

One of the most important advantages you’ll see in SQUARE D switchboards is 

our focus on system solutions. Our switchboards are designed to maximize the 

capabilities of our overcurrent protection devices, metering options and other 

switchboard accessories. 

We also offer power monitoring and communications systems as simple or 

complex as your application requires. You can choose to communicate with a 

single PC, multiple PCs or over the Internet, using our Transparent Ready 

Internet communications system. Start with a simple monitoring and 

communications system and expand as your power system grows. 

Our focus on customer needs does not stop here. SQUARE D Services offers a 

complete line of solutions through our national network of service locations. We 

can offer comprehensive solutions related to new installation, maintenance and 

testing services. 

With Square D/Schneider Electric you can create an efficient electrical distribution 

system that meets your needs today, while building a foundation for the future. 

This is the SQUARE D difference. 

2

We have an efficient solution designed to meet your needs 

Commercial 

Industrial 

QED-S Office buildings Automotive plants 

Strip malls 

Paper mills 

Retail stores 

Manufacturing facilities 

Grocery stores 

Refineries 

Nursing homes 

Textile plants 

Hospitals 

Pharmaceuticals 

QED-2 Office buildings Automotive plants 

Strip malls 

Paper mills 

Retail stores 


Grocery stores 

Refineries 

Nursing homes 


Hospitals 


QED-6 Universities Automotive plants 

Public buildings 


Communication Centers Refineries 

High-rise offices 


Hospitals 

Chemical plants 


Semiconductor manufacturing 

QED-S switchboard 

Front accessible, 

group-mounted panels 

to 2,500 A 

Standards 

The POWER-STYLE QED switchboards in this brochure are designed, 

manufactured and tested to meet the latest revisions of the following 

appropriate standards. 

UL 50 

Enclosures for Electrical Equipment 

UL 98 

Enclosed and Deadfront Switches 

UL 489 

Molded Case Circuit Breakers 

UL 891 

Deadfront Switchboards 

UL 943 

Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters 

UL 977 

Fused Power Circuit Devices 

UL 1053 

Ground Fault Sensing and Relaying Equipment 

NEC Article 834 Switchboards 

NFPA 70 National Electrical Code ® (NEC ® ) 

ANSI/IEEE C12.1 Code for Electricity Metering 

ANSI C39.1 

Electrical Analog Indicating Instruments 

ANSI C57.13 

Instrument Transformers 

NEMA AB 1 

Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Molded 

Case Switches 

NEMA PB 2 

Switchboards 

QED-2 switchboard 

Individually mounted 

mains to 5,000 A, 

distribution sections 

to 4,000 A, groupmounted 

to 1,200 A 

Federal Specifications 

W-C-375B/GEN Molded Case Circuit Breakers 

W-C-870 

Fuseholders 

W-S-865 

Enclosed Knife Switch 

QED-6 switchboard 

Individually mounted 

mains to 5,000 A, front 

and rear access with 

dedicated loadside 

cable entry 

3

POWER-STYLE ® QED-S 

QED-S switchboards feature totally enclosed, 

freestanding sections up to 48" deep and contain 

circuit breaker or fusible overcurrent protection 

devices for services rated up to 4,000 A with a 

maximum voltage of 600 VAC or 250 VDC. 

Distribution sections include both I-LINE circuit 

breaker and QMB fusible switch group-mounted 

panels. Offering the flexibility of either fix-mounted 

or group-mounted mains and feeders, QED-S 

switchboards are ideal for meeting quick delivery 

requirements. 

I-LINE Advantages 

I-LINE construction gives you many advantages that 

boost efficiency while minimizing installation and 

maintenance costs. Plug-on, group-mounted 

construction, automatic alignment and single- or 

double-row construction are just a few. Single-row 

construction allows circuit breakers to be mounted 

only on one side of the I-LINE bus. With double-row 

construction, you can mount branch circuit breakers 

of different sizes opposite each other. A 15 A circuit 

breaker, for example, can be mounted next to or 

across from a 1,200 A circuit breaker. This flexibility 

makes it easy to add or change circuit breakers to 

meet the demands of your growing electrical 

distribution system. 

Efficient, Plug-On Fusible Switches 

The I-LINE bus 

stack provides 

circuit breaker 

mounting flexibility 

and simplifies 

installation and 

maintenance. 

For fusible applications, QMB construction enhances 

efficiency during and after installation. Switches 

accommodate Class H, R, T or L fuses, and plug-on 

construction simplifies installation and upgrades. 

Plus, the QMB high-density switchboards from 

Square D/Schneider Electric use compact switches 

and Class J fuses to deliver an even smaller footprint. 

Neutral Connections with Ease 

I-LINE and QMB construction also simplifies neutral 

connections whenever they are required. The neutral 

is located on the side of the I-LINE circuit breaker 

mounting pan and QMB vertical bus assembly, 

providing totally front-accessible neutral connections. 

In addition, ample wireway space makes loadside 

cabling of branch units much easier. 

Main Lug Alternatives 

Main lug only (MLO) switchboards are available in 

both I-LINE and QMB construction, ranging from 

800 A to 4,000 A. The QED MLO switchboards feature 

front accessibility, small footprints and, in many 

cases, eliminate the need for an auxiliary section. 

4

Features 

■ Front accessible load connections 

■ Front and rear alignment standard 

■ Switchboard fed by cable 

■ Switchboard ratings through 4000 A, 200kA 

■ Thermal-magnetic, electronic and MICROLOGIC ® fix-mounted circuit breaker 

mains and feeders 

■ Stored Energy fix-mounted mains 

■ Fix-mounted fusible switch mains and feeders 

■ Group-mounted circuit breaker and fusible switch mains and feeders 

■ Main devices in six subdivision or single main configurations 

■ Main and branch devices in single section configurations 

■ Main lugs in separate section in line-up or behind devices 

■ Thermal-magnetic and electronic circuit breakers with standard, high, 

extra-high or current limiting capability 

■ Exclusive MICROLOGIC microprocessor trip circuit breakers, 80% or 

100% rated 

■ Selected utilities and POWERLOGIC ® system customer metering 

■ Selected options on circuit breakers and fusible switches 

Options 

Hot and cold sequence utility metering, customer metering and the POWERLOGIC 

monitoring and control system and equipment ground fault protection. 

Quality You 

Can See... 

The Square D/Schneider 

Electric family of POWER- 

STYLE ® QED switchboards 

is designed with the 

highest standards of 

quality. They uniquely 

meet your needs for low 

voltage power distribution 

as service entrance or 

distribution boards for 

systems up to 600 VAC or 

250 VDC. The difference 

in quality shows in 

efficient installation and 

operational capabilities. 

Installation is simplified 

with two standard 

connections that only 

Square D/Schneider 

Electric provides. QWIK 

FLANGE, a factoryinstalled 

connection, 

replaces the traditional 

busway flanged end. By 

eliminating internal bolted 

connections and removal 

and replacement of side 

or top plates, this 

connection allows for 

easier installation and 

better connections. 

In addition, the unique 

“E” connector from 

Square D/Schneider 

Electric eliminates 

conventional bus bar 

alignment problems. 

While simplifying splice 

connections and through 

and vertical bus 

connections, this 

connector requires only 

one wrench to tighten. 

The “E” connector also 

provides a more efficient 

connection by applying 

uniform pressure over the 

contact surface. 

A small footprint makes QED-S 

switchboards an excellent choice for 

commercial and other applications with 

limited floor space. 

5

POWER-STYLE ® QED-2 

POWER-STYLE QED-2 switchboards are designed to 

distribute electrical power and give you economies of 

floor space without compromising performance or 

versatility. They provide circuit breaker or fusible 

overcurrent protection for services rated to 5,000 A 

with a maximum voltage of 600 VAC or 250 VDC. 

QED-2 switchboards can be used as service entrance 

equipment or as distribution centers in commercial, 

industrial or institutional applications. For additional 

flexibility, they can be customized to meet your 

specific application requirements. 

A Solid Foundation 

QED-2 switchboards are available as single or multiple 

mains or as distribution sections. Individually 

mounted mains use SQUARE D P- and R-frame 

electronic or MICROLOGIC ® molded case circuit 

breakers through 2,500 A, MASTERPACT ® NW 

two-step stored energy electronic trip circuit breakers, 

circuit breakers for fixed or drawout applications 

through 5,000 A and fusible switches through 5,000 A. 

Efficient Distribution Options 

QED-2 distribution sections include both I-LINE circuit 

breaker and QMB fusible switch group-mounted 

panels. With I-LINE plug-on circuit breaker construction, 

the line end of the circuit breaker plugs directly 

onto the I-LINE panel bus assembly. This design 

allows you to quickly install and wire circuit breakers 

from the fronts of the switchboard. In addition, I-LINE 

circuit breakers are keyed to mounting slots in the 

support pan for automatic alignment and faster 

installation. I-LINE switchboard sections are available 

in single- or double-row construction. 

High Ampacities 

QED-2 

combination 

section 

If you require higher feeder ampacities, QED-2 

switchboards are available with individually mounted 

branch devices up to 4,000 A. They include both 

thermal-magnetic and electronic trip molded case 

circuit breakers or BOLT-LOC Type BP fusible 

switches. For equipment ground fault protection, you 

can use electronic trip circuit breakers or fusible 

switches with the Type GC equipment ground fault 

system. With QED-2 switchboards, you can also 

specify options such as automatic throw-over systems. 

6

Features 

■ Front accessible load connections 

■ Front and rear alignment standard 

■ Switchboard fed by cable, busway, transformer, QED switchboard or other 

■ Switchboard ratings through 5000 A, 200kA; higher amperages available 

■ Thermal-magnetic, electronic, MICROLOGIC ® or stored energy fix- and drawoutmounted 

circuit breaker mains and feeders 

■ Fix-mounted fusible switch mains and feeders 

■ Group-mounted circuit breaker and fusible switch mains and feeders 

■ Main devices in six sub-division or single main configurations 

■ Main and branch devices in single section configuration 

■ Main lugs in separate section in line-up or behind devices 

■ Group-mounted mains and branches 

■ Thermal-magnetic and electronic circuit breakers with standard, high, extra-high 

or current limiting capability 

■ Exclusive MICROLOGIC trip circuit breakers, 80% or 100% rated 

■ Zone selective interlocking on MICROLOGIC ® circuit breakers, group-mounted 

100 A/250 A thermal-magnetic circuit breakers with add-on ground fault and 

bolted pressure fusible switches 

■ POWERLOGIC ® system customer metering including custom communications 

capability and interwiring 

■ All options available on circuit breakers and fusible switches 

■ Custom engineering including main-tie-mains, multiple sets of through bus, 

reduced heights and engineered houses 

■ Optional start-up service and training 

Options 

Hot and cold sequence utility metering, customer metering and the POWERLOGIC 

monitoring and control system, equipment ground fault protection, automatic 

throw-over systems, transfer switches and zone selective interlocking. 

QED-2 switchboards 

provide versatility 

and performance for 

today’s complex 

commercial, industrial 

and utility 

applications. 

Solutions for 

Maximum 

Flexibility... 

If you’re looking for an 

overcurrent device to 

meet your specific application, 

no one matches 

the selection found in the 


switchboard family. All 

QED switchboards feature 

a choice of molded case 

circuit breakers or fusible 

switches. 

You can select thermalmagnetic, 

current 

limiting, electronic or 

MICROLOGIC ® circuit 

breakers in a configuration 

designed to meet 

your specific needs. The 

unique I-LINE construction 

from Square D/ Schneider 

Electric, for example, 

gives you the capacity of 

group mounting circuit 

breakers (up to 1,200 A) 

for faster installation, 

mounting flexibility and 

efficient use of space. 

You can also select 

individually mounted 

circuit breakers rated up 

to 5,000 A in fixed or 

drawout construction. 

You can further enhance 

the flexibility of POWER- 

STYLE QED switchboards 

with other options, such 

as equipment ground 

fault protection with 

MICROLOGIC ® electronic 

trip circuit breakers or 

BOLT-LOC Type BP 

switches with the TYPE 

GC equipment ground 

fault system. On 100 A 

and 250 A circuit 

breakers, an equipment 

ground fault module is 

available with two levels 

of protection to give you 

the backup protection you 

need for power-critical 

operations. 

7

POWER-STYLE ® QED-6 

With QED-6 rear connected switchboards, Square D 

offers the next generation of proven, reliable and 

durable low voltage switchboards. We developed it 

with your values in mind – with a small, flexible 

footprint with segregated front access to all wiring, 

and with easy-to-add “smart” functionality like 

communications interfaces and power monitoring and 

control capability – all to improve your electrical 

system uptime and efficiency. 

Efficient Space Use. 

When floor space is at a premium, QED-6 rear 

connected switchboards are the ideal solution. For 

those applications where space is available and you 

want more working room inside the equipment, we 

also offer larger footprints. In either case, we provide 

dedicated control wiring channels and the most 

conduit space among competitive products. Our 

objective was simple: to make QED-6 switchboards as 

quick, easy and inexpensive as possible to install 

and maintain. 

Maximum Uptime. 

Drawout construction allows quick and simple 

replacement of circuit breaker elements. If an 

emergency occurs, circuit breakers may be removed 

from low-priority circuits and re-installed to serve 

high-priority circuits. 

Through-the-Door Construction. 

MASTERPACT ® and POWERPACT ® circuit breakers 

provide clear access to all circuit breaker controls, 

indicators, and trip unit functionality without opening 

the compartment door. MASTERPACT circuit breaker 

racking is also achieved with the compartment 

door closed. 

Through-the-door 

circuit breaker 

operation (above) 

and segregated 

control and power 

wiring, with 

dedicated compartments 

(left) for 

control wiring to 

allow easier access. 

8

Features 

■ QED-6 switchboards are listed to Underwriters Laboratories ® (UL ® ) 891 

■ MASTERPACT ® drawout circuit breakers and POWERPACT ® C and D plug-in 

circuit breakers are listed to UL 489 

■ Short circuit current rating up to 200kA @ 240V, 150kA @ 480V applications 

■ High short-time withstand bus rating up to 100kA for 30 cycles 

■ Compartmentalized design segregates each circuit breaker 

■ Family of field-installable upgrades including communications 

■ Highest density of circuit breakers available in rear connected switchboard 

construction 

■ Front access to all controls and communications wire connections 

■ Silver-plated bolted copper bus provided as standard 

■ Large rear cable compartment pull area allows maximum room for 

power cables 

■ Bus provisions for future equipment expansion 

■ Optional start-up service and training 

Options 

QED-6 rear connected switchboards are designed to provide superior electrical 

distribution, protection, and power quality management for the entire facility. The 

prime components are MASTERPACT NW, MASTERPACT NT, POWERPACT C, and 

POWERPACT D circuit breakers. QED-6 switchboards are designed to maximize the 

functionality of these circuit breakers, which, in turn, delivers maximum uptime, 

system selectivity and circuit protection—all of this in a fully withdrawable 

construction. 

Durability for 

the Long 

Term... 

Durability is a key design 

factor that makes POWER- 

STYLE ® QED switchboards 

ideal for applications 

ranging from powerintensive 

commercial 

operations to harsh 

industrial environments. 

You'll see the difference in 

our sturdy frame 

construction. 

Built from formed steel 

channels and angles, the 

heart of the QED switchboard 

is the frame, which 

serves as the mounting 

base for all components in 

the switchboard. 

The QED frame is even 

sturdy enough to serve as 

its own floor sill. In 

addition, every frame has 

base channels as a 

standard feature. Base 

channels are bolted to the 

bottom of the frame, 

assuring extra rigidity 

during installation. 

For the diverse 

requirements of 

manufacturing, as 

well as commercial 

applications, QED-6 

switchboards offer 

many options. 

9


Metering Options 

You can see versatility in the number and types of metering options available for the 

POWER-STYLE ® QED switchboard family. They include customer metering featuring 

the advanced capabilities of the POWERLOGIC ® monitoring and control system and 

MICROLOGIC ® trip units. Utility metering options are also available to meet local 

utility requirements. 

Customer Metering from A to Z. 

MICROLOGIC Trip Units 

The POWERLOGIC system provides over 50 meter values, which can be displayed 

locally on multiple POWERLOGIC circuit monitors or remotely on personal 

computers. On-board event and data logging, waveform capture and automated 

controls are also provided by the POWERLOGIC system. Now Square D/Schneider 

Electric not only offers the toughest switchboard in the industry, but the smartest 

one as well! 

Effective electrical distribution is more than just the transmission of power. 

Capturing, understanding and managing power information can substantially 

increase your system efficiency and lower life cycle costs. 

These trip units provide advanced functionality such as communications interfaces, 

POWERLOGIC power metering, and local/remote monitoring capability, which allows 

for integration and coordination of your electrical system. With the appropriate 

MICROLOGIC trip unit, you can: 

■ Communicate with breakers 

■ Gather power information and energy usage patterns 

■ Monitor events and deviations from the norm 

■ Remotely control breakers for better process loading 

POWERLOGIC Circuit Monitor 

■ Perform predictive maintenance 

Because the trip units, which offer increasing levels of functionality, are 

interchangeable, you can upgrade equipment easily as your needs expand. 

Utility Metering. 

Square D/Schneider Electric provides utility current transformer (UCT) metering 

compartments to meet your local utility specifications. The UCT compartment has 

either single- or double-hinged doors with sealable hasps and screws. UCTs are 

available in full-height (90") or half-height (45") compartments. Depending upon 

your utility’s requirements, we will provide either hot sequence CT compartments 

(metering ahead of the main disconnect) or cold sequence CT compartments 

(metering on the load side of the main disconnect). 

Utility metering 

10

POWER-STYLE ® QED Selection Information 

QED-S QED-2 QED-6 

RATING RATING RATING RATING 

400-4000 A ✓ ✓ ✓ 

400-5000 A ✓ ✓ 

6000 A ✓ 

INCOMING 

CABLE ✓ ✓ ✓ 

BUSWAY ✓ ✓ 

TRANSFORMER ✓ ✓ 

THROUGH BUS TO QED 

✓ 

MAIN DEVICE 

Individual Fixed 

BOLTED PRESSURE SWITCH 4000 A ✓ 5000 A ✓ 

THERMAL-MAGNETIC CIRCUIT BREAKER 2500 A ✓ 2500 A ✓ 2500 A ✓ 

ELECTRONIC CIRCUIT BREAKER 2500 A ✓ 2500 A ✓ 2500 A ✓ 

MICROLOGIC ® CIRCUIT BREAKER 2500 A ✓ 2500 A ✓ 

STORED ENERGY 4000 A ✓ 5000 A ✓ 5000 A ✓ 

Individual Drawout 

MASTERPACT NW CIRCUIT BREAKER 5000 A ✓ 5000 A ✓ 

Group 

THERMAL-MAGNETIC CIRCUIT BREAKER (I-LINE) 1200 A ✓ 1200 A ✓ 

ELECTRONIC CIRCUIT BREAKER (I-LINE) 1200 A ✓ 1200 A ✓ 

MICROLOGIC CIRCUIT BREAKER (I-LINE) 1200 A ✓ 1200 A ✓ 

FUSIBLE SWITCH (QMB) 1200 A ✓ 1200 A ✓ 

FEEDER 

Individual Fixed 

BOLTED PRESSURE SWITCH 4000 A ✓ 4000 A ✓ 

THERMAL-MAGNETIC CIRCUIT BREAKER 2500 A ✓ 2500 A ✓ 1200 A ✓ 

ELECTRONIC CIRCUIT BREAKER 2500 A ✓ 2500 A ✓ 

MICROLOGIC CIRCUIT BREAKER 2500 A ✓ 2500 A ✓ 1200 A ✓ 

STORED ENERGY CIRCUIT BREAKER 4000 A ✓ 4000 A ✓ 

Individual Drawout 

MASTERPACT ® NT CIRCUIT BREAKER 1200 A ✓ 

MASTERPACT NW CIRCUIT BREAKER 4000 A ✓ 

Group 

THERMAL-MAGNETIC CIRCUIT BREAKER (I-LINE) 1200 A ✓ 1200 A ✓ 

ELECTRONIC CIRCUIT BREAKER (I-LINE) 1200 A ✓ 1200 A ✓ 

MICROLOGIC CIRCUIT BREAKER (I-LINE) 1200 A ✓ 1200 A ✓ 

FUSIBLE SWITCH (QMB) 1200 A ✓ 1200 A ✓ 

UTILITIES 

SELECTED 

✓ 

ALL 

✓ 

CUSTOMER METERING 

POWER METER (A, V, W, COMM.) ✓ ✓ ✓ 

CIRCUIT MONITOR (A, V, W, WAVEFORM, COMM.) ✓ ✓ ✓ 

ACCESS 

FRONT ✓ ✓ 

FRONT & REAR ✓ ✓ 

COMPARTMENTALIZATION 

CIRCUIT BREAKER 

✓ 

BUSSING 

✓ 

LOAD LUGS 

✓ 

OPTIONS 

SELECTED 

✓ 

ALL 

✓ 

ENGINEERING 

STANDARD 

✓ 

CUSTOM 

✓ 

You can create an 

efficient electrical 

distribution system 

that meets your 

needs today, while 

building a foundation 

for the future. This 

is the SQUARE D 

difference. 

11

POWER-STYLE ® 

Switchboards 

The Difference is in the Details 

■ 100% rated phase and neutral through bus 

■ No deration of through bus 

■ Through bus extends the entire section (no through bus 

extensions required for additional sections) 

■ Captive splice bars 

■ Continuously plated bussing 

■ Front and rear alignment 

■ I-LINE ® group-mounted distribution requires no additional 

hardware kit to add future circuit breakers 

■ Sectionalized shipment available for easier handling 

■ Removable lifting bars on NEMA Type 1 Enclosures 

■ NEMA Type 1 or 3R Non-Walk-In Enclosures 

■ ANSI 49 corrosion-resistant paint finish 

■ Removable top plate 

■ UL891 Labeled 

■ Switchboard frame suitable for use as floor sills 

■ 80% and 100% rated MICROLOGIC ® electronic trip circuit 

breakers through 1200 A for group-mounted distribution 

■ POWERLOGIC ® system customer metering from ammeter, 

voltmeter, wattmeter to waveform capture, data logging, 

alarm/relay functions, disturbance monitoring and 

programmable logic 

SPEED-D ® Service Section Switchboards 

UL listed and available from distributor or warehouse stock, 

these switchboards contain a EUSERC utility metering 

compartment and a main circuit breaker with either a 42-circuit 

NQOD interior or a 27" I-LINE interior. It is also available with a 

QMB interior for six circuit main applications. Each section is 

suitable for use as service entrance equipment and is available 

in either Type 1 or Type 3R construction. Accessories include 

an indoor underground pull section, outdoor (3R) underground 

pull section, lug landing kit and loadside wireway. 

■ Mains rating: 400, 600, or 800 A 

■ Voltage: 120/240, 208Y/120, 240/120, or 480Y/277 VAC 

■ Systems: 1ø3W or 3ø4W 

■ Dimensions: Type 1 enclosure – 90" high, 14" deep, 36" wide 

■ Type 3R enclosure – 90" high, 24.5" deep, 36" wide 

12 

© 2002 Schneider Electric 

All rights reserved 

Document Number 2700BR0202 

Visit www.SquareD.com 

for more information.

NQ Panelboards 

Class 1640 

1640PL0801 

Price List 

March 

08 

CONTENTS 

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 

NQ Series Rated Tables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 

NQ Lighting and Appliance Panelboards 

NQ Pricing Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 

Merchandised Main Lug Panelboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 

Merchandised Main Lug Panelboards with TVSS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 

Merchandised Main Circuit Breaker Panelboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 

Merchandised Main Circuit Breaker Panelboards with TVSS. . . . . . . . . . 7 

Merchandised Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 

QOB Branch Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 

Factory Assembled Panelboards and Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 

Factory Assembled Common Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 

NQ Panelboard Special Features 

Factory Assembled Modifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 

Terminal Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

www.us.schneider-electric.com 

FOR CURRENT INFORMATION 


New! 

Now Available!! 

NQ lighting panelboards have been redesigned to meet the evolving needs of our 

customers. Easier to install, improved availability, and greater installation 

flexibility all combine to make NQ the state of the art in lighting panelboard 

design. 

Feature: 

Eleven standard boxes, and common trims with NF panelboards 

Benefit: 

Easier for our distributors to inventory and supply from stock. Higher probability 

of having the right box in stock to help the electrical contractor get his project 

started on time. 

Sub-feed Lug Kit 

Sub-feed Circuit Breaker Kit 

Main Circuit Breaker Kit 

Feature: 

Available with six circuit counts - 18, 30, 42, 54, 72* and 84*. A change in the 

2008 National Electric Code (NEC) will eliminate the 42 circuit rule and allow a 

higher number of circuits in a single enclosure. 

NOTE: *Availability for USA customers to be announced 

Benefit: 

In locations that have adopted the 2008 NEC, electrical consultants and 

contractors will no longer have to fashion two section panels due to the 42 circuit 

rule in the NEC. This will save installation time, wall space and material for the 

installer and building owner. 

Feature: 

A full complement of field installable accessories available for RTI panelboards: 

• Main circuit breakers 

• Feed-through and sub-feed lugs 

• Sub-feed circuit breakers 

• 200% neutrals 

• Copper neutrals and grounds 

• 6", 12" and 18" rail and deadfront extension kits 

Benefit: 

A broad range of solutions available from distributor stock to address the 

electrical contractor's need for improved availability of panelboards. The new RTI 

kits will also provide greater versatility to adapt to last minute design changes on 

site so that a project can stay on schedule. 

Feature: 

Semi-assembled" RTI kits with more visually oriented, easier-to-understand 

installation instructions. 

Benefit: 

Reduced installation time and fewer errors for the electrician installing the NQ 

panelboard, resulting in improved productivity and higher quality installations. 

Feature: 

NQ accepts both QO "plug-on" and QOB "bolt-on" circuit breakers. 

Benefit: 

Continued use of the industry's best, QO and QOB circuit breakers, provides 

continuity and convenience for customers currently using NQOD panelboards, 

which NQ will eventually replace. 

200% Neutral Kit 

Simplified Installation Instructions 


All Rights Reserved 

This page last modified 

7/31/08 

3

Series Ratings 


Class 1640 



This page contains UL Tested and Certified series combination ratings for 

panelboards. These ratings apply to either an integral main located in the 

same enclosure or a remote main located in a separate enclosure. 

Table 9.1: 

Max. 

System 

Voltage 

ACab 

Max. 

Short 

Circuit 

Current 

Rating 

NQ Series Connected Circuit Breaker Ratings 

(RMS Symmetrical) 

Square D 

Brand 

Integral or 

Remote Main 

Circuit 

Breakers and 

Remote Main 

Fuses 

Square D Brand Branch Circuit Breaker Catalog 

Designation and Allowable Ampere Rangescde 

Type 1 Pole 2 Pole 3 Pole 

22,000 MG QO (B) 

— — 

42,000 HD, JD QO (B) PL 

120/240 

1PH 

65,000 HG, JG QO (B) PL 15–30A 

15–60 A 15–30 A 

100,000 HJ, JJ QO (B) PL 

125,000 HL, JL QO (B) PL 

QO (B) 15–70 A 15–125 A — 

DJ 400A 

QO (B) GFI 15–30 A 40–60 A — 

QO (B) AFI 15–20 A — — 

120/240 

QO (B) VH — 150 A 15–150 A 

1PH 

QO (B) 15–70 A 15–125 A 15–30 A 

100,000 

QO (B) AS 15–30 A 15–30 A 15–30 A 

208Y/120 

QO (B) GFI 15–30 A 15–60 A — 

QJ 

QO (B) VH — 150 A 35–150 A 

QO (B) PL 15–30 A 15–60 A 15–30 A 

QO (B) AFI 15–20 A — — 

208Y/120 18,000 

LA, LH (L) 

34200MC 

LA, LH (L) 

34225MC 

LA, LH (L) 

34250MC 

LA, LH (L) 

34400MC 

QO (B) 15–30A 15–30 A 15–30 A 

QO (B) 15–70 A 15–125 A 15–100 A 

QO (B) AS 15–30 A 15–30 A 15–30 A 

QO (B) VH QO (B) GFI 15–30 A 15–60 A — 

22,000 

QO (B) PL 15–30 A 15–30 A — 

QO (B) AFI 15–20 A — — 

QO (B) 15–70 A 15–100 A 15–30 A 

Q2-H QO (B) GFI 15–30 A 15–30 A — 

QO (B) AFI 15–20 A — — 

QO (B) 15–70 A 15–125 A 15–30 A 

QO (B) AS 15–30 A 15–30 A 15–30 A 

QD 

QO (B) GFI 15–30 A 15–60 A — 

QO (B) VH — 150 A 35–150 A 

QO (B) PL 15–30 A 15–60 A 15–30 A 

240 

QO (B) AFI 15–20 A — — 

QO (B) 15–70 A 15–125 A 15–100 A 

ED, FD QO (B) GFI 15–30 A 15–60 A — 

QO (B) AFI 15–20 A — — 

25,000 

QO (B) 15–70 A 15–125 A 15–100 A 

KD 

QO (B) AS 15–30 A 15–30 A 15–30 A 

QO (B) GFI 15–30 A 15–60 A — 

QO (B) AFI 15–20 A — — 

QO (B) 15–70 A 15–125 A 15–100 A 

QO (B) VH — — 35–150 A 

HD, JD 

QO (B) GFI 15–30 A 15–60 A — 

QO (B) AFI 15–20 A — — 

QO (B) H — 15–100 A — 

QOB2150VH — 150 A — 

LA, MA 

Q2L-H — 100–225 A 100–225 A 

QDL — 70–225 A 70–225 A 

QO (B) 15–70 A — — 

QO (B) VH 15–30 A 15–125 A 15–100 A 

LC400A QOBVH — 150 A — 

QO (B) GFI 15–30 A 15–60 A — 

42,000 

QO (B) AFI 15–20 A — — 

QO (B) VH 15–30 A 15–125 A 15–100 A 

240 

LC600A 

QOBVH — 150 A — 

QO (B) GFI — 15–60 A — 

QO (B) AFI 15–20 A — — 

MG QO (B) VH 15–30 A 15–30 A 15–30 A 

HD, JD QO (B) PL 15–30 A 15–60 A 15–30 A 

QO (B) 15–30 A — — 

QO (B) VH 15–30 A 15–125 A 15–100 A 

65,000 LC400A QOBVH — 150 A — 

QO (B) GFI 15–30 A — — 

QO (B) AFI 15–20 A — — 

Table 9.1: 

Max. 

System 

Voltage 

ACab 

240 65,000 

240 

240 

Max. 

Short 

Circuit 

Current 

Rating 

65,000 

100,000 

LC600A 

DJ 400A 

EG, FG, KG 

QG 

QG, HG, JG 

HG, JG 

FC_ or 

KC_22___ 

FC_ or 

KC_32___ 

FC_ or 

KC_24___ 

FC_ or 

KC_34___ 

EJ, FJ 

HJ, JJ 

125,000 HL, JL 

200,000 FI, KI 

65,000 

NQ Series Connected Circuit Breaker Ratings 

(RMS Symmetrical) (continued) 

Square D 

Brand 

Integral or 

Remote Main 

Circuit 

Breakers and 

Remote Main 

Fuses 

400 A Max. 

Class J or T6 

Fuses 

100,000 

200 A Max. 

Class T3 Fuses 

200 A Max. 

Class J or T6 

200,000 Fuses and 

400 A Max. 

Class T3 Fuses 

Square D Brand Branch Circuit Breaker Catalog 

Designation and Allowable Ampere Rangescde 

Type 1 Pole 2 Pole 3 Pole 

QO (B) VH 15–30 A 15–125 A 

35–100 A 

(3P208 V 

max) 

15–30 A 

(3P240 V 

max) 

QOBVH — 150 A — 

QO (B) GFI — — — 

QO (B) AFI 15–20 A — — 

QO (B) 15–70 A 15–125 A — 

QO (B) VH — 150 A 15–150 A 

QO (B) H — 15–100 A — 

QO (B) 15–70 A 15–125 A 15–100 A 

QO (B) GFI 15–30 A 15–60 A — 

QO (B) AFI 15–20 A — — 

QO (B) 15–70 A 15–125 A 15–30 A 

QO (B) AS 15–30 A 15–30 A 15–30 A 

QO (B) VH — 150 A 35–150 A 

QO (B) GFI 15–30 A 15–60 A — 

QO (B) PL 15–30 A 15–60 A 15–30 A 

QO (B) AFI 15–20 A — — 

QO (B) 15–70 A 15–125 A 15–100 A 

QO (B) VH — — 35–150 A 

QO (B) H — 15–100 A — 

QOB2150VH — 150 A — 

QO (B) 15–70 A 15–100 A 15–100 A 

QO (B) AS 15–30 A 15–30 A 15–30 A 

QO (B) GFI 15–30 A 15–30 A — 

QO (B) AFI 15–20 A — — 

QO (B) 15–70 A 15–125 A 15–100 A 

QO (B) GFI 15–30 A 15–60 A — 

QO (B) AFI 15–20 A — — 

QO (B) 15–70 A 15–125 A 15–100 A 

QO (B) VH — — 35–150 A 

QO (B) GFI 15–30 A 15–60 A — 

QO (B) PL 15–30 A 15–60 A 15–30 A 

QO (B) AFI 15–20 A — — 

QO (B) H — 15–100 A — 

QOB 2150VH — 150 A — 

QO (B) 15–70 A 15–125 A 15–100 A 

QO (B) AS 15–30 A 15–30 A 15–30 A 

QO (B) GFI 15–30 A 15–60 A — 

QO (B) AFI 15–20 A — — 

QO (B) VH 15–30 A 15–125 A 15–100 A 

QOB-VH — 150 A — 

QO (B) AFI 15–20 A — — 

QO (B) AFI 15–20 A — — 

QO (B) 15–70 A 15–125 A 15–100 A 

QO (B) AS 15–30 A 15–30 A 15–30 A 

QO (B) GFI 15–30 A 15–60 A — 

a For shown circuit breakers rated less than this maximum voltage, the indicated short 

circuit current rating also applies, but at the voltage rating of the circuit breaker. 

b Short circuit tests are conducted at 100–105% of the maximum rated voltage of the 

panelboard. 

c Suffixes HID, SWD, and SWN may also be applied to the applicable branch circuit 

breakers shown above. Suffix SWN may not be applied in combination with LC main 

breakers. 

d Where QO (B) circuit breakers are shown above, QO (B) H, QO (B) VH, and QH (B) 

circuit breakers may also be used. 

e Where QO (B) GFI circuit breakers are shown above, QO (B) EPD circuit breakers may 

also be used. 

4 This page last modified 


7/31/08 

All Rights Reserved



NQ Pricing Procedure 

Examples 

Class 1640 / Refer to Catalog, 1640CT0701 

NQ Merchandised Pricing Procedure 

1. List circuit breakers required, either plug-on or bolt-on. See appropriate 

pages for catalog numbers. 

2. Determine equivalent number of pole spaces required. 

3. Select proper main lug interior (from page 6) or main lug interior and 

main circuit breaker adapter kit (from page 7) based on equivalent 

number of poles and ampere rating. Interiors include solid neutral and 

are field convertible to top feed. 

4. Select enclosure from appropriate page. 

Type 1—Select box and front catalog number corresponding to interior 

catalog number. 

Type 3R, 5, 12—Select enclosure. Interior trim kit for Type 3R, 5, 12 is 

included with the enclosure. 

5. For complete price, add the component prices. Include panelboard 

accessories. 

6. Apply appropriate discount schedule. 

NQ Factory Assembled Pricing Procedure 

The following Factory Assembled pricing procedure may be used to price NQ 

panelboards. 

1. Select BASE PRICE for main lugs or main circuit breaker from BASE 

PRICE TABLE. Include equipment ground bar when required. 

2. List BRANCH CIRCUIT BREAKERS (either plug-on or bolt-on) and 

determine total spaces required. Select price from BRANCH CIRCUIT 

BREAKERS TABLE. Include space only charge for future requirements. 

3. If total spaces required exceeds the maximum listed, price as two or 

more panelboards and add price for sub-feed or feed-thru lugs, so 

installer can cable between sections. 

4. Add price for special features from appropriate page. Contact field office 

for additional special features. 

5. For complete price, add all prices. Order by description. 

NOTE: Additional special price adders can be found in the 

Supplemental and Obsolescent Digest, Section 4. 

6. Apply appropriate discount schedule. 

NQ Merchandised Example: 

NQ Factory Assembled Example: 

Table 9.2: 

208Y/120 Vac, 3Ø4W, 10 kA SCCR, 225 A, MLO, Type 

1 surface mount, bolt-on branch circuit breakers, 

main sub-feed lugs. 

Branches Page No. Catalog Number Spaces $ Price 

(20) 20/1 9 (20) QOB120 20 530. 

two 40/2 9 two QOB240 4 118. 

two 30/3 9 two QOB330 6 390. 

Total 30 

225 A MLO Interior 6 NQ430L2 – 810. 

Box 6 MH32 – 75. 

Cover 6 NC32S – 351. 

Sub-Feed Lugs 6 NQSFL2 – 135. 

Total Price 2409. 

Table 9.3: 

208Y/120 Vac, 3Ø4W, 10 kA SCCR, 225 A, MLO, Type 

1 surface mount, bolt-on branch circuit breakers, 

main sub-feed lugs. 

Item Page No. $ Price 

225 A MLO Base Price 10 928. 

(20) 20/1 Bolt-on 10 1360. 

two 40/2 Bolt-on 10 268. 

two 30/3 Bolt-on 10 704. 

Sub-Feed Lugs 11 128. 

Total Price 3388. 

NQ Factory Assembled Panelboard 

NQ Merchandised Panelboard 



Example pricing only 

Discount 

Schedule 


7/31/08 

5

NQ Merchandised 

Panelboards 

Table 9.4: 

Pole 

Spaces 

Mains 

Rating 

Main Lug Interiors—Accepts plug-on and bolt-on circuit breakers 

Total Price 

Interior 

Front and Enclosure 

Type 1 

Type 3R, 

5,12 

20" Wide Cabinetf—Single Phase 3-Wire 

Interior Only 

(Order Branch Circuit 

Breakers Separately) 

NQ Main Lug Interiors—240 Vac, 48 Vdc 

Class 1640 / Refer to Catalog 1640CT0701 

Type 1 Enclosure 

Box 20"W x 5.75"Db Mono-Flat ® Frontc 

Hinged 

Front 



Type 3R, 5, 12 Enclosuree 

Enclosure 20"W x 6.5"D 

Catalog No.a Price Catalog No. Price Catalog No. Price Catalog No. Price Catalog No. Price 

18 

929. 1984. NQ18L1 523 MH26 75 NC26 ( ) 331. NC26( )HR 413. MH26WP 1461. 26 

18 982. 2037. NQ18L1C 576 MH26 75 NC26 ( ) 331. NC26( )HR 413. MH26WP 1461. 26 

100 

30 1056. 2099. NQ30L1 630 MH32 75 NC32 ( ) 351. NC32( )HR 438. MH32WP 1469. 32 


30 





225 

72d 2048. 3266. NQ72L2 1531 MH44 75 NC44 ( ) 442. NC44( )HR 553. MH44WP 1735. 44 

72d 2137. 3355. NQ72L2C 1620 MH44 75 NC44 ( ) 442. NC44( )HR 553. MH44WP 1735. 44 



30 


30 1719. 2897. NQ30L4C 1158 MH50 75 NC50V ( ) 486. NC50V( )HR 608. MH50WP 1739. 50 

42 400 1746. 2924. NQ42L4 1185 MH50 75 NC50V ( ) 486. NC50V( )HR 608. MH50WP 1739. 50 


84d 3235. 4356. NQ84L4C 2528 MH68 75 NC68V ( ) 632. NC68V( )HR 790. MH68WP 1828. 68 

30 

1803. 3032. NQ30L6C 1242 MH50 75 NC50V ( ) 486. NC50V( )HR 608. MH62WPg 1790. 50/62 

42 600 1907. 3136. NQ42L6C 1346 MH50 75 NC50V ( ) 486. NC50V( )HR 608. MH62WPg 1790. 50/62 

84d 3399. 4582. NQ84L6C 2692 MH68 75 NC68V ( ) 632. NC68V( )HR 790. MH80WPg 1890. 68/80 

20" Wide Cabinetf —Three Phase 4-Wire 

18 



100 



30 





225 





30 



42 1902. 3080. NQ442L4 1341 MH50 75 NC50V ( ) 486. NC50V( )HR 608. MH50WP 1739. 50 

42 400 1983. 3161. NQ442L4C 1422 MH50 75 NC50V ( ) 486. NC50V( )HR 608. MH50WP 1739. 50 

72d 2965. 4089. NQ472L4 2299 MH62 75 NC62V ( ) 591. NC62V( )HR 739. MH62WP 1790. 62 



30 

1988. 3217. NQ430L6C 1427 MH50 75 NC50V ( ) 486. NC50V( )HR 608. MH62WPg 1790. 50/62 

42 600 2077. 3306. NQ442L6C 1516 MH50 75 NC50V ( ) 486. NC50V( )HR 608. MH62WPg 1790. 50/62 

84d 3739. 4922. NQ484L6C 3032 MH68 75 NC68V ( ) 632. NC68V( )HR 790. MH80WPg 1890. 68/80 

Height 

(In.) 

Table 9.5: 

Mains 

Rating 

225 A 

400 A 

Pole 

Spaces 

Main Lug Interiors with TVSS 

Voltage 

30 208Y/120 Vac 

42 208Y/120 Vac 

72d 208Y/120 Vac 

42 208Y/120 Vac 

72d 208Y/120 Vac 

Surge 

Rating 

120,000 A 

160,000 A 

120,000 A 

160,000 A 

120,000 A 

120,000 A 

160,000 A 

120,000 A 

Total Price Interior, Front, 

Box and Adapter Kit 

Interior Only (Order Branch 

Circuit Breakers Separately) 

Box 20" W x 5.75" 

Db 


Type 3R/5/12 

Enclosuree 

MONO-FLAT ® Front Hinged Fronts 20" W x 6.5" D 

Type 1 Type 3R, 5, 12 Catalog Numbera $ Price Cat. No. $ Price Cat. No.c $ Price Cat. No. $ Price Cat. No. $ Price 

16537. 17715. NQ430L2TVS212 15456. MH50 75. NC50( ) 486. NC50( )HR 608. MH50WP 1739. 

16588. 17766. NQ430L2TVS212C 15507. MH50 75. NC50( ) 486. NC50( )HR 608. MH50WP 1739. 









17214. 18335. NQ442L4TVS212 15987. MH68 75. NC68V( ) 632. NC68V( )HR 790. MH68WP 1828. 

17295. 18416. NQ442L4TVS212C 16068. MH68 75. NC68V( ) 632. NC68V( )HR 790. MH68WP 1828. 





a “C’’ suffix indicates copper bussing. 

b Embossed mounting holes add a .25 inch standoff to back of MH box. 

c Add “F’’ for flush, “S’’ for surface. 

d AVAILABILITY TO BE ANNOUNCED. Cannot be used as a lighting panelboard prior to 

local adoption of the 2008 NEC. 

e Enclosure includes trim kit. 

f For 14” wide offer, see the Supplemental & Obsolescence Digest. 

g This enclosure requires a 12” rail and deadfront extension (NQ12RDE) 



PE1A Discount 

7/31/08 

Schedule 

All Rights Reserved




Panelboards 

NQ Main Circuit Breaker Interiors—240 Vac, 48 Vdc 


Table 9.6: 

Main Circuit Breaker Interiors—Will accept plug-on and bolt-on circuit breakers 

Total $ Price Interior Only 

Main Circuit Breaker 

Interior, Front, (Order Branch 

Adapter Kit 

Pole 

Spaces Rating 

Mains 

Box Circuit Breakers 

Box 

(Less Circuit 

and Adapter Kitf Separately) 

Breaker)f 20"W x 5.75"Db 

Circuit 

Type 1 

Type 3R, 

Catalog No.a $ Price Catalog No. $ Price Breaker Frame Catalog No. $ Price 

5, 12 

Sizeg 

20" Wide Cabineth—Single Phase 3-Wire 


Catalog 

No.c 

Mono-Flat ® 

Front 

Hinged 

Front 

$ Price Catalog No. $ Price 

Type 3R, 5, 12 Enclosuree 

Enclosure 

20"W x 6.5"D 

20" Wide Cabineth—Three Phase 4-Wire 

16k 929. 1984. NQ18L1 523. 

MH26 75. NC26 ( ) 331. NC26( )HR 413. MH26WP 1461. 26 

16k 100 982. 2037. NQ18L1C 576. Select MH26 75. NC26 ( ) 331. NC26( )HR 413. MH26WP 1461. 26 

backfed 

1056. 2099. NQ30L1 630. QOB-VHi MH32 75. NC32 ( ) 351. NC32( )HR 438. MH32WP 1469. 32 

– – QOB 2-pole or 

28k 

28k 1116. 2159. NQ30L1C 690. MH32 75. NC32 ( ) 351. NC32( )HR 438. MH32WP 1469. 32 

18 1484. 2520. NQ18L1 523. 

MH38 75. NC38 ( ) 366. NC38( )HR 458. MH38WP 1477. 38 

18 1537. 2573. NQ18L1C 576. HD, HG, HJ, HL MH38 75. NC38 ( ) 366. NC38( )HR 458. MH38WP 1477. 38 

100 

NQMB2HJ 520. 100 A 

30 1667. 2885. NQ30L1 630. maximum MH44 75. NC44 ( ) 442. NC44( )HR 553. MH44WP 1735. 44 

30 1727. 2945. NQ30L1C 690. MH44 75. NC44 ( ) 442. NC44( )HR 553. MH44WP 1735. 44 

30 1773. 2991. NQ30L2 736. 

MH44 75. NC44 ( ) 442. NC44( )HR 553. MH44WP 1735. 44 

30 1823. 3041. NQ30L2C 786. 

HD, HG, HJ, HL 

MH44 75. NC44 ( ) 442. NC44( )HR 553. MH44WP 1735. 44 

42 1974. 3152. NQ42L2 893. NQMB2HJ JD, JG, JJ, JL MH50 75. NC50 ( ) 486. NC50( )HR 608. MH50WP 1739. 50 


225 

NQMB2Q 520. QB, QD, QG, QJ 

72d 2650. 3819. NQ72L2 1531. MH56 75. NC56 ( ) 524. NC56( )HR 655. MH56WP 1768. 56 

72d 2739. 3908. NQ72L2C 1620. NQMB2KI 

KI MH56 75. NC56 ( ) 524. NC56( )HR 655. MH56WP 1768. 56 


84d 3076. 4200. NQ84L2C 1890. MH62 75. NC62 ( ) 591. NC62( )HR 739. MH62WP 1790. 62 

30 2266. 3390. NQ30L4 1080. 

MH62 75. NC62V ( ) 591. NC62V( )HR 739. MH62WP 1790. 62 

30 2344. 3468. NQ30L4C 1158. MH62 75. NC62V ( ) 591. NC62V( )HR 739. MH62WP 1790. 62 

42 400 2371. 3495. NQ42L4 1185. NQMB4LA 520. 

LA/LH 


(LC is F/A only) 


84d 3790. 4938. NQ84L4C 2528. MH80 75. NC80V ( ) 667. NC80V( )HR 830. MH80WP 1890. 80 

15k 990. 2045. NQ418L1 584. 

MH26 75. NC26 ( ) 331. NC26( )HR 413. MH26WP 1461. 26 

15k 100 1040. 2095. NQ418L1C 634. Select MH26 75. NC26 ( ) 331. NC26( )HR 413. MH26WP 1461. 26 

backfed 

1167. 2210. NQ430L1 741. QOB-VHj MH32 75. NC32 ( ) 351. NC32( )HR 438. MH32WP 1469. 32 

– – QOB 3-pole or 

27k 

27k 1220. 2263. NQ430L1C 794. MH32 75. NC32 ( ) 351. NC32( )HR 438. MH32WP 1469. 32 

18 1545. 2548. NQ418L1 584. 

MH38 75. NC38 ( ) 366. NC38( )HR 458. MH38WP 1477. 38 

18 1595. 2598. NQ418L1C 634. HD, HG, HJ, HL MH38 75. NC38 ( ) 366. NC38( )HR 458. MH38WP 1477. 38 

100 

NQMB2HJ 520. 100 A 

30 1778. 2996. NQ430L1 741. maximum MH44 75. NC44 ( ) 442. NC44( )HR 553. MH44WP 1735. 44 


30 1847. 3065. NQ430L2 810. 

MH44 75. NC44 ( ) 442. NC44( )HR 553. MH44WP 1735. 44 

30 1898. 3116. NQ430L2C 861. 


MH44 75. NC44 ( ) 442. NC44( )HR 553. MH44WP 1735. 44 

42 2065. 3243. NQ442L2 984. NQMB2HJ JD, JG, JJ, JL MH50 75. NC50 ( ) 486. NC50( )HR 608. MH50WP 1739. 50 


225 

NQMB2Q 520. QB, QD, QG, QJ 


72d 2892. 4061. NQ472L2C 1773. NQMB2KI 

KI MH56 75. NC56 ( ) 524. NC56( )HR 655. MH56WP 1768. 56 


84d 3254. 4378. NQ484L2C 2068. MH62 75. NC62 ( ) 591. NC62( )HR 739. MH62WP 1790. 62 

30 2427. 3551. NQ430L4 1241. 



42 2527. 3651. NQ442L4 1341. MH62 75. NC62V ( ) 591. NC62V( )HR 739. MH62WP 1790. 62 

42 400 2608. 3732. NQ442L4C 1422. NQMB4LA 520. 

LA, LH 


(LC is F/A only) 

72d 3542. 4657. NQ472L4 2299. MH74 75. NC74V ( ) 648. NC74V( )HR 810. MH74WP 1838. 74 



Table 9.7: 

Mains 

Rating Spaces 

Pole 

225 A 

30 

42 

400 A 42 

Main Circuit Breaker Interiors with TVSS 

Voltage 

208Y/120 

Vac 

208Y/120 

Vac 

72d 208Y/120 

Vac 

208Y/120 

Vac 

Surge 

Rating 

Total Price Interior, 

Front, Box and 

Adapter Kitf 

Type 1 

Type 3R, 

5, 12 

Interior Only (Order Main 

Circuit Breaker, Kit and 

Branches Separately) 

Main Circuit Breaker Adapter Kit 


Catalog 

No. 

$ Price 

Height 

(In.) 

Type 3R/5/12 

Enclosuree 

Box 20" W x Mono-Flat ® Front 

Hinged Fronts 20" W x 6.5" D 

Kit Catalog Main Circuit 5.75" D b c 

No.f 

$ Price 

Breaker Frame 

Catalog Number $ Price Cat. No. $ Price Cat. No. $ Price Cat. No. $ Price Cat. No. $ Price 

120,000 A 16642. 17766. NQ430L2TVS212 15456. MH62 75. NC62( ) 591. NC62( )HR 739. MH62WP 1790. 


19385. 20509. NQ430L2TVS216 18199. 


MH62 75. NC62( ) 591. NC62( )HR 739. MH62WP 1790. 

160,000 A 

19436. 20560. NQ430L2TVS216C 18250. NQMB2HJ JD, JG, JJ, JL MH62 75. NC62( ) 591. NC62( )HR 739. MH62WP 1790. 

16857. 17978. NQ442L2TVS212 15630. or 

MH68 75. NC68( ) 632. NC68( )HR 790. MH68WP 1828. 

120,000 A NQMB2Q 520. QB, QD, QG, QJ 

16907. 18028. NQ442L2TVS212C 15680. or 

MH68 75. NC68( ) 632. NC68( )HR 790. MH68WP 1828. 

19600. 20721. NQ442L2TVS216 18373. NQMB2KI 

KI MH68 75. NC68( ) 632. NC68( )HR 790. MH68WP 1828. 

160,000 A 



120,000 A 


120,000 A 17249. 18397. NQ442L4TVS212 15987. MH80 75. NC80V( ) 667. NC80( )HR 830. MH80WP 1890. 

17330. 18478. NQ442L4TVS212C 16068. 

NQMB4LA 520. 

LA, LH MH80 75. NC80V( ) 667. NC80( )HR 830. MH80WP 1890. 

19992. 21140. NQ442L4TVS216 18730. (LC is F/A only) MH80 75. NC80V( ) 667. NC80( )HR 830. MH80WP 1890. 

160,000 A 

20073. 21221. NQ442L4TVS216C 18811. MH80 75. NC80V( ) 667. NC80( )HR 830. MH80WP 1890. 

a “C’’ suffix indicates copper bussing. 

b Embossed mounting holes add a .25 inch standoff to back of MH box. 

c Add “F’’ for flush, “S’’ for surface. 

d AVAILABILITY TO BE ANNOUNCED. Cannot be used as a lighting panelboard prior to 

local adoption of the 2008 NEC. 

e Enclosure includes trim kit. 

f Select the appropriate main circuit breaker from tables starting on page 7-22 and add the 

circuit breaker price to the total price of the panelboard. 

g Circuit breaker interrupting ratings, see tables starting on page 7-22. 

h For 14" wide offer, see the Supplemental & Obsolescence Digest 

i QOB2150VH takes four pole spaces; all other QOB two pole circuit breakers take two 

pole spaces 

j QOB3110VH to QOB3150VH take six pole spaces; all other QOB three pole circuit 

breakers take three pole spaces 

k Pole spaces shown are available for branch circuits, with spaces deducted for the back 

fed main breaker 



PE1A 

Discount 

Schedule 


7/31/08 

7


Panelboards 

Table 9.8: 

Mains 

Ampacity 

Catalog No. 

NQ Merchandised Neutrals 

200% Neutral Kit Copper 100% Neutral Kit 

Price 

Box 

Add Schedule Catalog No. Price Box 

Add Schedule 

100 NQNL1 210. 

NQN1CU 128. 

NQNL2 or 

no 

225 

284. 

adder 

PE-1A NQN2CU 128. 

NQNL2ACCYb 

no 

PE-1A 

adder 

400 NQNL4a 426. NQN6CU 

390 

600 Not available NQN6CUa 

a Not to be used with SFL, FTL or SFB. These combinations are factory assembled only. 

b For 225A panel with SFL, FTL or SFB, use NQNL2ACCY. Otherwise, use NQNL2. 

NQ Merchandised Accessories 

Class 1640, / Refer to Catalog 1640CT0701 

NQNL2 



Table 9.9: 

NQ Merchandised Sub Feed Lugs, Feed Through Lugs and Sub Feed Breakers 

Sub Feed Circuit Breaker Kits (breaker not incl.) 

Mains Sub Feed Lugs (N/A in MCB Interiors) 

Feed Through Lugs 

Single SFB 

Two SFBs 

Ampacity 

Catalog No. Price Schedule Catalog No. Price Schedule Catalog No. Price Schedule Catalog No. Price Schedule 

100A not 

100 A NQSFL1 103. 

available; use – – – – – – – – 

225A interior 

PE-1A NQFTL2Lc 317. 

225 A NQSFL2 135. 

NQSFB2Q or 

686. PE-1A – – – 

NQFTL2Hd 317. 

NQSFB2HJ 

PE-1A 

NQFTL4Lc 338. 

NQSFB4Q or 

400 A NQSFL4 173. 

Use the 2 SFB kit – 

NQSFB4HJ 

860. PE-1A 

NQFTL4Hd 338. 

600 A Use TFL Factory Assembled Only 

c The final character L indicates the kit is used for Low circuit count interiors 30 and 42. 

d The final character H indicates the kit is used for High circuit count interiors 54, 72 and 84. 

e See Table 9.10 & Table 9.11 for box selection table. 

Table 9.10: 

Box Selection Table: Merchandised NQ Main Lug Panelboards with Accessories 

Feature Sub Feed Lugs Feed Through Lugs Sub Feed Circuit Breakers 

Circuits 100A 225 A 400A 600 A 100A 225 A 400A 600A 100A 225 A (one) 400A (two) 600A (two) 

18 MH26 – – 

– – – 

– – – 

30 MH32 MH38 MH50 

MH38 MH50 – MH50 MH74 

42 – MH44 MH50 Use FTL 

Factory Asm. 

Use 225A MH38 MH56 – MH56 MH74 

Only 

72 – MH50 MH62 Interior MH50 MH68 – MH62 MH86 

84 – MH56 MH68 MH56 MH68 – MH68 f 

Factory Asm. 

Only 

Table 9.11: 

Box Selection Table: Merchandised NQ Vertically 

Mounted Main Breaker Panelboards w/ Accessories 

Feature Feed Through Lugs Sub Feed Circuit Breakers 

Circuits 100A 225 A 400A 600A 100A 

225 A 

(one) 

400A 

(two) 

18 – – – 

– – – 

30 – MH50 MH62 Factory – MH62 MH86 

42 – MH50 MH68 Asm. – MH68 MH86 

72 – MH62 MH80 Only – MH74 f 

84 – MH68 MH80 – MH80 f 

f (c)Requires box longer than available box offer. 

Table 9.12: 

NQ Accessories 

600A 

(two) 

Factory 

Asm. 

Only 

Description Catalog No. $ Price Schedule 

Sub-feed: Bolt-on: 

• 2-pole QOB2125SL 117.00 DE2A 

• 3-pole QOB3125SL 117.00 DE2A 

Equipment ground bars 

• Aluminum PK27GTA 22.50 DE3A 

• PK23GTA+ #1 to #4/0 Al/Cu lug PK23GTAL 27.10 DE3A 

• Copper PK27GTACU 56.00 PE-1A 

• Ground Bar Insulator Kit PKGTAB 29.20 DE3A 

Filler plate (15 per package) NQFP15g 45.00 PE1A 

Circuit I.D. number strips 

1-102 odd/even (left side numbered 1,3,5 ...101) NQ102OE 5.30 PE1A 

103-204 odd/even 

(left side numbered 103,105,107 ... 203) 

NQ204OE 5.30 PE1A 

1-102 sequential 


NQ102S 5.30 PE1A 

103-204 sequential 


NQ204S 5.30 PE1A 

• 6" Extension NQ6RDE 168.11 PE1A 

Rail & Deadfront • 12" Extension NQ12RDE 188.78 PE1A 

Extensions • 18" Extension NQ18RDE 228.47 PE1A 

• 24" Extension NQ24RDE 264.46 PE1A 

Touch-up paint USAS #49 Gray (Aerosol can) PK49SP 26.00 DE1 

Table 9.12: 

Handle attachments—branch circuit breakers: 

Handle lock-off HLO1 6.60 DE2A 

Handle tie - (QO and QOB only) QO1HT 2.50 DE2A 

Handle padlock attachment - 1-pole QO1PA 7.10 DE2A 

2- and 3-pole QO1PL 7.10 DE2A 

Handle tie & lock-off for three 1-pole (QO, QOB) QO3HT 8.90 DE2A 

Neutral or Ground Lug: 

#10 to #2 Al or #14 to #4 Cu QO70AN 6.60 DE3A 

#4 to #1/0 Al/Cu Q1100AN 7.40 DE3A 

#1 to #4/0 Al/Cu Q1150AN 21.60 DE3A 

Endwalls for MH Boxes 

NQ Accessories 

Blank (one per package) 8011010501 27.40 PE1A 

With Knockouts (one per package) 8011010401 27.40 PE1A 

g Filler Plates are $3.00 each and must be ordered in packages of 15. 

Installation Tools 



PE1A DE2A DE3A Discount 

7/31/08 

Schedule 

All Rights Reserved



QOB Bolt-On Circuit 

Breakers j 

With Visi-Trip ® Indicator for NQ Panelboards 

Class 690, 730, 910, 950 

Table 9.13: 

Ampere 

Ratinga 

One-pole 

Two-pole—Common Trip 

Catalog No. $ Price Catalog No. $ Price 

QOB-GFI—QOB QWIK-GARD ® Circuit Breaker With Ground Fault 

Circuit Interrupter—UL Class A 4-6 mA People Protection.b 

120 Vac—10,000 AIR 120/240 Vac—10,000 AIR 

15 QOB115GFI 165. QOB215GFI 296. 

20 QOB120GFI 165. QOB220GFI 296. 

25 QOB125GFI 165. QOB225GFI 296. 

30 QOB130GFI 165. QOB230GFI 296. 

40 — — QOB240GFI 296. 

50 — — QOB250GFI 296. 

60 — — QOB260GFIc 296. 

QOB-VHGFI 

120 Vac—22,000 AIR 

15 QOB115VHGFI 331. — — 

20 QOB120VHGFI 331. — — 

25 QOB125VHGFI 331. — — 

30 QOB130VHGFI 331. — — 

QOB-EPD—QOB Equipment protection circuit breakers with 

UL Listed 30 mA equipment protection. 

120 Vac—10,000 AIR 

15 QOB115EPD 278. QOB215EPD 447. 

20 QOB120EPD 278. QOB220EPD 447. 

25 QOB125EPD 278. QOB225EPD 447. 

30 QOB130EPD 278. QOB230EPD 447. 

40 — — QOB240EPD 447. 

50 — — QOB250EPD 447. 

60 — — QOB260EPD 447. 

QOB-HM—High magnetic trip circuit breakers are recommended 

for applications where high initial inrush may occur and for 

individual dimmer applications. 

15 QOB115HMh 26.50 — — 

20 QOB120HMh 26.50 — — 

QOB-K—Key operated QOB circuit breakers 

Available in single pole construction and can be mounted in any 

single pole space which will accept a standard QOB. These circuit 

breakers can be turned ON or OFF or to RESET with a special key 

(Catalog No. QOK10) included with the circuit breaker. These 

circuit breakers are UL Listed and available as shown in the table. 

120 Vac—10,000 AIR 

10 QOB110K 112. — — 

15 QOB115K 112. — — 

20 QOB120K 112. — — 

25 QOB125K 112. — — 

30 QOB130K 112. — — 

a 10–30 ampere circuit breakers are suitable for use with 60 o C or 

75 o C conductors. 35–60 ampere circuit breakers are suitable for 

use with 75 o C conductors. 

b Do not connect to more than 250 feet of load conductor for the 

total one-way run to prevent nuisance tripping. 

c Suitable only for feeding 240 Vac and 208 Vac two-wire loads. 

Does not contain load neutral connection. 

d UL Listed 5,000 AIR on 3Ø corner grounded delta systems. 

e DC Rating is not available on indicated products. 

f UL Listed as HACR type for use with air conditioning, heating and 

refrigeration equipment having motor group combinations and 

marked for use with HACR type circuit breakers. 

g QO arc-fault circuit breakers provide branch feeder protection 

(i.e. QO115AFI) or combination protection (i.e. QO115CAFI) as 

required by the NEC and local code adoption, and comply with 

UL 1699. 

h UL Listed as SWD (switching duty) rated suitable for switching 

120 Vac fluorescent lighting loads. 

i QOB2150VH uses 4 pole spaces. QOB3110VH, QOB3125VH 

and QOB3150VH each use 6 pole spaces. 20A maximum circuit 

breaker mounted opposite. Use with 75 o C wire only. 

j For QO plug-on circuit breaker pricing, 

see tables starting on page 1-2. 

Table 9.16: 

Breaker 

Type 

QOB 

1-pole 

QOB 

2-pole 

QOB 

3-pole 

QO/QOB Circuit Breaker Wire Sizes 

Ampere 

Ratinga 

Al 

Wire Size (AWG) 

Cu 

10–30 #14–8 #14–8 

10–30 — two #14–10 

35–70 #8–2 #8–2 

10–30 #14–8 #14–8 

10–30 — two #14–10 

35–70 #8–2 #8–2 

80–125 #4–2/0 #4–2/0 

150–200 #4–300 kcmil #4–300 kcmil 

10–30 #14–8 #14–8 

35–70 #8–2 #8–2 

80–125 #4–2/0 #4–2/0 

QOB-VH 110–150 #4–300 kcmil #4–300 kcmil 

QOT 15–20 #12–8 #14–8 

QOB-GFI & 15–30 #12–8 #14–8 

QOB-EPD 40, 50, 60 #12–4 #14–6 

Table 9.14: 

Ampere 

Ratinga 

QOB Bolt-On 

One-pole 

Two-pole—Common Trip 

Two-pole— 

Common Tripd 

Three-pole— 

Common Trip 

Catalog No. $ Price Catalog No. $ Price Catalog No. $ Price Catalog No. $ Price 

120 Vac—10,000 AIR 

48 Vdc—5,000 AIR 

120/240 Vac—10,000 AIR 

48 Vdc—5,000 AIRe 

240 Vac— 

10,000 AIR 

240 Vac—10,000 AIR 

48 Vdc—5,000 AIRe 

10 QOB110 26.50 QOB210 59. — — QOB310 195. 

15 QOB115fh 26.50 QOB215f 59. QOB215H 160. QOB315f 195. 

20 QOB120fh 26.50 QOB220f 59. QOB220H 160. QOB320f 195. 

25 QOB125f 26.50 QOB225f 59. QOB225H 160. QOB325f 195. 


35 QOB135f 26.50 QOB235f 59. — — QOB335f 195. 


45 QOB145f 26.50 QOB245f 59. — — QOB345f 195. 



70 QOB170f 52. QOB270f 112. QOB270H 205. QOB370fe 246. 

80 — — QOB280fe 160. QOB280H 244. QOB380fe 279. 



110 — — QOB2110fe 334. — — — — 

125 — — QOB2125fe 334. — — — — 

Molded Case Switch 60 A max - QOB200 59. — — QOB300 195. 

Molded Case Switch 100 A max - 

240 Vac 

QOB2000 156. — — QOB3000 338. 

Table 9.15: 

Ampere 

Ratinga 

QOB-VH 

QHB 

One-pole Two-pole—Common Trip Three-pole—Common Trip 

Catalog No. $ Price Catalog No. $ Price Catalog No. $ Price 

120 Vac—22,000 AIR 120/240 Vac —22,000 AIR 240 Vac—22,000 AIR 

15 QOB115VHfh 47.70 QOB215VHf 114. QOB315VHf 293. 

20 QOB120VHfh 47.70 QOB220VHf 114. QOB320VHf 293. 

25 QOB125VHf 47.70 QOB225VHf 114. QOB325VHf 293. 

30 QOB130VHf 47.70 QOB230VHf 114. QOB330VHf 293. 

40 — — QOB240VHf 114. QOB340VHf 293. 

50 — — QOB250VHf 114. QOB350VHf 293. 

60 — — QOB260VHf 114. QOB360VHf 293. 

70 — — QOB270VHf 182. QOB370VHf 373. 

80 — — QOB280VHf 256. QOB380VHf 419. 

90 — — QOB290VHf 256. QOB390VHf 419. 

100 — — QOB2100VHf 256. QOB3100VHf 419. 

110 — — QOB2110VHf 740. QOB3110VHi 1206. 

125 — — QOB2125VHf 740. QOB3125VHi 1206. 

150 — — QOB2150VHi 815. QOB3150VHi 1206. 

120 Vac—65,000 AIR 120 Vac/240 Vac—65,000 AIR 240 Vac—65,000 AIR 

15 QHB115fh 81. QHB215f 228. QHB315f 397. 

20 QHB120fh 81. QHB220f 228. QHB320f 397. 

25 QHB125f 81. QHB225f 228. QHB325f 397. 

30 QHB130f 81. QHB230f 228. QHB330f 397. 

QOB-HID—HID circuit breakers 

UL Listed for use on circuit feeding fluorescent and High Intensity Discharge (HID) lighting systems such as 

mercury vapor, metal halide, or high pressure sodium. These circuit breakers are physically interchangeable 

with QOB circuit breakers. 

120 Vac—10,000 AIR 120/240 Vac—10,000 AIR 240 Vac—10,000 AIR 

15 QOB115HIDh 33. QOB215HID 72. QOB315HID 218. 

20 QOB120HIDh 33. QOB220HID 72. QOB320HID 218. 

25 QOB125HID 33. QOB225HID 72. QOB325HID 218. 

30 QOB130HID 33. QOB230HID 72. QOB330HID 218. 

40 QOB140HID 33. QOB240HID 72. — — 

50 QOB150HID 33. QOB250HID 72. — — 

QOB-SWN—Switch Neutral—Common Trip—NEC 514-5 

1-pole—2-Wire 

2 Spaces —120 Vac 

2-pole—3-Wire 

3 Spaces—120/240 Vac 

10 — — QOB210SWN 77. QOB310SWN 113. 

15 — — QOB215SWN 77. QOB315SWN 113. 

20 — — QOB220SWN 77. QOB320SWN 113. 

25 — — QOB225SWN 77. QOB325SWN 113. 

30 — — QOB230SWN 77. QOB330SWN 113. 

40 — — QOB240SWN 77. QOB340SWN 113. 

50 — — QOB250SWN 77. QOB350SWN 113. 

Table 9.17: 

Circuit Breaker Type 

QO ® Arc-Fault Circuit Breakers f g 

Ampere 

Ratinga 

1P 120 Vac 

10 kAIR 

1 Space Required 

1P 120 Vac 

22 kAIR 

1 Space Required 

Catalog Number $ Price Catalog Number $ Price 

Branch Feeder Arc-Fault 15 QO115AFI 160. QO115VHAFI 315. 

Interupter 

20 QO120AFI 160. QO120VHAFI 347. 

Combination Arc-Fault Interupter 

15 QO115CAFI 188. QO115VCAFI 408. 

20 QO120CAFI 188. QO120VHCAFI 408. 

Note: See page 7-12 for accessories. 



DE2A 

Discount 

Schedule 


7/31/08 

9

NQ Factory Assembled 

Panelboards 

240 Vac, 48 Vdc 




Table 9.18: 

Mains 

Rating 

2-pole 

Base Price (With Solid Neutral) 

Main Lugs 

3-pole 

Circuit 

Breaker 

Main Circuit Breaker (Circuit Breaker Interrupting Rating—pages 6-2 through 6-8)a 

Standard IC HIC Extra HIC I-Limiter ® 

2-pole 

3-pole 

Circuit 

Breaker 

2-pole 

3-pole 

Circuit 

Breaker 

2-pole 

3-pole 

Circuit 

Breaker 

60 A — — QOB 1192. 1464. QOB-VH 1258. 1586. HJa 2950. 3300. FI 4088. 4858. 

100 A 720. 832. 

QOB 1254. 1562. QOB-VH 1382. 1712. 

HJa 2950. 3300. FI 4088. 4858. 

HD 2030. 2380. HG 2700. 3050. 

150 A — — HD 3180. 3530. HG 3840. 4190. HJa 4000. 4350. — — — 

225 A 772. 928. 

QB 2450. 2800. 

JD 3980. 4300. 

QG 3740. 4090. QJ 3970. 4320. 

QD 3084. 3434. JG 4510. 5100. JJa 6450. 7280. 

KI 7436. 8680. 

250 A — — JD 4390. 4640. JG 5040. 6020. JJa 7100. 8020. KI 8264. 9672. 

400 A 1422. 1634. LA 5366. 6106. LH 7708. 8834. LC 8620. 9780. — — — 

600 Ab 2082. 2326. — — — — — — LC 9420. 10440. — — — 

Note: Equipment Ground Bar—38. 

2-pole 

3-pole 

Table 9.19: 

Space Only 

Circuit Breaker 

Ampere Rating 

Branch Circuit Breakers 

1-pole 

120 Vac 

PLUG-ON or BOLT-ON 

2-pole 

120/240 

Vac 

2-pole 

240 Vac 

3-pole 

240 Vac 

$ Price $ Price $ Price $ Price 

All Space Only Except below 28. 58. 58. 86. 

QOB–VH, Space Only (125–150 A) — 116. — 174. 

10,000 AIR—Branch Circuit Breakers—QO ® , QOB, QO-H, QOB-H 

15–60 68. 134. 260. c 352. 

70 100. 208. 296. c 396. 

80–100 — 262. 380. c 458. 

110–125 — 482. — — 

10,000 AIR—Arc Fault Circuit Interrupters—QO-AFI, QOB-AFI 

15–20 400. — — — 

10,000 AIR—Combination Arc Fault Circuit Interrupters—QO-CAFI, QOB-CAFI 

15–20 470. — — — 

10,000 AIR—Qwik–Gard ® —Class A—QO-GFI, QOB-GFI 

15–30 272. 488. — — 

40–60 — 488. — — 

(High Interrupting Capacity) 

22,000 AIR Branch Circuit Breakers—QO-VH, QOB-VH 

15–30 92. 212. — 462. 

35–60 — 212. — 462. 

70 — 292. — 556. 

80–100 — 378. — 606. 

110–125 — 1022. — 1746. d 

150 — 1140. d — 1746. d 

22,000 AIR—Arc Fault Circuit Interrupters—QO-VHAFI, QOB-VHAFI 

15–20 824. — — — 

22,000 AIR—Combination Arc Fault Circuit Interrupters—QO-VHCAFI, QOB-VHCAFI 

15–20 940. — — — 

22,000 AIR—Qwik-Gard—Class A—QO-VHGFI, QOB-VHGFI 

15–30 294. — — — 

42,000 AIR Branch Circuit Breakers—QOH 

35–60 — 368. e — — 

70 — 596. e — — 

80–100 — 688. e — — 

110–125 — 1402. e — — 

65,000 AIR Branch Circuit Breakers—QH, QHB 

15–30 144. 348. — 596. 

Note: Shunt Trip, Auxiliary Switch, and Alarm Switch—accessories for circuit breakers—add $ 

Price from page 7-12. 

a QL, HJ, HL, JJ and JL circuit breakers are also available. 

b Copper bus standard 

c UL Listed for use on 3Ø, grounded BØ systems, (5,000 AIR for this application). 

d Bolt-On only, 2-pole requires 4 vertical spaces, 3-pole requires 6 vertical spaces. 

e Plug-On only. 

f Not available in Type 3R, 5, 12, except for 400 A main circuit breaker. 

Table 9.20: 


Ampere Rating 

Specialty Branch Circuit Breakers 

1-pole 

120 Vac 

Specialty Branch Circuit Breakers (10,000 AIR) 

PLUG-ON or BOLT-ON 

2-pole 

120/240 Vac 

For High Intensity Discharge Lighting—QO-HID, QOB-HID 

2-pole 

240 Vac 

3-pole 

240 Vac 

$ Price $ Price $ Price $ Price 

15–30 78. 148. — 376. 

40–50 78. 148. — — 

Switch Neutral—QO-SWN, QOB-SWN 

15–50 — 

1-pole 

2-pole 

2-Wire 

(2 spaces) — 

3-Wire 

(3 spaces) 

154. 220. 

High Magnetic Trip (For applications subject to high initial inrush)— 

QO-HM, QOB-HM 

15–20 68. — — — 

Provides 30 mA Equipment Protection—QO-EPD, QOB-EPD 

15–30 462. 828. — — 

Sub-feed Circuit Breakers 

Main lugs or main circuit breaker interior—1Ø or 3Ø. 

Maximum 1 circuit breaker per 225 A main lug or 250 A main circuit breaker 

panelboard, 2 circuit breakers per 400–600 A panelboard. 

Table 9.21: Sub-Feed Circuit Breaker (110–225 A) 

(Refer to Cabinet Data table below for correct box size) 

No. of 

Poles 

Ampacity QB QD QGa HD HGa JD JGa 

2 110–225 A 1218. 1762. 3812. 2456. 3500. 3020. 4220. 

3 110–225 A 1848. 2296. 4608. 2872. 3798. 3370. 5100. 

Space Only 110–225 A 826. 826. 826. 826. 826. 826. 826. 

Table 9.22: 

Max. No. of Branch 

Spaces 

(Does not include 

sub-feed circuit breaker 

spaces) 

Sub-Feed Circuit Breaker Cabinet Data 

Box Height (20"W x 5.75"D) 

225 A 250 A 400 Af 600 A 

Main Lug 

Main 

Circuit 

Breaker 

Main Lug 

Main 

Circuit 

Breaker 

Main Lug 

30 50 62 74 86 74 

42 56 68 74 86 74 

54 56 68 80 — 80 

72 62 74 86 — 86 

84 68 80 — — — 

Main 

Circuit 

Breaker 

not 

available 

with MCB 



PE1 Discount 

7/31/08 

Schedule 

All Rights Reserved



NQ Factory Assembled 

Panelboards 

Common Features 


Sub-feed Lugs 

NOTE: AVAILABLE ON MAIN LUG INTERIORS ONLY. 1Ø or 3Ø. 

Table 9.23: 

Sub Feed Wire Range Per Phase 

Mains Rating Incoming Outgoing 

Price per 

Panel 

100 one #6-2/0 Al/Cu one #6-2/0 Al/Cu $128.00 

225 one 1/0-350 kcmil Al/Cu one 1/0-350 kcmil Al/Cu $128.00 

400 one 1/0-750 kcmil Cu only one 1/0-750 kcmil Cu only $164.00 

Table 9.31: 

200% Rated Neutrals 

Panelboards with 200% rated neutrals are not available with 250 A J- and K- 

frame main circuit breakers or integral lighting contactors 

Add Per Panel 

$ Price 

100 Ab one #6-2/0 kcmil Al/Cu per lug 586. 

225 Ab one #6-350 kcmil Al/Cu per lug 763. 

400 Ab one #1/0-750 kcmil Al/Cu per lug or two 1/0-300 kcmil per lug 950. 

b Two incoming neutral lugs per panel 

Table 9.24: 

Max. No. of 

Branch Spaces 

Feed-thru Lugs 

Table 9.25: 

Sub-Feed Lug Cabinet Data 


100 A 225 A 400 A 

18 MH26 — — 

30 MH32 MH38 MH50 

42 — MH44 MH50 

72 — MH50 MH62 

84 — MH56 MH68 

Feed-Thru Lugs 

Mains Rating Feed-Thru Wire Range Per Phase $ Price 

Table 9.26: 

Max. No. 

of Branch 

Spaces 

100 A one #6-2/0 Al/Cu 344. 

225 A one #6–350 kcmil Al/Cu 344. 

400 A one 1/0–750 kcmil or two 1/0–350 kcmil Al/Cu 826. 

600 A two 1/0–750 kcmil Al/Cu 826. 

Feed-Thru Lug Cabinet Data 


225 A 250 A 400 A 600 A 

Main Lugs 

Main Circuit 

Breaker 

Main Lugs 

Main Circuit 

Breaker 

Main Lugs 

Main Circuit 

Breakera 

30 38 50 50 62 62 74 

42 38 50 56 68 62 80 

72 50 62 68 80 74 — 

84 56 68 68 80 80 — 

Table 9.32: Metal Directory Frame $ Price Adder 

Replaces standard plastic stick-on directory pouch 140. 

Table 9.33: Hinged Door-in-Door Trim Add Per Panel 

$ Price 

Hinged Door-in-Door Trim has piano hinge down one side. 

Inner door has a lock, outer door is retained with screws 

646. 

Hinged Door-in-Door with Outer Door Lock in place of screws 836. 

Table 9.34: 

Weatherproof or Dusttight Cabinets- 

Type 3R, 5, 12 

Note: 600 A LC main circuit breaker NQ panelboards are not available with a 

weatherproof enclosure (Use I-Line) 

400 and 600 A NQ panelboards with sub-feed circuit breakers are not available 

with a weatherproof enclosure (Use I-Line). 

Table 9.35: 

Main Lug Interiors: 

Optional Factory Assembled Lugs for 

Main Lug Interiors 

Price Per Pole Adder 

$ Price Adder 

1516. 

100A 225A 400A 600A 

Aluminum Compression Lugs 58. 58. 148. 148. 

Copper Mechanical Lugs 70. 108. 148. 168. 

Copper Compression Lugs 70. 108. 148. 168. 

a 8.75" deep box, ship fully assembled only. 

Table 9.27: Ground Bars $ Price Adder 

Equipment Ground Bar 38. 

Copper Ground Bar (Add to Equipment Ground Bar Price) 52. 

Insulated/Isolated Ground Bar (Add to Equipment Ground Bar Price) 86. 

Table 9.28: Name Plates $ Price Adder 

Standard white face/black letter laminated bakelite, 

1" x 3.5", adhesive backed or screw mountable with 

screws in a bag assembly (Price includes engraving) 

Table 9.29: Copper Bus Bars $ Price Adder 

100 A, 225 A, 250 A 128. 

400 A 388. 

600 A Standard 

78. 

Table 9.36: 

Main Circuit Breaker Interiors: 

Aluminum Compression Lugs 58. 98. 148. 148. 

Copper Mechanical Lugs 70. 108. 148. 148. 

Copper Compression Lugs 70. 108. 148. 148. 

Note: optional lugs are not available for Q frame main or QOB circuit breakers 

Table 9.37: 

Surge Current 

Rating kA 

100 

120 

160 

200 

240 

Optional Factory Assembled Lugs for 

Main Circuit Breaker Interiors 

Price Per Pole Adder 

H Frame J Frame LA Frame LC Frame 

Surgelogic ® Hard Bus TVSS—Model IMAc 

120/240 V 

1Ø3W 

12110. 

13454. 

16386. 

19196. 

23760. 

Voltage 

208Y/120 V 

3Ø4W 

14310. 

15654. 

18586. 

23596. 

27440. 

240/120 V 

3Ø4W High Leg 

14310. 

15654. 

18586. 

23596. 

27440. 

Table 9.38: 

Surgelogic TVSS Options 

Table 9.30: Copper Neutral $ Price Adder 

100 A–600 A 132. 

Description 

Surge Counter 

Dry Contacts 

Remote Monitor 

$ Price 

1650. 

Standard 

2588. 

c TVSS units add 18" of box height in NQ panelboards 

Note: Additional factory modifications, see 9-12. 



PE1 

Discount 

Schedule 


7/31/08 

11

Modifications for Factory 

Assembled Panelboards 

Class 1640/ 

Refer to Catalog 1640CT0701 



Table 9.39: 

Ampacity 

Square D Type PB f 

NQ Lighting Contactors—Mechanically Held 

Type 

$ Price 

30 A 2P PBM10B 3772. 

60 A 2P PBP10B 4634. 

75 A 2P PBN10B 4986. 

100 A 2P PBQ10B 5072. 

150 A 2P PBR10B 7156. 

200 A 2P PBV10B 8692. 

225 A 2P PBW10B 9830. 

30 A 3P PBM11B 3740. 

60 A 3P PBP11B 4754. 

75 A 3P PBN11B 5628. 

100 A 3P PBQ11B 6454. 

150 A 3P PBR11B 8078. 

200 A 3P PBV11B 8736. 

225 A 3P PBW11B 10062. 

ASCO Type 920 g 

30 A 2P 9202030 4694. 

60 A 2P 9202060 5954. 

75 A 2P 9202075 5954. 

100 A 2P 9202100 6194. 

150 A 2P 9202150 9242. 

200 A 2P 9202200 10882. 

225 A 2P 9202225 11875. 

30 A 3P 9203030 5436. 

60 A 3P 9203060 7638. 

75 A 3P 9203075 7638. 

100 A 3P 9203100 9184. 

150 A 3P 9203150 12998. 

200 A 3P 9203200 14434. 

225 A 3P 9203225 15750. 

Table 9.40: 

Ampacity 

Mechanically Held 

Minimum Additional 

Box Height Required 

H (in.) 

Current Density Rated Panelboard Bus and 

Special Plating for Copper Bus 

Copper Bus Special 

Plating 

$ List Price Adder a 

18 

18 

Current Density Rated Bus 

$ List Price Adder 

Tin or Silver Plating 1000 A/in 2 Cu 750 A/in 2 Al 

100 A 1240. 510. 340. b 

125 A 1240. 510. 340. b 

225 A 1240. 610. c 340. b 

250 A 1240. 610. c 456. b 

400 A 2080. 830. 572. b 

Table 9.41: 

Note: 

Maximum 

Ampacity 

MLO 

NQ Panelboard Split Bus Bars 

$ List Price Adder 

For applications with main circuit breaker panelboards, contact the Square D/Schneider 

Electric local Field Sales Office. 

a Standard copper bus plating material 

– NQ: Silver plated bus/tin plated connectors 

b Not available in NQ. 

c NQ available in 42 circuit only. 

d Additional box height required when using contactor. 

e When greater than 125 A lugs are required on the split section of the bus, consult your 

local Square D/Schneider Electric sales office for box height. 

f If two-wire control is required — Square D Add 708. 

(No additional width or depth required) 

g If two-wire control is required — ASCO Add 1412. 

(No additional width or depth required) 

Main Circuit Breaker Without Overload Trip 

(Automatic Molded Case Switch) 

• (Not UL Listed) 

$ Price as standard main circuit breaker, No adder 

Shunt Trip Circuit Breakers 

• See page 7-35 for pricing. 

Maximum Number of 

Pole Spaces Available 

1-phase 3-phase Main Split 

NQ Panelboards—125 A Maximum Lugs on Split Bus Section e 

225 A 

Box Height 

(ft.) 

600. 900. 18 30 44 

600. 900. 30 18 44 

600. 900. 30 30 44 

NOTE: For molded case switch and automatic molded case switch 

short circuit current ratings, see page 7-33. 

For information on the following Special Features please refer to the 

Supplemental & Obsolescence Digest. 

• Powerlogic ® meteringh 

• Customer equipment space (NQ)h 

• Increased box depthh 

• Increased gutters–top, bottom and sidesh 

• Non-standard painth 

• Welded base channelh 

• Type 1 gasketedh 

• Type 2 drip hoodh 

• Type 3R/4/4X/5/12 stainless steel enclosureh 

• Type 4X fiberglass enclosureh 

• Stainless steel trim fronth 

• Padlockable hasph 

• Special locks (Corbin, Yale, Best)h 

• Equal height boxesh 

• Common trim to cover two equal height boxesh 

• Panelboard skirt—hides conduits feeding a panelboardh 

• Panelboard wireway—for terminating conduit in wireway endwallh 

• Panelboard interiors and special fronts to fit existing boxes 

h Supported by the Panelboard Product Selector 



PE1 Discount 

7/31/08 

Schedule 

All Rights Reserved



Panelboards 

NQ Terminal Data 

Class 1640, / Refer to Catalog 1640CT0701 

Table 9.42: 

NQ Standard Aluminum Mechanical Lugs—Main Lugs 

Panel Type Ampere Rating Lug Wire Rangea 

NQ 

100 one #6-2/0 Al/Cu 

225 one #6-350 kcmil Al/Cu 

400 one 1/0-750 kcmil or two 1/0-350 kcmil Al/Cu 

600 two 1/0-750 kcmil Al/Cu 

Table 9.43: 

Panel Type 

NQ Standard Aluminum Mechanical Lugs—Main Circuit Breaker 

Ampere Rating 


Type 

Lug Wire Rangea 

100 QOB one #4–#2/0 Al/Cu 

100 FI one #14–#1/0 Al/Cu 

150 HD, HG, HJ, HL one #14–#3/0 Al/Cu 

NQ 

225 QB, QD, QG, QJ one #14-1/0 Cu or #8-1/0 Al 

250 JD, JG, JJ, JL one #3/0–350 kcmil Al/Cua 

250 KI one #1/0–350 kcmil Al/Cu 

400 LA, LH one #1–600 kcmil Al/Cu or two #1–250 kcmil Al/Cu 

600 LC two #4/0-500 kcmil Al/Cu 

a The lug range shown is for the highest amperage of the circuit breaker frame shown in the table. 




7/31/08 

13

Index 

A 

Accessories 

NQ merchandised panelboards 8 

B 

Branch circuit breakers for panelboards 

QO/QOB circuit breakers for NQ panelboards 9 

N 

NQ factory assembled panelboards 

pricing procedures 5 

NQ merchandised panelboards 6 

20" wide enclosures panelboards 6–8 

main lug interiors with TVSS 6 

pricing procedures 5 

NQ panelboards 10 

series ratings 4 

terminal data 13 

NQ factory assembled panelboards 10, 11 



F 

Factory assembled NQ panelboards 

branch circuit breakers 10 

sub-feed circuit breakers 10 

H 

Hard Bus TVSS 11 

hinged trim for NQ panelboards 6–7 

L 

Lighting and appliance panelboards 6, 10 

Lighting contactors 

mechanically held ASCO Type 920 12 

Lugs - optional - for NQ Panelboards 11 

M 

Main circuit breaker 

without overload trip panelboards 12 

P 

Panelboards 

NQ factory assembled 10–11 

feed-thru lugs 11 

shunt trip circuit breakers 12 

sub-feed lugs 11 

Pricing procedures 

merchandised and factory assembled panelboards 5 

S 

Series ratings 4 


Shunt trip circuit breakers panelboards 12 

Surgelogic 

TVSS 11 

T 

Terminal data 


TVSS 

Surgelogic 11 

TVSS in NQ Panelboards 

Factory Assembled Adder 11 

Ready to Assemble Interiors 6–7 

Type 1 Enclosures for NQ Panelboards 6–7 

Type 3R, 5 and 12 Enclosures for NQ Panelboards 6–7 



7/31/08 

All Rights Reserved

Schneider Electric USA 

1010 Airpark Center Drive 

Nashville, TN 37217 USA 

1-888-Square D 

1-888-778-2733 

www.us.SquareD.com 

1640PL0801 © 2008 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 

03/2008

FDU-80 

80 Character Liquid Crystal Display 

DN-6820:A • D-123 

GENERAL 

The FDU-80 is a compact, cost-effective, 80 character, backlit 

LCD Fire Annunciator for use with the NOTIFIER FireWarden- 

100-2, NFS-640, NFS2-640, and NFS-320 Fire Alarm Control 

Panels (FACPs). The FDU-80 mimics the display of the control 

panel and displays complete system point status information. 

Up to 32 FDU-80s may be connected onto the EIA-485 

Terminal Mode port of each control panel. The FDU-80 

requires no programming, which saves time during system 

commissioning. 

NOTES: 

1. The FDU-80 is compatible with the NOTIFIER NFS-640 

Rev. 2.01 or higher. 

2. The FDU-80 can be used on the same data loop as the 

LCD-80/LCD-80TM annunciators revision 1.6 software or 

higher. 

FEATURES 

• 80-character Liquid Crystal Display. 

• Mimics all display information from the host panel. 

• Control switches for System Acknowledge, Signal Silence, 

Drill and Reset with enable key. 

• System status LEDs for Power, Alarm, Trouble, Supervisory, 

and Alarm Silenced. 

• No programming necessary — FDU-80 connects to the terminal 

mode port. 

• Displays device type identifiers, individual point alarm, trouble 

or supervisory, zone and custom alpha labels. 

• Time and date display field. 

• Aesthetically pleasing design. 

• May be powered by 24 VDC from the host FACP or by 

remote power supplies (requires 24 VDC). 

• Up to 32 FDU-80 annunciators per FACP. 

• Plug-in terminal blocks for ease of installation and service. 

• Can be remotely located up to 6,000 feet (1828.8 m) from 

host control panel. 

• Local piezo sounder with alarm and trouble resound. 

• Semi-flush-mounts to 2.188"/5.556 cm (minimum) deep, 

three-gang electrical box (NOTIFIER P/N 10103) or threegangable 

electrical switchbox. 

• Surface-mounts to NOTIFIER SBB-3 surface backbox. 

OPERATION 

The FDU-80 annunciator provides the FACP with point annunciation 

with full display text on an 80-character LCD display. 

The FDU-80 also provides an array of LEDs to indicate system 

status, and also includes control switches for remote control of 

critical system functions. 

The FDU-80 provides the FACP with up to 32 remote serially 

connected annunciators. All field-wiring terminations on the 

FDU-80 use removable, compression-type terminal blocks for 

ease of wiring and circuit testing. 

Communication between the FACP and the annunciators is 

accomplished over an EIA-485 serial interface, which greatly 

reduces wire and installation cost over traditional systems. Six 

Annunciators 

wires total are required: four for the EIA-485 communications 

(two in and two return); and two for the 24 VDC regulated 

power. Dip switches control local functions such as: piezo disable, 

control switches/key switch disable, transmit/receive 

mode. 

INSTALLATION 

The FDU-80 can be semi-flush mounted to a 2.188"/5.556 cm 

(minimum) deep, three-gang electrical box (NOTIFIER P/N 

10103) or three-gangable electrical switchboxes. Alternately, 

an SBB-3 surface backbox is available for surface-mount applications. 

AGENCY LISTINGS AND APPROVALS 

These listings and approvals apply to the modules specified in 

this document. In some cases, certain modules or applications 

may not be listed by certain approval agencies, or listing may 

be in process. Consult factory for latest listing status. 

• UL Listed: S635 

• ULC Listed: CS100 

• MEA Listed: 245-00-E 

• CSFM: 7120-0028:209 

• FM Approved 

ORDERING INFORMATION 

FDU-80 80 character, backlit, LCD Fire Annunciator with 

control switches for remote control of system functions, and 

key-switch lock. 

10103 Three-gang electrical box, minimum 2.188" 

(5.556 cm) deep, for semi-flush-mount applications. 

6820fdu8.jpg 

SBB-3 Three-gang surface backbox for surface-mount 

applications. 

DN-6820:A • 4/19/07 — Page 1 of 2

Power 

Ack/Step 

Alarm Trouble 

Power 

¡¢£¤¥¤¢¦¤§§¨§©¡¤¢ 

Silence 

Drill 

Hold 2 Sec. 

Reset 

Power 

Ack/Step 

Alarm 

Silence 

Trouble 

Drill 

Hold 2 Sec. 

Reset 

Ack/Step 

Alarm 

Silence 

Trouble 

Drill 

Hold 2 Sec. 

Reset 

FDU-80 TERMINAL MODE WIRING EXAMPLE 

Terminal Mode 

EIA-485 

(2-wires) 

24 VDC 

(2-wires) 

Up to 6,000 ft. (1828.8 m) between 

EACH DEVICE in the EIA-485 loop 

FDU-80 

FDU-80 

NOTES: 

6820diag.wmf 

NFS-320 

Up to 6,000 ft. (1828.8 m) 

back from last device 

to end of EIA-485 loop 

FDU-80 

Terminal Mode 

EIA-485 return 

¡¢£¤¥¤¢¦¤§§¨§©¡¤¢ 

(2-wires) 

1. EIA-485: Maximum of 6,000 feet (1828.8 m) cable length from FACP to FDU-80 annunciators and back to FACP (6,000 feet [1828.8 

m] total). Circuit is power-limited. 

2. Up to 32 FDU-80 annunciators may be used on the EIA-485 circuit. When multiple FDU-80s are used, certain panels will require 

additional power supplies (refer to panel documentation). 

3. Between each FDU-80 annunciator are four wires: a twisted-shielded pair for data communications and a pair for 24 VDC power. 

The return circuit only requires two wires for data communication supervision, wired from the last FDU-80 annunciator on the loop. 

4. On the AFP-300/400, software revision 3.62 or higher is 

¡¢£¤¥¤¢¦¤§§¨§©¡¤¢ 

required. 

MOUNTING TO BACKBOX(ES) 

The FDU-80 annunciators can be semi-flush-mounted in a three-gang electrical box with a minimum depth of 2.188" (5.556 cm) 

(NOTIFIER P/N 10103). 

The FDU-80 annunciators can be mounted in three gangable electrical switch boxes connected together. 

NOTE: Alternately, FDU-80 annunciators can be mounted to the SBB-3 surface backbox for surface-mount applications. 

Mounting 

Holes (4) 

FDU-80 Flange 

Power 

Alarm 

Trouble 

6820mnt.wmf 

Silence 

Drill 

Hold 2 Sec. 

 

Reset 

5.813" (14.764 cm) wide x 4" (10.16 

cm) high x minimum 2.188" (5.556 

cm) deep, three-gang electrical box 

(NOTIFIER P/N 10103, shown at right). 

©2008 by Honeywell International Inc. All rights reserved. Unauthorized use 

of this document is strictly prohibited. 

This document is not intended to be used for installation purposes. 

We try to keep our product information up-to-date and accurate. 

We cannot cover all specific applications or anticipate all requirements. 

All specifications are subject to change without notice. 

For more information, contact Notifier. Phone: (203) 484-7161, FAX: (203) 484-7118. 

www.notifier.com 

Made in the U.S. A. 

Page 2 of 2 — DN-6820:A • 4/19/07

InnovairFlex 

Intelligent Non-Relay Photoelectric 

Duct Smoke Detector 

dn-60429:b 

Intelligent Devices 

General 

The Notifier InnovairFlex DNR intelligent non-relay photoelectric 

duct smoke detector and DNRW watertight non-relay photoelectric 

duct smoke detector feature a pivoting housing that fits both 

square and rectangular footprints capable of mounting to a 

round or rectangular duct. 

DNRW duct smoke detector, with its NEMA-4 rating, is listed as 

a watertight, UV resistant enclosure providing protection against 

falling dirt, rain, and windblown dust, splashing and hose 

directed water, allowing operators to use the detector in the 

most extreme environments. 

These units sense smoke in the most challenging conditions, 

operating in airflow speeds of 100 to 4,000 feet per minute, temperatures 

of -4 degrees F to 158 degrees F, and a humidity 

range of 0 to 95 percent (non-condensing.) 

An improved cover design isolates the sensor head, which 

allows for ease of maintenance. A cover tamper feature indicates 

a trouble signal for a removed or improperly installed sensor 

cover. The Notifier InnovairFlex housing provides a 3/4-inch 

conduit knockout and ample space to facilitate easy wiring and 

mounting of a relay module. 

The Notifier InnovairFlex duct smoke detector can be customized 

to meet local codes and specifications without additional 

wiring. The new InnovairFlex product line is compatible with all 

previous Innovair models, including remote test accessories. 

Features 

• Photoelectric, integrated low-flow technology 

• Air velocity rating from 100 ft/min to 4,000 ft/min (0.5 m/s to 

20.32 m/s) 

• Versatile mounting options: square or rectangular configuration 

• Broad ranges for operating temperature (-4F to 158F) and 

humidity (0% to 95% non-condensing) 

• Patented sampling tube installs from front or back of the 

detector with no tools required 

• Cover tamper signal 

• Increased wiring space with a newly added 3/4” conduit 

knockout 

• Available space within housing to accommodate mounting of 

a relay module 

• Easily accessible code wheels on sensor head (sold separately) 

• Clear cover for convenient visual inspection 

• Remote testing capability 

• Requires com line power only 

• Accommodates the installation of an addressable relay module, 

sold separately, (FRM-1 or NC-100R) for applications 

requiring a Form-C relay 


Size: (Rectangle) 14.38 in (37 cm) Length; 5 in (12.7 cm) 

Width, 2.5 in (6.6 cm) Depth 

Size: (Square) 7.75 in (19.7 cm) Length; 9 in (22.9 cm) Width; 

2.5 in (6.35 cm) Depth 

Weight: 1.6 lb (0.73 kg) 

Operating Temperature Range: -4 degrees F to 158 degrees F 

(-20 degrees C to 70 degrees C) 

Storage Temperature Range: -22 degrees F to 158 degrees F 

(-30 degrees C to 70 degrees C) 

Operating Humidity Range: 0% to 95% relative humidity (noncondensing) 

Air Duct Velocity: 100 to 4,000 ft/min (0.5 to 20.32 m/s) 

Accessories 

Notifier provides system flexibility with a variety of accessories, 

including two remote test stations and different means of visible 

and audible system annunciation. As with our duct smoke detectors, 

all duct smoke detectors accessories are UL listed. 

DNR(W)s with a date code of 0013 or higher do not require 

external 24VDC for remote test applications when used with a 

remote-test-capable detector. 

ACCESSORY CURRENT LOADS AT 24 VDC 

Device Standby Alarm 

RA100Z 0mA 12 mA Max 

RTS151/ 

RTS151KEY 

0mA 

intelligent innovairflex.jpg 

12mA Max 

dn-60429:b • 03/12/10 — Page 1 of 2

SpectrAlert ® Advance 

Selectable Output 

Notification Appliances 

General 

System Sensor® SpectrAlert® Advance selectable-output 

horns, strobes and horn/strobes are rich with features guaranteed 

to cut installation times and maximize profits. The SpectrAlert 

Advance series of notification appliances is designed to 

simplify your installations, with features such as: plug-in 

designs, instant feedback messages to ensure correct installation 

of individual devices, and eleven field-selectable candela 

settings for wall and ceiling strobes and horn/strobes. 

More specifically, when installing Advance products, first 

attach a universal mounting plate to a four-inch square, fourinch 

octagon, or double-gang junction box. The two-wire 

mounting plate attaches to a single-gang junction box. 

Then, connect the notification appliance circuit wiring to the 

SEMS terminals on the mounting plate. 

Finally, attach the horn, strobe, or horn/strobe to the mounting 

plate by inserting the product’s tabs in the mounting plate’s 

grooves. The device will rotate into position, locking the product’s 

pins into the mounting plate’s terminals. The device will 

temporarily hold in place with a catch until it is secured with a 

captured mounting screw. 

SpectrAlert Advance products allow you to choose: 

• 12 or 24 volts. 

• 15, 15/75, 30, 75, 95, 110, 115, 135, 150, 177, or 185 candela 

by way of a rear-mounted slide switch and front viewing 

window. 

• Horn tones and volume by way of a rotary switch. 

• The SpectrAlert Advance series includes outdoor notification 

appliances. Outdoor strobes and horn/strobes (twowire 

and four-wire) are available for wall or ceiling. Outdoor 

horns are available for wall only. All System Sensor outdoor 

products are rated between –40°F and 151°F (–40°C and 

66°C) in wet or dry applications. 

Models available: 

• Indoor wall-mount: horn, strobe, 2-wire horn/strobe, 4-wire 

horn/strobe. 

• Indoor ceiling-mount: strobe, 2-wire horn/strobe, 4-wire 

horn/strobe. 

• Outdoor wall-mount: horn, strobe, 2-wire horn/strobe, 4- 

wire horn/strobe. 

• Outdoor ceiling-mount: strobe, 2-wire horn/strobe, 4-wire 

horn/strobe. 

Features 

• Plug-in design. 

• Same mounting plate for wall- and ceiling-mount units. 

• Shorting spring on mounting plate for continuity check 

before installation. 

• Captive mounting screw. 

• Tamper-resistance capability. 

• Field-selectable candela settings on wall and ceiling units: 

15, 15/75, 30, 75, 95, 110, 115, 135, 150, 177, 185. 

• Automatic selection of 12 or 24 volt operation at 15 and 15/ 

75 candela. 

• Outdoor wall and ceiling products. 

Indoor Ceiling 

Horn/Strobe 

Indoor Wall 

Horn/Strobe 

Indoor Wall 

Horn 

DN-7087:C1 

Audio/Visual Devices 

• Outdoor products rated from –40°F and 151°F (–40°C and 

66°C). 

• Outdoor products rainproof per UL50 (NEMA 3R) and 

weatherproof per NEMA 4X, IP56 

• Minimal intrusion into the backbox. 

• Horn rated at 88+ dbA at 16 volts. 

• Rotary switch for tone selection. 

• Three horn volume settings. 

• Electrically compatible with existing SpectrAlert products. 

Engineering Specifications 

7087pho1.jpg 

7087pho3.jpg 

7087pho5.jpg 

Outdoor Ceiling 

Strobe 

Indoor Ceiling 

Strobe 

Outdoor Wall 

Strobe 

SpectrAlert Advance horns, strobes, and horn/strobes shall 

mount to a standard 4.0" x 4.0" x 1.5" (10.16 x 10.16 x 3.81 

cm) backbox, 4.0" (10.16 cm) octagonal backbox, or a doublegang 

backbox. Two-wire products shall also mount to a singlegang 

2.0" x 4.0" x 1.875" (5.08 x 10.16 x 4.763 cm) backbox. A 

universal mounting plate shall be used for mounting ceiling 

and wall products. The notification appliance circuit wiring 

shall terminate at the universal mounting plate. Also, SpectrAlert 

Advance products, when used with the Sync•Circuit 

Module accessory, shall be powered from a non-coded notification 

appliance circuit output and shall operate on a nominal 

12 or 24 volts. When used with the Sync•Circuit Module, 12- 

volt rated notification appliance circuit outputs shall operate 

between 9 and 17.5 volts; 24-volt rated notification appliance 

circuit outputs shall operate between 17 and 33 volts. Indoor 

SpectrAlert Advance products shall operate between 32°F and 

120°F (0°C and 49°C) from a regulated DC, or full-wave-rectified, 

unfiltered power supply. Strobes and horn/strobes shall 

have field-selectable candela settings including 15, 15/75, 30, 

75, 95, 110, 115, 135, 150, 177, 185. 

7087pho6.jpg 

7087pho4.jpg 

7087pho2.jpg 

DN-7087:C1 • 11/9/11 — Page 1 of 4

STROBE 

The strobe shall be a System Sensor SpectrAlert Advance 

Model _______ listed to UL 1971 and shall be approved for fire 

protective service. The strobe shall be wired as a primary-signaling 

notification appliance and comply with the Americans 

with Disabilities Act requirements for visible signaling appliances, 

flashing at 1 Hz over the strobe’s entire operating voltage 

range. The strobe light shall consist of a xenon flash tube 

and associated lens/reflector system. 

HORN/STROBE COMBINATION 

The horn/strobe shall be a System Sensor SpectrAlert 

Advance Model _______ listed to UL 1971 and UL 464 and 

shall be approved for fire protective service. The horn/strobe 

shall be wired as a primary-signaling notification appliance 

and comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act requirements 

for visible signaling appliances, flashing at 1 Hz over the 

strobe’s entire operating voltage range. The strobe light shall 

consist of a xenon flash tube and associated lens/reflector system. 

The horn shall have three audibility options and an option 

to switch between a Temporal 3 pattern and a Non-Temporal 

(continuous) pattern. These options are set by a multiple position 

switch. On four-wire products, the strobe shall be powered 

independently of the sounder. The horn on horn/strobe models 

shall operate on a coded or non-coded power supply. 

OUTDOOR PRODUCTS 

SpectrAlert Advance outdoor horns, strobes and horn/strobes 

shall be listed for outdoor use by UL and shall operate 

between –40°F and 151°F (–40°C and 66°C). The products 

shall be listed for use with a System Sensor outdoor/weatherproof 

backbox with half-inch and three-fourths-inch conduit 

entries. 

SYNCHRONIZATION MODULE 

The module shall be a System Sensor Sync•Circuit MDL3R or 

MDL3W listed to UL 464 and shall be approved for fire protective 

service. The module shall synchronize SpectrAlert strobes 

at 1 Hz and horns at Temporal 3. Also, while operating the 

strobes, the module shall silence the horns on horn/strobe 

models over a single pair of wires. The module shall mount to 

a 4.688" x 4.688" x 2.125" (11.906 x 11.906 x 5.398 cm) backbox. 

The module shall also control two Style Y (class B) circuits 

or one Style Z (Class A) circuit. The module shall 

synchronize multiple zones. Daisy-chaining two or more synchronization 

modules together will synchronize all the zones 

they control. The module shall not operate on a coded power 

supply. 

Strobe Current Draw, 

UL Maximum (mA RMS) 

Candela 

Standard 

Candela 

Range 

High 

Candela 

Range 

8 – 17.5 V 16 – 33 V 

DC FWR DC FWR 

15 123 128 66 71 

15/75 142 148 77 81 

30 NA N/A 94 96 

75 NA NA 158 153 

95 NA NA 181 176 

110 NA NA 202 195 

115 NA NA 210 205 

135 NA NA 228 207 

150 NA NA 246 220 

177 NA NA 281 251 

185 NA NA 286 258 

Operating Specifications 

• Standard operating temperature: 32°F to 120°F (0°C to 

49°C). 

• K Series operating temperature: –40°F to 151°F (–40°C 

to 66°C). 

• Humidity range: 10% to 93% non-condensing (indoor 

products). 

• Strobe flash rate: 1 flash per second. 

• Nominal voltage: regulated 12 VDC/FWR or regulated 24 

VDC/FWR. NOTE: Full Wave Rectified (FWR) voltage is a 

non-regulated, time-varying power source that is used on 

some power supply and panel outputs. 

• Operating voltage range: 8 V to 17.5 V (12 V nominal); or 

16 V to 33 V (24 V nominal). NOTE: P, S, PC, and SC products 

will operate at 12 V nominal only for 15 cd and 15/75 

cd. 

• Input terminal wire gauge: 12 to 18 AWG (3.31 to 0.821 

mm²). 

• Ceiling-mount dimensions (including lens): 6.8" diameter 

x 2.5" deep (17.3 cm diameter x 6.4 cm deep). 

• Wall-mount dimensions (including lens): 5.6" H x 4.7" W 

x 2.5" D (14.2 cm H x 11.9 cm W x 6.4 cm D). 

• Horn dimensions: 5.6" H x 4.7" W x 1.3" D (14.2 cm H x 

11.9 cm W x 3.3 cm D). 

Agency Listings and Approvals 

The listings and approvals below apply to SpectrAlert Advance 

Selectable Output Notification Devices. In some cases, certain 

modules may not be listed by certain approval agencies, or 

listing may be in process. Consult factory for latest listing status. 

• UL Listed: S4011 (HR__, HW__, P2__, P4__, PC2__, 

PC4__ models); S5512 (models SCR, SCRH, SCW, 

SCWH, SR, SRH, SW, SWH); S3593 (SCRHK, SCRK, 

SRHK, SRK). 

• ULC Listed: S4011 (HRA, HRKA); S5512 (typically “A” 

models, with exception of outdoor strobes). See Canadian 

data sheet for listings and specifications. 

• FM approved 

• MEA: 452-05-E 

• CSFM: 7125-1653:0186 (SCR, SCRH, SCW, SCWH, SR, 

SRH, SW, SWH); 7300-1653:0188 (P2_, P4_, PC2_, PC4_ 

modules); 7135-1653:0189 (HR, HRK, HW); 7300- 

1653:0187 (SCRHK, SCRK, SRHK, SRK). 

Horn Current Draw, 

UL Maximum (mA RMS) 

Sound 

Pattern 

dB 

8 – 17.5 V 16 – 33 V 

DC FWR DC FWR 

Temporal High 57 55 69 75 

Temporal Medium 44 49 58 69 

Temporal Low 38 44 44 48 

Non-temporal High 57 56 69 75 

Non-temporal Medium 42 50 60 69 

Non-temporal Low 41 44 50 50 

Coded High 57 55 69 75 

Coded Medium 44 51 56 69 

Coded Low 40 46 52 50 

Page 2 of 4 — DN-7087:C1 • 11/9/11

Horn and Horn/Strobe 

Rotary Switch Setting 

Setting Repetition Rate dB Level 

1 Temporal horn High 

2 Temporal horn Medium 

3 Temporal horn Low 

4 Normal horn High 

5 Normal horn Medium 

6 Normal horn Low 

7* Externally coded High 

8* Externally coded Medium 

9* Externally coded Low 

*NOTE: Settings 7, 8, and 9 are not available 

on 2-wire horn/strobe. 

Horn and Horn/Strobe Output (dBA) 

Switch 

Position 

Sound 

Pattern 

dB 

8 – 17.5 V 16 – 33 V 

DC 

FW R 

DC 

1 Temporal High 78 78 84 84 

2 Temporal Medium 74 74 80 80 

3 Temporal Low 71 73 76 76 

4 Non-temporal High 82 82 88 88 

5 Non-temporal Medium 78 78 85 85 

6 Non-temporal Low 75 75 81 81 

7* Coded High 82 82 88 88 

8* Coded Medium 78 78 85 85 

9* Coded Low 75 75 81 81 

*NOTE: Settings 7, 8, and 9 are not available on 2-wire horn/strobe. 

FW 

R 

Two-Wire Horn/Strobe, STANDARD Candela Range (15 – 115 cd), 

UL Maximum Current Draw (mA RMS) 

Input, Sound Pattern, dB 

Level 

8 – 17.5 V 16 – 33 V 

15 15/75 15 15/75 30 75 95 110 115 

DC Input, Temporal, High 137 147 79 90 107 176 194 212 218 

DC Input, Temporal, Medium 132 144 69 80 97 157 182 201 210 

DC Input, Temporal, Low 132 143 66 77 93 154 179 198 207 

DC Input, Non-temporal, High 141 152 91 100 116 176 201 221 229 

DC Input, Non-temporal, Medium 133 145 75 85 102 163 187 207 216 

DC Input, Non-temporal, Low 131 144 68 79 96 156 182 201 210 

FWR Input, Temporal, High 136 155 88 97 112 168 190 210 218 

FWR Input, Temporal, Medium 129 152 78 88 103 160 184 202 206 

FWR Input, Temporal, Low 129 151 76 86 101 160 184 194 201 

FWR Input, Non-temporal, High 142 161 103 112 126 181 203 221 229 

FWR Input, Non-temporal, Medium 134 155 85 95 110 166 189 208 216 

FWR Input, Non-temporal, Low 132 154 80 90 105 161 184 202 211 

Two-Wire Horn/Strobe, HIGH Candela Range (135 – 185 cd), 

UL Maximum Current Draw (mA RMS) 

DC Input 

16 – 33 V 

16 – 33 V 

FWR Input 

135 150 177 185 135 150 177 185 

DC, Temporal, High 245 259 290 297 FWR, Temporal, High 215 231 258 265 

DC, Temporal, Medium 235 253 288 297 FWR, Temporal, Medium 209 224 250 258 

DC, Temporal, Low 232 251 282 292 FWR, Temporal, Low 207 221 248 256 

DC, Non-temporal, High 255 270 303 309 FWR, Non-temporal, High 233 248 275 281 

DC, Non-temporal, Medium 242 259 293 299 FWR, Non-temporal, Medium 219 232 262 267 

DC, Non-temporal, Low 238 254 291 295 FWR, Non-temporal, Low 214 229 256 262 

4.7” 

6.8” 

7087dim12009.tif 

5.6” 

2.5 

2.5” 

DN-7087:C1 • 11/9/11 — Page 3 of 4

Ordering Information 

Model Description Model Description 

WALL HORN/STROBES 

CEILING HORN/STROBES 

P2R 2-wire horn/strobe, standard cd, red. PC2R 2-wire horn/strobe, standard cd, red. 

P2RH 2-wire horn/strobe, high cd, red. PC2RH 2-wire horn/strobe, high cd, red. 

P2RK 2-wire horn/strobe, standard cd, red, outdoor. PC2RK 2-wire horn/strobe, standard cd, red, outdoor. 

P2RHK 2-wire horn/strobe, high cd, red, outdoor. PC2RHK 2-wire horn/strobe, high cd, red, outdoor. 

P2W 2-wire horn/strobe, standard cd, white. PC2W 2-wire horn/strobe, standard cd, white. 

P2WH 2-wire horn/strobe, high cd, white. PC2WH 2-wire horn/strobe, high cd, white. 

P4R 4-wire horn/strobe, standard cd, red. PC4R 4-wire horn/strobe, standard cd, red. 

P4RH 4-wire horn/strobe, high cd, red. PC4RH 4-wire horn/strobe, high cd, red. 

P4RK 4-wire horn/strobe, standard cd, red, outdoor. PC4RK 4-wire horn/strobe, standard cd, red, outdoor. 

P4RHK 4-wire horn/strobe, high cd, red, outdoor. PC4RHK 4-wire horn/strobe, high cd, red, outdoor. 

P4W 4-wire horn/strobe, standard cd, white. PC4W 4-wire horn/strobe, standard cd, white. 

P4WH 4-wire horn/strobe, high cd, white. PC4WH 4-wire horn/strobe, high cd, white. 

WALL STROBES 

CEILING STROBES 

SR Strobe, standard cd, red. SCR Strobe, standard cd, red. 

SRH Strobe, high cd, red. SCRH Strobe, high cd, red. 

SRK Strobe, standard cd, red, outdoor. SCRK Strobe, standard cd, red, outdoor. 

SRHK Strobe, high cd, red, outdoor. SCRHK Strobe, high cd, red, outdoor. 

SW Strobe, standard cd, white. SCW Strobe, standard cd, white. 

SWH Strobe, high cd, white. SCWH Strobe, high cd, white. 

ACCESSORIES 

HORNS 

BBS-2A Backbox skirt, wall, red. HR Horn, red. 

BBSW-2A Backbox skirt, wall, white. HRK Horn, red, outdoor. 

BBSC-2A Backbox skirt, ceiling, red. HW Horn, white. 

BBSCW-2A Backbox skirt, ceiling, white. ACCESSORIES, continued 

SA-WBB Weatherproof backbox, wall. TR-HS Trim Ring, wall, red, package of 5 

SA-WBBC Weatherproof backbox, ceiling. TRW-HS Trim Ring, wall, white, package of 5 

WTP Weatherproof, flush mount plate, red TRC-HS Trim Ring, ceiling, red, package of 5 

WTPW Weatherproof, flush mount plate, white TRCW-HS Trim Ring, ceiling, white, package of 5 

NOTE: “High cd” refers to strobes that include 135, 150, 177, and 185 candela settings. “Standard cd” refers to strobes that 

include 15, 15/75, 30, 75, 95, 110, and 115 candela settings. 

NOTE: For strobes and horn/strobes, add suffix “F” for French or “B” for Bilingual. 

NOTE: All outdoor models (“K(A)” suffix) include a plastic weatherproof backbox. 

NOTE: Add “-R” to models for weatherproof replacement device (no back box included). Only for use with weatherproof outdoor 

flush mounting plate, WTP and WTPW. 

NOTE: Add “P” to model for plain housing. (No “FIRE” marking on cover.) 

Sync•Circuit is a trademark and NOTIFIER® and SpectrAlert® are 

registered trademarks of Honeywell International Inc. 



Page 4 of 4 — DN-7087:C1 • 11/9/11 






www.notifier.com

NFS-640 

Intelligent Addressable 

Fire Alarm System 

DN-6856:A • A-30 

Intelligent Fire Alarm Control Panels 

General 

The NFS-640 intelligent Fire Alarm Control Panel is part of the 

ONYX® Series of Fire Alarm Controls from NOTIFIER. 

As a stand-alone small-to-large system, or as a large network, 

the ONYX® Series of products meets virtually every application 

requirement. 

Designed with modularity and for ease of system planning, the 

NFS-640 can be configured with just a few devices for small 

building applications, or for a large campus or high-rise application. 

Simply add additional peripheral equipment to suit the 

application. 

Features 

• One, expandable to two, isolated intelligent Signaling Line 

Circuit (SLC) Style 4, 6 or 7. 

• Up to 159 detectors (any mix of ion, photo, thermal, or multisensor) 

and 159 modules (N.O. manual stations, two-wire 

smoke, notification, or relay) per SLC. 318 devices per loop/ 

636 per FACP or network node. 

• Standard 80-character display, 640-character large display, 

or display-less (a node on a network). 

• Network option – 103 nodes supported (NFS-640, NCA Network 

Annunciator, or NCS Network Control Station) using 

wire or fiber-optic connections. 

• 6.0 amp switch mode power supply with four Class A/B builtin 

Notification Appliance Circuits (NAC). Selectable System 

Sensor strobe synchronization. 

• Built-in Alarm, Trouble, and Supervisory relays. 

• Up to 64 output circuits per FACP or network node; circuits 

configurable online. 

• VeriFire® Tools offline program option. Sort Maintenance 

Reports by compensation value (dirty detector), peak alarm 

value, or address. 

• Autoprogramming and Walk Test reports. 

• Optional universal 636-point DACT. 

• 80-character remote annunciators (up to 32). 

• EIA-485 annunciators, including custom graphics. 

• Printer interface (80-column and 40-column printers). 

• History file with 800-event capacity in nonvolatile memory, 

plus separate 200-event alarm-only file. 

• Alarm Verification selection per point, with tally. 

• Autoprogramming and Walk Test reports. 

• Positive Alarm Sequence (PAS) Presignal. 

• Silence inhibit and Auto Silence timer options. 

• March time / temporal / California two-stage coding / strobe 

synchronization. 

• Field-programmable on panel or on PC, with VeriFire® Tools 

program check, compare, simulate. 

• Full QWERTY keypad. 

• Charger for up to 90 hours of standby power. 

• Non-alarm points for lower priority functions. 

• Remote ACK/Signal Silence/System Reset/Drill via monitor 

modules. 

• Automatic time control functions, with holiday exceptions. 

• Surface Mount Technology (SMT) electronics. 

• Extensive, built-in transient protection. 

NFS-640 shown in CAB-B4 with 

NCA 640-character display. 

• Powerful Boolean logic equations. 

NCA 640-CHARACTER DISPLAY FEATURES: 

• Backlit, 640-character display. 

• Supports SCS Series smoke control system in both HVAC or 

FSCS modes (not UL-Listed for FSCS). 

• Printer and CRT EIA-232 ports. 

• EIA-485 annunciator and terminal mode ports. 

• Alarm, Trouble, Supervisory, and Security relays. 

FLASHSCAN® INTELLIGENT FEATURES: 

• Poll 318 devices in less than two seconds. 

• Activate up to 159 outputs in less than five seconds. 

• Multicolor LEDs blink device address during Walk Test. 

• Fully digital, high-precision protocol (U.S. Patent 5,539,389). 

• Manual sensitivity adjustment — nine levels. 

• Pre-alarm intelligent sensing — nine levels. 

• Day/Night automatic sensitivity adjustment. 

• Sensitivity windows: 

–Ion– 0.5 to 2.5%/foot obscuration. 

–Photo– 0.5 to 2.35%/foot obscuration. 

– Laser (VIEW®) – 0.02 to 2.0%/foot obscuration. 

– Acclimate Plus – 0.5 to 4.0%/foot obscuration. 

–HARSH– 0.5 to 2.35%/foot obscuration. 

• Drift compensation (U.S. Patent 5,764,142). 

• Degraded mode — in the unlikely event that the CPU-640 

microprocessor fails, FlashScan® detectors revert to 

degraded operation and can activate the CPU-640 NAC circuits 

and alarm relay. Each of the four built-in panel circuits 

includes a Disable/Enable switch for this feature. 

DN-6856:A • 12/01/06 — Page 1 of 9

• Multi-detector algorithm involves nearby detectors in alarm 

decision (U.S. Patent 5,627,515). 

• Automatic detector sensitivity testing. 

• Maintenance alert (two levels). 

• Self-optimizing pre-alarm. 

VIEW® (VERY INTELLIGENT EARLY WARNING) 

SMOKE DETECTION TECHNOLOGY: 

• Revolutionary spot laser design. 

• Advanced intelligent sensing algorithms differentiate between 

smoke and non-smoke signals (U.S. Patent 5,831,524). 

• Addressable operation pinpoints the fire location. 

• No moving parts to fail or filters to change. 

• Early warning performance comparable to the best aspiration 

systems at a fraction of the lifetime cost. 

ACCLIMATE PLUS 

LOW-PROFILE INTELLIGENT MULTI-SENSOR: 

• Detector automatically adjusts sensitivity levels without operator 

intervention or programming. Sensitivity increases with 

heat. 

• Microprocessor-based technology; combination photo and 

thermal technology. 

• FlashScan® or classic mode compatible with NFS-640. 

• Low-temperature warning signal at 40°F ± 5°F (4.44°C ± 

2.77°C). 

HARSH HOSTILE-AREA SMOKE HEAD: 

• Provides early warning of smoke detection in environment 

where traditional smoke detectors are not practical. 

• The detector's filters remove particulates down to 30 microns 

in size. 

• Intake fan draws air into photo chamber, while airborne particles 

and water mist are removed. 

• Requires auxiliary 24 VDC from system or remote power 

supply. 

RELEASING FEATURES: 

• Ten independent hazards. 

• Sophisticated cross-zone (three options). 

• Delay timer and Discharge timers (adjustable). 

• Abort (four options). 

• Low-pressure CO 2 listed. 

VOICE AND TELEPHONE FEATURES: 

• Solid state message generation. 

• Hard-wired voice control module options. 

• Firefighter telephone option. 

• 30- to 120-watt high-efficiency amplifiers (AA Series). 

• Backup tone generator and amplifier option. 

• Multichannel voice transponder (XPIQ). 

HIGH-EFFICIENCY OFFLINE SWITCHING 

3.0 AMP POWER SUPPLY (6.0 A IN ALARM): 

• 120 or 220/240 VAC. 

• Displays battery current/voltage on panel (with display). 

FlashScan® 

Exclusive World-Leading Detector Protocol 

At the heart of the NFS-640 is a set of detection devices and 

device protocol — FlashScan® (U.S. Patent 5,539,389). Flash- 

Scan® is an all-digital protocol that gives superior precision and 

high noise immunity. 

In addition to providing quick identification of an active input 

device, this protocol can also activate many output devices in a 

fraction of the time required by competitive protocols. This high 

Sample 

System 

Options 

Page 2 of 9 — DN-6856:A • 12/01/06

speed also allows the NFS-640 to have the largest device per 

loop capacity in the industry — 318 points — yet every input and 

output device is sampled in less than two seconds. The microprocessor-based 

FlashScan® detectors have bicolor LEDs that 

can be coded to provide diagnostic information, such as device 

address during Walk Test. 

Intelligent Sensing 

Intelligent sensing is a set of software algorithms that provide 

the NFS-640 with industry-leading smoke detection capability. 

These complex algorithms require many calculations on each 

reading of each detector, and are made possible by the veryhigh-speed 

microcomputer used by the NFS-640. 

Drift Compensation and Smoothing: Drift compensation 

allows the detector to retain its original ability to detect actual 

smoke, and resist false alarms, even as dirt accumulates. It 

reduces maintenance requirements by allowing the system to 

automatically perform the periodic sensitivity measurements 

required by NFPA 72. Smoothing filters are also provided by 

software to remove transient noise signals, such as those 

caused by electrical interference. 

Maintenance Warnings: When the drift compensation performed 

for a detector reaches a certain level, the performance of 

the detector may be compromised, and special warnings are 

given. There are three warning levels: (1) Low Chamber value, 

usually indicative of a hardware problem in the detector; (2) 

Maintenance Alert, indicative of dust accumulation that is near 

but below the allowed limit; (3) Maintenance Urgent, indicative of 

dust accumulation above the allowed limit. 

Sensitivity Adjust: Nine sensitivity levels are provided for 

alarm detection. These levels can be set manually, or can 

change automatically between day and night. Nine levels of prealarm 

sensitivity can also be selected, based on predetermined 

levels of alarm. Pre-alarm operation can be latching or selfrestoring, 

and can be used to activate special control functions. 

Self-Optimizing Pre-Alarm: Each detector may be set for 

“Self-Optimizing” pre-alarm. In this special mode, the detector 

“learns” its normal environment, measuring the peak analog 

readings over a long period of time, and setting the pre-alarm 

level just above these normal peaks. 

Cooperating Multi-Detector Sensing: A patented feature of 

this intelligent sensing is the ability of a smoke sensor to consider 

readings from nearby sensors in making alarm or prealarm 

decisions. Without statistical sacrifice in the ability to 

resist false alarms, it allows a sensor to increase its sensitivity to 

actual smoke by a factor of almost two to one. 

Field Programming Options 

Autoprogram is a timesaving feature of the NFS-640. It is a 

special software routine that allows the NFS-640 to “learn” what 

devices are physically connected and automatically load them in 

the program with default values for all parameters. Requiring 

less than one minute to run, this routine allows the user to have 

almost immediate fire protection in a new installation, even if 

only a portion of the detectors are installed. 

Keypad Program Edit (with KDM-2) The NFS-640, like all 

NOTIFIER intelligent panels, has the exclusive feature of program 

creation and editing capability from the front panel keypad, 

while continuing to provide fire protection. The architecture 

of the NFS-640 software is such that each point entry carries its 

own program, including control-by-event links to other points. 

This allows the program to be entered with independent perpoint 

segments, while the NFS-640 simultaneously monitors 

other (already installed) points for alarm conditions. 

VeriFire® Tools is an offline programming and test utility that 

can greatly reduce installation programming time, and increase 

confidence in the site-specific software. It is Windows® based 

and provides technologically advanced capabilities to aid the 

installer. The installer may create the entire program for the 

NFS-640 in the comfort of the office, test it, store a backup file, 

then bring it to the site and download from a laptop into the 

panel. 

ENTER PROG OR STAT PASSWORD, THEN ENTER 

***** 

0=CLR 1= AUTO 2=POINT 3=PASSWORD 4=MESSAGE 

Above: Keypad program editing. 

Below: Autoprogram function. 

AUTOPROGRAM PLEASE WAIT 

L1:80 DETS, 15 MODS L2:93 DETS, 35 MODS 

PANEL OUTPUTS:24 BELLS: 04 

VeriFire ToolsSystem Programming screen 

DN-6856:A • 12/01/06 — Page 3 of 9

TOP, LEFT to RIGHT: J8 Zone Code Input; TB7 DC Power (24 VDC power-limited, both resettable and non-resettable available); TB8 

Alarm Relay; TB9 Trouble Relay; TB10 Supervisory Relay; TB11 Security Relay; SW1, SW5 Relay Switches; JP13 General Board 

Earth Fault Jumper; TB12 EIA-485 Terminal Mode (supervised); TB13 EIA-485 ACS Mode (supervised); TB14 EIA-232 Printer; TB15 

EIA-232 PC Terminal; J1 NUP (network/service connection: power-limited, supervised); TB16 SLC #1 Connections (detectors, 

modules; supervised); D55 Main SLC Ground Fault LED; JP7 Charger Disable Jumper; JP12 200MA Jumper; JP6 Earth Fault Jumper 

(SLC #1). 

CPU-640 shown with 

KDM-2 Display 

LEFT SIDE, TOP to BOTTOM: TB6 NAC #1, TB5 NAC #2, TB4 NAC #3, TB3 NAC #4 (all NAC circuits power-limited and supervised, 

and each NAC TB has an NAC LED to the right of it); J7 Accessory Power; Disable/Enable Switches for Degraded Mode; TB2 AC 

Power Connection; TB1 Battery Connection (overcurrent protected). BOTTOM, LEFT to RIGHT: D54 AC On LED; System Status 

Indicator LEDs for “No-Keyboard Operation”; System Switches SW2 (Acknowledge), SW3 (Silence), SW4 (Reset) for “No-Keyboard 

Operation”; J4 KDM-2 Connector; J5, J6 Panel Circuits (ONYX® Panel Output Modules, supervised); D72 General Board Ground Fault 

LED; J10 Security Tamper Switch; J11 Auxiliary Trouble Input; D82 AC Power LED; J3 LEM-320 Connector (SLC Loop #2). 

Network Diagram 

NCS 

NFS-640 

NFS-640 

NCS 

NCA 

Page 4 of 9 — DN-6856:A • 12/01/06

Placement of Equipment 

in Chassis and Cabinet 

The following guidelines outline the NFS-640’s flexible system 

design. 

Rows: The first row of equipment in the cabinet mounts in 

chassis CHS-M2. Mount the second, third, or fourth rows of 

equipment in chassis CHS-4MB (see NFS-640 Installation Manual 

regarding panel output modules) or CHS-4L (for voice components, 

see Voice Alarm System Manual). 

Wiring: When designing the cabinet layout, consider separation 

of power-limited and non-power-limited wiring as discussed 

in the NFS-640 Installation Manual. 

Positions: A chassis offers four basic side-by-side positions for 

components; the number of modules that can be mounted in 

each position depends on the chassis model and the size of the 

individual module. There are a variety of standoffs and hardware 

items available for different combinations and configurations of 

components. 

It is critical that all mounting holes of the NFS-640 are secured 

with a screw or standoff to ensure continuity of Earth Ground. 

Layers: The CHS-M2 accepts four layers of equipment, including 

the control panel. The CPU-640 fills three positions (left to 

right) in the first-installed layer (the back of the chassis); its integral 

power supply occupies (the left) two positions in the next 

two layers; the optional display occupies (the left) two positions 

at the front, flush with the door. Panel output modules can be 

mounted in several layers with standoffs or an L-bracket as 

required. Some equipment, such as the NCA, may be doormounted 

directly in front of the control panel. The NCA mounts 

onto the DP-DISP or ADP-4B. The NCA can be used as a primary 

display for the NFS-640 by directly connecting their network 

ports (required in Canadian stand-alone applications). 

Expansion: Installing an LEM-320 Loop Expander Module 

adds a second SLC loop to the control panel. The LEM-320 is 

mounted onto the CPU-640, occupying the middle-right, second 

(back) slot on the chassis. If networking two or more control 

panels, each unit requires a NCM-W (wire) or NCM-F (fiber) 

Network Control Module. The NCM-W/-F can be installed in any 

panel output module position (see manual); the default position 

is at the back of the chassis next to the control panel. Option 

boards can be mounted in front of the LEM-320 or NCM modules; 

for ease of access, complete installation of those devices 

before mounting another layer. 

KDM-2 Controls and Indicators 

Program Keypad: QWERTY type (keyboard layout). 

8 LED indicators: Power; Fire Alarm; Pre-Alarm; Security; 

Supervisory; System Trouble; Signals Silenced; Points Disabled. 

Membrane Switch Controls: Acknowledge/Scroll Display; 

Signal Silence; Drill; System Reset; Lamp Test. 

LCD Display: 80 characters (2 x 40) with long-life LED backlight. 

Configuration Guidelines 

Stand-alone and network systems require a main display. On 

single-CPU systems (one CPU-640/-640E), display options are 

the KDM-2 or the NCA. On network systems (two or more CPU- 

640/-640Es), at least one NCA or NCS annunciation device is 

required. Other options listed as follows: 

KDM-2: 80-character backlit LCD display with QWERTY programming 

and control keypad. Order two BMP-1 blank modules 

and DP-DISP mounting plate separately. Requires top row of a 

cabinet. Required for each stand-alone 80-character display 

system. The KDM-2 may mount in network nodes to display 

“local” node information as long as at least one NCA or NCS 

network display is on the system to display network information. 

NCA: Network Control Annunciator, 640 characters. On single 

CPU-640/-640E systems, the NCA is the Primary Display for the 

panel and connects directly to the CPU-640/-640E. On network 

systems (two or more CPU-640/-640Es), one network display 

(either NCA or NCS) is required for every system. On network 

systems, the NCA connects (and requires) an NCM network 

communications module. Mounts in a row of FACP node or in 

two annunciator positions. Mounting options include the DP- 

DISP, ADP-4B, or in an annunciator box, such as the ABS-2D. In 

CAB-4 top-row applications, a DP-DISP and two BMP-1 blank 

modules are required for mounting. See NCA data sheet DN- 

6858. 

CPU-640: Central processing unit with integral 3.0 amp (6.0 A 

in alarm) power supply for an NFS-640 system. Includes CPU; 

one Signaling Line Circuit expandable to two; installation, programming 

and operating manuals. Order one per system or as 

necessary (up to 103 network nodes) on a network system. 

CPU-640E: Same as CPU-640 but requires 220 VAC, 1.5 amp, 

(3.0 A in alarm). 

CPU-640 

KDM-2 shown with dress 

plate, or NCA at front, flush 

with door. 

DN-6856:A • 12/01/06 — Page 5 of 9

CHS-M2: Mounting chassis for CPU-640. One required for 

each CPU-640/-640E. 

DP-DISP: Dress panel for top row in cabinet with CPU-640/- 

640E installed. 

BMP-1: Blank module for unused module positions. 

System Modules 

The NFS-640 includes the ability to communicate with up to 

eight conventional modules each with up to eight circuits. Any 

mix of notification, relay, speaker, or telephone may be used. 

Choose any combination of up to eight output modules: ICM/ 

ICE, CRM/CRE, DCM-4 or VCM/VCE. Panel modules mount on 

either: the two far-right positions of the DP-DISP (next to the primary 

display); or on any of the four positions on the CHS-4N 

chassis (CHS-4MN kit required). 

NOTES: 1) These modules/expanders are NOT to be used for 

releasing applications. 2) For additional information on these panel 

output modules and expanders, see data sheet DN-6859. 

CHS-4MB: Expansion Chassis. Mounts up to four modules. 

Includes CHS-4N, MP-1B (Module Dress Panel), and Expander 

Ribbon Cable. 

ICM-4RK: Notification Appliance Circuit Module, provides four 

Style Y (Class B) or Style Z (Class A) alarm Notification Appliance 

Circuits. Maximum signaling current is 3.0 amps per circuit 

or 6.0 amps per module, subject to power supply limitations 

(includes auxiliary power harness, ELRs and slide-in labels). 

Includes ON/OFF controls and ON/OFF LEDs. 

ICE-4: Notification Appliance Circuit Expander, expands ICM-4 

to provide a total of eight Style Y or Style Z alarm Notification 

Appliance Circuits. Circuit ratings are same as ICM-4. 

NOTE: Maximum of one per ICM-4RK. May also be used to add 

four Notification Appliance Circuits to VCM-4. 

CRM-4RK: Control Relay Module, four Form-C relay contacts, 

rated at 5.0 A, 120 VAC or 28 VDC (resistive) per circuit. 

Includes manual ON/OFF controls and LEDs. 

CRE-4: Control Relay Expander, expands CRM-4 to provide a 

total of eight Form-C relay contacts. Note: maximum of one per 

CRM-4RK. May also be connected to add four relays to ICM-4, 

TCM-2, TCM-4, or VCM-4. 

VCM-4RK: Voice Control Module provides four Style Y (25 and 

70 Vrms) and Style Z (25 Vrms only) speaker circuits, eight 

manual select switches and indicators, slide-in labels, and plugin 

terminal blocks. Move jumper to convert to telephone circuits 

with remote ring signal and local call-in flash. May be expanded 

to eight circuits with VCE-4, ICE-4, or CRE-4. 

VCE-4: Voice Control Expander adds four circuits to VCM-4. 

Note: VCM-4/ VCE-4 combination must be eight speaker or 

eight phone circuits. 

DCM-4RK: Dual Channel Module pro-vides four Class B (Style 

Y, 25 & 70 Vrms) or Class A (Style Z, 25 Vrms only) speaker circuits 

plus four channel A/B select relays. Not expandable. 

OTHER OPTION MODULES 

ARM-4: Auxiliary Relay Module, four Form-C relays controlled 

by a relay module (CRM-4 or CRE-4). N.O. contacts rated 20 

amps; N.C. contacts rated 10 amps at 125 VAC and 30 VDC. 

NOTE: Maximum of one for each CRM-4 or CRE-4. 

VCC-1B: Voice Control Center. Provides a variety of userselectable 

tones on a single channel. Up to two different tones 

or messages may be selected on a single channel. Also provides 

optional digital voice message capability and on-site programmable 

voice messages. Includes Audio Message 

Generator (AMG-1) microphone, cables, dress panels, and 

instructions. 

VTCC-1B: Voice/Telephone Control Center. Provides all that 

the VCC-1 provides plus two-way Fire Fighters Telephone (FFT- 

7) capability. 

TCC-1B: Telephone Control Center. Provides a stand-alone 

two-way Fire Fighters telephone (FFT-7S). 

Includes cables, dress panel and instructions. 

RM-1/RM-1SA: Remote microphone assemblies, mount on 

ADP-4 (RM-1) dress panel or CAB-RM/-RMR (RM-1SA) standalone 

cabinets. See DN-6728. 

AMG-E: Audio Message Generator (without microphone). 

Order in addition to VCC-1 or VTCC-1 if two-channel system is 

required. 

FFT-7/FFT-7S: Fire Fighters Telephone control with master 

handset. 

FTM-1: Firephone Control Module connects a remote firefighter 

telephone to a centralized telephone console. Reports status to 

panel. Wiring to jacks and handsets is supervised. 

AA-30: Audio Amplifier, 30 watts. Switch-mode power. Includes 

amplifier and audio input supervision, backup input, and automatic 

switchover, power supply, cables. See AA Series data 

sheet, DN-3224. 

AA-120/AA-100: Audio Amplifier provides up to 120 watts of 25 

Vrms audio power for the NFS-640. The amplifier contains an 

integral chassis for mounting to a CAB-B4, -C4, or -D4 backbox 

(consumes one row). Switch-mode power. Includes audio input 

and amplified output supervision, backup input, and automatic 

switchover to backup tone. Order the AA-100 for 70.7 Vrms systems 

and 100 watts of power. See AA Series data sheet, DN- 

3224. 

VROM-(n): Factory-programmed message for installation in 

AMG-1. Provides up to 24 seconds of evacuation message on 

nonvolatile memory chip. Choose one of many standard messages 

available. Up to two of these messages may be installed 

in one AMG. Includes VROM, instructions for installation and 

operation, and written text of message. See VROM data sheet, 

DN-3576. 

VRAM-1: Field-programmed memory to be installed in AMG-1. 

Provides up to 24 seconds of field-programmable evacuation 

message on nonvolatile memory chip. Message is programmed 

from microphone or cassette tape. Up to two of these nonvolatile 

memory chips may be installed in one AMG. Includes VRAM 

and instructions for installation and operation. 

APS-6R: Auxiliary Power Supply (expander). Provides up to 6.0 

amperes of regulated power for compatible Notification appliance 

circuits. Includes battery input and transfer relay, and overcurrent 

protection. Mounts on one of four positions on a CHS-4L 

or CHS-4 chassis. See APS-6R data sheet, DN-5952. 

ACPS-2406: 6.0 amp addressable charger power supply. See 

ACPS-2406 data sheet, DN-6834. 

FCPS-24: The FCPS-24 is a remote six-amp (four-amp continuous) 

repeater/power supply. See FCPS-24 data sheet, DN- 

5132. 

FCPS-24S6/-24S8: Remote six-amp and eight-amp power supplies 

with battery charger. See FCPS-24S6/-24S8 datasheet, 

DN-6927. 

UZC-256: Programmable Universal Zone Coder provides positive 

non-interfering successive zone coding. Microprocessorcontrolled, 

field-programmable from IBM®-compatible PCs 

(requires optional programming kit). See UZC-256 data sheet, 

DN-3404. 

LCD-80/LCD-80TM/FDU-80: 80-character, backlit LCD display. 

Mounts up to 6,000 ft. (1828.8 m) from panel. Up to 32 per 

NFS-640. See LCD-80/-80TM (DN-3198) and FDU-80 (DN- 

6820) data sheets. 

ACS: Annunciator Control Modules ACM-16AT, AEM-16AT, 

ACM-32A, and AEM-32A. See data sheets, DN-0524 and DN- 

6862.. 

Page 6 of 9 — DN-6856:A • 12/01/06

AFM: Annunciator Fixed Modules AFM-16A, AFM-16AT, and 

AFM-32A. See AFM data sheet, DN-0056. 

LDM: Lamp Driver Modules LDM-32, LDM-E32, and LDM-R32. 

See LDM data sheet, DN-0551. 

ACM-8R: Remote Relay Module with eight Form-C contacts. 

Can be located up to 6,000 ft. (1828.8 m) from panel on four 

wires. See ACM-8R data sheet, DN-3558. 

SCS: Smoke control station; eight (expandable to 16) circuits. 

See SCS data sheet, DN-4818. 

RPT-485: Repeats EIA-485 over twisted pair or converts to 

fiber-optic medium. See RPT data sheet, DN-4737. 

XP5: The XP5-M and XP5-C provide FlashScan® transponder 

points. See XP5 data sheet, DN-6625. 

XP: The XP Series Transponder provides conventional monitor 

and control points (CLIP mode only). See XP Series data sheet, 

DN-0759. 

XPIQ: The XPIQ quad intelligent voice transponder for distributed 

multichannel voice evacuation systems, an integrated 

audio amplification and distribution subsystem controlled by 

FACP. Capable of playing up to four simultaneous messages. 

Accepts up to four 25-watt amplifiers. See XPIQ data sheet, DN- 

6823. 

CHS-4: Chassis for mounting up to four APS-6Rs. 

CHS-4L: Low-profile four-position Chassis. Mounts two AA-30 

amplifiers or one AMG-E and one AA-30. 

DP-1B: Blank Dress panel. Provides dead-front panel for 

unused tiers or to cover AA-30, AA-120, or one AMG-E and one 

AA-30. 

CAB-4 Series: The CAB-4 Series cabinets are fabricated from 

16-gauge steel with unique full-front LEXAN®, reverse-silkscreened 

for durability. The cabinet assembly consists of two 

basic parts: a Backbox (SBB-_4), and a Locking Door (DR-_4) 

that may hinge right or left. Cabinets are available in four sizes, 

“A” through “D”, with one to four tiers. A trim ring option is available 

for semi-flush mounting. See CAB-4 Series data sheet, DN- 

6857. 

CAB-M Series: Marine cabinets required for Lloyd’s Register 

or U.S. Coast Guard listed use. See DN-5063. 

COMPATIBLE DEVICES, EIA-232 PORTS 

PRN-5: 80-column printer. See DN-6769. 

PRN-6: 80-column printer. See DN-6956. 

VS4095/S2: Printer, 40-column, 24 V. Mounted in external 

backbox. Order from Keltron, Inc. See DN-3260. 

CRT-2: Video display terminal. See DN-3756. 

COMPATIBLE DEVICES, EIA-485 PORTS 

ACS Series: Remote serial annunciator/control systems. See 

DN-0524. 

FDU-80: Remote LCD display, 80 characters, with LEDs. See 

DN-6820. 

LCD-80: Remote LCD display, 80 characters. See DN-3198. 

LCD-80TM: Remote LCD display, 80 characters, terminal 

mode. See DN-3198. 

LDM Series: Remote custom graphic driver modules. See DN- 

0551. 

ACM-8R: Remote relay module. 8 Form-C relays. See DN- 

3558. 

RPT-485 Series: Repeater, isolator and/or fiber-optic modem. 

See DN-4737. 

UDACT: Universal Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter, 

636 channel. See DN-4867. 

UZC-256: Zone Coder. Up to 256 programmable codes. See 

DN-3404. 

COMPATIBLE INTELLIGENT DEVICES 

BEAMHK: Heating kit for transmitter/receiver unit of FSB- 

200(S) below. See DN-6985. 

BEAMHRK: Heating kit for use with the reflector of FSB-200(S) 

below. See DN-6985. 

BEAMLRK: Long-range accessory kit, FSB-200(S) below. 

BEAMMRK: Multi-mount kit, FSB-200(S) below. 

BEAMSMK: Surface-mount kit, FSB-200(S) below. 

FSB-200: Intelligent beam smoke detector. See DN-6985. 

FSB-200S: Intelligent beam smoke detector with integral sensitivity 

test. See DN-6895. 

FSI-851: Low-profile FlashScan® ionization detector, will 

replace FSI-751. See DN-6934. 

FSI-751: Low-profile FlashScan® ionization detector. See DN- 

6714. 

FSP-851: Low-profile FlashScan® photoelectric detector, will 

replace FSP-751. See DN-6935. 

FSP-751: Low-profile FlashScan® photoelectric detector. See 

DN-6714. 

FSP-851T: Low-profile FlashScan® photoelectric detector with 

135°F (57°C) thermal, will replace FSP-751T. See DN-6935. 

FSP-751T: Low-profile FlashScan® photoelectric detector with 

135°F (57°C) thermal. See DN-6714. 

FST-851: FlashScan® thermal detector 135°F (57°C), will 

replace FST-751. See DN-6936. 

FST-751: FlashScan® thermal detector 135°F (57°C). See DN- 

6716. 

FST-851R: FlashScan® thermal detector 135°F (57°C) with 

rate-of-rise, will replace FST-751R. See DN-6936. 

FST-751R: FlashScan® thermal detector 135°F (57°C) with 

rate-of-rise. See DN-6716. 

FST-851H: FlashScan® 190°F (88°C) high-temperature thermal 

detector. See DN-6936. 

FSD-751P: FlashScan® photo duct detector with housing. See 

DN-6821. 

FSD-751PL: Low-flow FlashScan® photo duct detector with 

housing, will replace FSD-751P. See DN-6955. 

FSD-751RP: FlashScan® photo duct detector with relay and 

housing. 

FSD-751RPL: Low-flow FlashScan® photo duct detector with 

relay and housing, will replace FSD-751RP. See DN-6955. 

FAPT-851: FlashScan® Acclimate Plus low-profile multi-sensor 

detector, will replace FAPT-751. See DN-6937. 

FAPT-751: Acclimate Plus low-profile multisensor detector. 

See DN-6833. 

FSH-751: FlashScan® HARSH Hostile Area Smoke Head. 

See DN-6875. 

FSL-751: FlashScan® VIEW® laser photo detector, will replace 

LPX-751. See DN-6886. 

LPX-751: Low-profile VIEW® laser photo detector. See DN- 

5306. 

B224RB: Low-profile relay base. 

B224BI: Isolator base for low-profile detectors. 

B710LP: Low-profile base. Standard U.S. style. 

B501: European-style, 4" (10.16 cm) base. 

B501BH: Sounder base, includes B501 base above. Constant 

tone. 

B501BHT: Sounder base, includes B501 base above. Temporal 

three tone. 

FMM-1: FlashScan® monitor module. See DN-6720. 

FDM-1: FlashScan® dual monitor module. See DN-6720. 

DN-6856:A • 12/01/06 — Page 7 of 9

FZM-1: FlashScan® two-wire detector monitor module. See 

DN-6720. 

FMM-101: FlashScan® miniature monitor module. See DN- 

6720. 

FCM-1: FlashScan® NAC control module. See DN-6724. 

FRM-1: FlashScan® relay module. See DN-6724. 

FSM-101: FlashScan® pull station monitor module. 

NBG-12LX: Manual fire alarm station, addressable. See DN- 

6726. 

ISO-X: Isolator module. See DN-2243. 

XP Series: Transponder. See DN-0759. 

XP5-M: FlashScan® transponder, five monitor points. See DN- 

6625. 

XP5-C: FlashScan® transponder, five control points or Form-C 

relays. See DN-6625. 

XP6-C: FlashScan® six-circuit supervised control module. See 

DN-6924. 

XP6-MA: FlashScan® six-zone interface module; connects 

intelligent alarm system to two-wire conventional detection 

zone. See DN-6925. 

XP6-R: FlashScan® six-relay (Form-C) control module. See 

DN-6926. 

XP10-M: FlashScan® ten-input monitor module. See DN-6923. 

XPIQ: Intelligent quad transponder. See DN-6823. 

OTHER OPTIONS 

DPI-232: Direct Panel Interface, specialized modem for extending 

serial data links to remotely located FACPs and/or peripherals. 

See DN-6870. 

LEM-320: Loop Expander Module. Expands each 640 to two 

Signaling Line Circuits. See DN-6881. 

TM-4: Transmitter Module. Includes three reverse-polarity circuits 

and one municipal box circuit. Mounts in panel module 

position (single-address-style) or in CHS-M2 position. See DN- 

6860. 

NCM-W: Network Communications Module, Wire. Order one 

NCM per network node (CPU-640 or NCA). See DN-6861. 

NCM-F: Network Communications Module, Fiber. Order one 

NCM per network node (CPU-640 or NCA). See DN-6861. 

NCS5-W-ONYX: Network Control Station, Wire. UL-Listed 

graphics PC with mouse, 17" color flat-screen LCD monitor. 

Order as necessary for network systems. Each NCS consumes 

one of 103 network addresses. See DN-6868 (previous NCS- 

W), ONYX® DN-6869. 

NCS5-F-ONYX: Network Control Station, Fiber. UL-Listed 

graphics PC with mouse, 17" color flat-screen LCD monitor. 

Order as necessary for network systems. Each NCS consumes 

one of 103 network addresses. See DN-6868 (previous NCS-F), 

ONYX® DN-6869. 

VeriFire-TCD: VeriFire® Tools CD-ROM. Contains programming 

software for the NFS-640, NCA, and XPIQ. Includes local 

panel connection cable. Programming PC requires a serial port 

connection. See DN-6871. 

ACM-24AT: ONYX® Series ACS annunciator – up to 96 points 

of annunciation with Alarm or Active LED, Trouble LED, and 

switch per circuit. Active/Alarm LEDs can be programmed (by 

powered-up switch selection) by point to be red, green, or yellow; 

the Trouble LED is always yellow. See DN-6862. 

AEM-24AT: Same LED and switch capabilities as ACM-24AT, 

expands the ACM-24AT to 48, 72, or 96 points. See DN-6862. 

ACM-48A: ONYX® Series ACS annunciator – up to 96 points 

of annunciation with Alarm or Active LED per circuit. Active/ 

Alarm LEDs can be programmed (by powered-up switch selection) 

in groups of 24 to be red, green, or yellow. Expandable to 

96 points with one AEM-48A. See DN-6862. 

AEM-48A: Same LED capabilities as ACM-48A, expands the 

ACM-48A to 96 points. See DN-6862. 

BAT Series: Batteries. NFS-640 utilizes two 12 volt, 12 to 55 

AH batteries. See DN-6933. 

PS Series: Batteries. NFS-640 utilizes two 12 volt, 12 to 55 AH 

batteries. See DN-1109. 

NFS-LBB: Battery Box (required for batteries over 25 AH). 

BR: Same as above but red. 

Page 8 of 9 — DN-6856:A • 12/01/06

SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS 

System Capacity 

• Intelligent Signaling Line Circuits ............1 expandable to 2 

• Intelligent detectors ......................................... 159 per loop 

• Addressable monitor/control modules .............. 159 per loop 

• Programmable internal hardware and output circuits 

(4 standard) ...................................................................... 68 

• Programmable software zones......................................... 99 

• Special programming zones ............................................. 14 

• LCD annunciators per CPU-640/-640E and NCA 

(observe power)................................................................ 32 

• ACS annunciators per CPU-640/-640E 

.........................................................32 address x 64 points 

• ACS annunciators per NCA 

................................................32 address x 64 or 96 points 

NOTE: The NCA supports up to 96 annunciator address points 

per ACM-24/48. 


• Primary input power, CPU-640 board: 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 

3.0 amps. CPU-640E board: 220/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 1.5 

Amps. 

• Total output 24 V power: 6.0 A in alarm. 

NOTE: The power supply has a total of 6.0 Amps of available 

power. This is shared by all internal modules. 

• Standard notification circuits (4): 2.5 A each. 

• Four-wire detector power: 1.25 A. 

• Non-resettable regulated power outputs: 1.25 A each. 

• Battery charger range: 12 AH – 55 AH. Use separate cabinet 

for batteries over 25 AH. 

• Optional high-capacity (25 – 120 AH) battery charger: 

CHG-120 (see CHG-120 data sheet, DN-6040). 

• Float rate: 27.6 V. 

Temperature and Humidity Ranges 

This system meets NFPA requirements for operation at 0 – 

49ºC/32 – 120ºF and at a relative humidity 93% ± 2% RH 

(noncondensing) at 32ºC ± 2ºC (90ºF ± 3ºF). However, the 

useful life of the system's standby batteries and the electronic 

components may be adversely affected by extreme temperature 

ranges and humidity. Therefore, it is recommended that 

this system and its peripherals be installed in an environment 

with a normal room temperature of 15 – 27ºC/60 – 80ºF. 


The listings and approvals below apply to the basic NFS-640 

control panel. In some cases, certain modules may not be listed 

by certain approval agencies, or listing may be in process. Consult 

factory for latest listing status. 

• UL: S635 

• ULC: CS118 

• FM APPROVED Exceptions – CPU-640E, PRN-5, Proprietary 

service 

• CSFM: 7165-0028:214, 7170-0028:216 

• MEA: 317-01-E 

• City of Chicago 

• City of Denver 

• Lloyd’s Register: 02/60007 

• U.S. Coast Guard: 161.002/42/1 

• China Classification Society (CCS): #NL05T00001 

(NFS-640E) 

• CCCF: Certif. # 2003081801600815 

Standards 

The NFS-640 complies with the following UL Standards and 

NFPA 72 Fire Alarm Systems requirements : 

– UL 864 (Fire) 

– UL 1076 (Burglary) 

– LOCAL (Automatic, Manual, Waterflow and Sprinkler 

Supervisory). 

–AUXILIARY(Automatic, Manual and Waterflow) (requires 

4XTMF). 

– REMOTE STATION (Automatic, Manual and Waterflow) 

(requires 4XTMF). 

–PROPRIETARY (Automatic, Manual and Waterflow). 

Not applicable for FM. 

– EMERGENCY VOICE/ALARM. 

Acclimate Plus, HARSH, NIS, Notifier Integrated Systems, and NO- 

TI•FIRE•NET are all trademarks; and FlashScan®, NION®, NOTIFIER®, 

ONYX®, UniNet®, VeriFire®, and VIEW® are all registered trademarks of 

Honeywell International Inc. 










Page 9 of 9 — DN-6856:A • 12/01/06

NOT-BG12LX 

Addressable Manual Pull Station 

For FireWarden Series Panels 

General 

The Notifier NOT-BG12LX is a state-of-the-art, dual-action 

(i.e., requires two motions to activate the station) pull station 

that includes an addressable interface for FireWarden series 

intelligent control panels, and the NSP-25 panel. Because the 

NOT-BG12LX is addressable, the control panel can display the 

exact location of the activated manual station. This leads fire 

personnel quickly to the location of the alarm. 

Features 

• Maintenance personnel can open station for inspection and 

address setting without causing an alarm condition. 

• Built-in bicolor LED, which is visible through the handle of 

the station, flashes in normal operation and latches steady 

red when in alarm. 

• Handle latches in down position and the word “ACTIVATED” 

appears to clearly indicate the station has been operated. 

• Captive screw terminals wire-ready for easy connection to 

SLC loop (accepts up to 12 AWG/3.25 mm² wire). 

• Can be surface mounted (with SB-10 or SB-I/O) or semiflush 

mounted. Semi-flush mount to a standard singlegang, 

double-gang, or 4" (10.16 cm) square electrical box. 

• Smooth dual-action design. 

• Meets ADAAG controls and operating mechanisms guidelines 

(Section 4.1.3[13]); meets ADA requirement for 5 lb. 

maximum activation force. 

• Highly visible. 

• Attractive shape and textured finish. 

• Key reset. 

• Includes Braille text on station handle. 

• Optional trim ring (BG12TR). 

• Meets UL 38, Standard for Manually Actuated Signaling 

Boxes. 

Construction 

Shell, door, and handle are molded of durable polycarbonate 

material with a textured finish. 


• Shipping Weight: 9.6 oz. (272.15 g) 

• Normal operating voltage: 24 VDC. 

• Maximum SLC loop voltage: 28.0 VDC. 

• Maximum SLC loop current: μA. 

• Temperature Range: 32°F to 120°F (0°C to 49°C) 

• Relative Humidity: 10% to 93% (noncondensing) 

• For use indoors in a dry location 

Installation 

The NOT-BG12LX will mount semi-flush into a single-gang, 

double-gang, or standard 4" (10.16 cm) square electrical outlet 

box, or will surface mount to the model SB-10 or SB-I/O surface 

backbox. If the NOT-BG12LX is being semi-flush 

mounted, then the optional trim ring (BG12TR) may be used. 

DN-7001:C1 • A1-380 

Intelligent/Addressable Devices 

The NOT-BG12LX 

Addressable Manual Pull Station 

The BG12TR is usually needed for semi-flush mounting with 4" 

(10.16 cm) or double-gang boxes (not with single-gang boxes). 

Operation 

Pushing in, then pulling down on the handle causes it to latch 

in the down/activated position. Once latched, the word “ACTI- 

VATED” (in bright yellow) appears at the top of the handle, 

while a portion of the handle protrudes from the bottom of the 

station. To reset the station, simply unlock the station with the 

key and pull the door open. This action resets the handle; closing 

the door automatically resets the switch. 

Each manual station, on command from the control panel, 

sends data to the panel representing the state of the manual 

switch. Two rotary decimal switches allow address settings 

(1 – 99 on NFW2-100/NFW2-100C, 1 – 50 for NFW-50/NFW- 

50C). 

Architectural/Engineering 


Manual Fire Alarm Stations shall be non-coded, with a keyoperated 

reset lock in order that they may be tested, and so 

designed that after actual Emergency Operation, they cannot 

be restored to normal except by use of a key. An operated station 

shall automatically condition itself so as to be visually 

detected as activated. Manual stations shall be constructed of 

red-colored polycarbonate material with clearly visible operating 

instructions provided on the cover. The word FIRE shall 

appear on the front of the stations in white letters, 1.00 inches 

(2.54 cm) or larger. Stations shall be suitable for surface 

mounting on matching backbox SB-10 or SB-I/O; or semi-flush 

mounting on a standard single-gang, double-gang, or 4" 

(10.16 cm) square electrical box, and shall be installed within 

6643cov1.jpg 

DN-7001:C1 • 8/16/10 — Page 1 of 2

the limits defined by the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) 

or per national/local requirements. Manual Stations shall be 

Underwriters Laboratories listed. 

Manual stations shall connect with two wires to one of the control 

panel SLC loops. The manual station shall, on command 

from the control panel, send data to the panel representing the 

state of the manual switch. Manual stations shall provide 

address setting by use of rotary decimal switches. 

Product Line Information 

NOT-BG12LX: Dual-action addressable pull station. Includes 

key locking feature. 

NOT-BG12LXA: Canadian Dual-action addressable pull station. 

Includes key locking feature. 

SB-10: Surface backbox; metal. 

SB-I/O: Surface backbox; plastic. 

BG12TR: Optional trim ring. 

17021: Keys, set of two. 


In some cases, certain modules or applications may not be 

listed by certain approval agencies, or listing may be in process. 

Consult factory for latest listing status. 

• UL Listed: S692 (listed for Canadian and non-Canadian 

applications) 

• MEA: 67-02-E Vol. IV 

• CSFM: 7150-0028:0199 

• FDNY: 


Patented: U.S. Patent No. D428,351; 6,380,846; 6,314,772; 

6,632,108. 

Notifier® is a registered trademark of Honeywell International Inc. 










Page 2 of 2 — DN-7001:C1 • 8/16/10

FSP-851, FSP-851T, & 

FSP-851R 

Intelligent Plug-In Photoelectric 

General 

Notifier 851 Series intelligent plug-in smoke detectors with 

integral communication provide features that surpass conventional 

detectors. Detector sensitivity can be programmed in 

the control panel software. Sensitivity is continuously monitored 

and reported to the panel. Point ID capability allows 

each detector’s address to be set with decade address 

switches, providing exact detector location for selective maintenance 

when chamber contamination reaches an unacceptable 

level. The FSP-851 photoelectric detector’s unique 

optical sensing chamber is engineered to sense smoke produced 

by a wide range of combustion sources. Dual electronic 

thermistors add 135°F (57°C) fixed-temperature thermal sensing 

on the FSP-851T. The FSP-851R is a remote test capable 

detector for use with DNR(W) duct detector housings. 

FSP-851 series detectors are compatible with all ONYX 

series Notifier intelligent Fire Alarm Control Panels (FACP). 

FlashScan® (U.S. Patent 5,539,389) is a communication protocol 

developed by Notifier that greatly increases the speed of 

communication between analog intelligent devices. Intelligent 

devices communicate in a grouped fashion. If one of the 

devices in the group has new information, the panel’s CPU 

stops the group poll and concentrates on single points. The 

net effect is response speed greater than five times that of earlier 

designs. 

Features 

• Sleek, low-profile design. 

• Addressable-analog communication. 

• Stable communication technique with noise immunity. 

• Low standby current. 

• Two-wire SLC connection. 

• FlashScan (NFS-320, NFS-640, NFS2-640, NFS-3030, 

NFS2-3030) and classic CLIP systems (AFP-100, AFP- 

200, AFP-300, AFP-400, NFS-640, AM2020/AFP1010, 

NFS-3030) compatible. 

• Rotary, decimal addressing (1-99 on CLIP systems, 1-159 

on FlashScan systems). 

• Optional remote, single-gang LED accessory. 

• Dual LED design provides 360° viewing angle. 

• Visible bi-color LEDs blink green every time the detector is 

addressed, and illuminate steady red on alarm (FlashScan 

systems only). 

• Remote test feature from the panel. 

• Walk test with address display (an address on 121 will blink 

the detector LED: 12-[pause]-1(FlashScan systems only). 

• Built-in functional test switch activated by external magnet. 

• Built-in tamper-resistant feature. 

• Sealed against back pressure. 

• Constructed of off-white Bayblend®, designed to commercial 

standards, and offers an attractive appearance. 

• 94-5V plastic flammability rating. 

• SEMS screws for wiring of the separate base. 

• Optional relay, isolator, and sounder bases. 


dn-6935:c • H-202 

Intelligent/Addressable Devices 

Size: 2.1” (5.3cm) high x 4.1” (10.4cm) diameter installed in 

B501 base, 6.1” (15.5cm) diameter installed in B710LPbase. 

Shipping Weight: 5.2oz. (147g). 

Operating Temperature: FSP-851, 0°C to 49°C (32°F to 

120°F); FSP-851T, 0°C to 38°C (32°F to 100°F). Low temperature 

signal for FSP-851T at 45°F +/- 10°F (7.22°C +/- 

5.54°C). FSP-851R installed in a DNR(W), -20°C to 70°C (-4°F 

to 158°F). 

UL/ULC Listed Velocity Range: 0-4000 ft/min. (1219.2 m/ 

min.), suitable for installation in ducts. 

Relative Humidity: 10%-93% noncondensing. 

Thermal Ratings: Fixed-temperature setpoint 135°F (57°C). 

DETECTOR SPACING AND APPLICATIONS 

Notifier recommends spacing detectors in compliance with 

NFPA 72. In low airflow applications with smooth ceiling, 

space detectors 30 feet (9.144m) for ceiling heights 10 feet 

(3.148m) and higher. For specific information regarding 

detector spacing, placement, and special applications refer to 

NFPA 72. System Smoke Detector Application Guide, 

document A05-1003, is available at systemsensor.com 


Voltage Range: 15-32 volts DC peak. 

Standby Current (max. avg.): 300A @ 24VDC (one communication 

every five seconds with LED enabled). 

LED Current (max.): 6.5mA @ 24VDC (‘ON’). 

BASES AVAILABLE 

NOTE: 

FSP-851 with B710LP base 

FSP-851T with B710LP base 

“A” suffix indicates ULC Listed model. 

6934pho1.jpg 6935pho1.jpg 

dn-6935:c • 3/12/10 — Page 1 of 2

B710LP(A): 6.1” (15.5cm) diameter. 

B501(A): 4.1” (10.4cm) diameter. 

B200SR(A): Intelligent sounder base, configurable for temp-3 

or steady sound. 

B224RB(A) Relay Base: Screw Terminals, up to 14AWG 

(2.0mm 2 ); Relay Type, Form-C; Rating, 2.0A @ 30VDC resistive, 

0.3A @ 110VDC inductive, 1.0A @ 30VDC inductive; 

Dimensions, 6.2” (15.748cm) x 1.2” (3.048cm) x 1.2” 

(3.048cm). 

B224BI(A) Isolator Base: Dimensions, 6.2” (15.748cm) x 1.2” 

(3.048cm) x 1.2” (3.048cm); Maximum, 25 devices between 

isolator bases. 

Installation 

FSP-851 plug-in detectors use a separate base to simplify 

installation, service, and maintenance. A special tool allows 

maintenance personnel to plug in and remove detectors without 

using a ladder. 

Mount base on an electrical backbox which is at least 1.5” 

(3.81cm) deep. Suitable mounting base boxes include: 

• 4.0” (10.16cm) square box. 

• 3.5” (8.89cm) or 4.0” (10.16cm) octagonal box. 

• Single-gang box (except relay or isolator base). 

• With B200SR base, use an appropriate junction box. 

• With B224RB or B224BI base, use a 3.5” (8.89cm) octagonal 

box, or a 4.0” (10.16cm) octagonal or square box. 

NOTE: 1) Because of inherent supervision provided by the SLC 

loop, end-of-line resistors are not required. Wiring “T-taps” or 

branches are permitted for style 4 (Class “B”) wiring. 2) When 

using relay or sounder bases, consult data sheet DN-2243 (ISO-X) 

for device limitations between isolator modules and isolator bases. 







• ULC Listed: S1115 (FSP-851A, FSP-851TA) 

• MEA Listed: 225-02-E 


• CSFM: 7272-0028:206 

• Maryland State Fire Marshal: Permit # 2122 

• BSMI: CI313066760036 

• CCCF: Certif. # 2004081801000017 (FSP-851T) 

Certif. # 2004081801000016 (FSP-851) 


FSP-851T:Same as FSP-851 but includes a built-in 135°F 

(57°C) fixed-temperature thermal device. 

FSP-851TA:Same as FSP-851T but with ULC listing. 

FSP-851R: Low-profile intelligent photoelectric sensor, 

remote test capable. For use with DNRW. 

FSP-851RA: Same as FSP-851R but with ULC listing. 

BASES 

B710LP: Standard U.S. low-profile base. 

B710LPBP:Standard U.S. low-profile base, pkg. of 10. 

B710LPA:Standard U.S. low-profile base, ULC listing. 

B501BP:Standard European flangeless base, pkg. of 10. 

B501A:Standard European flangeless base, ULC listing. 

B200SR(A): Intelligent sounder base, configurable for temp-3 

or steady sound. 

B224RB(A):Intelligent relay base. 

B224BI(A):Intelligent isolator base. Isolates SLC from loop 

shorts. 

ACCESSORIES 

F110:Retrofit replacement flange for older style bases. Converts 

older high profile base for use with FlashScan detectors. 

RA100Z(A):Remote LED annunciator. 3-32VDC. Fits U.S. 

single-gang electrical box. Supported by B710LP(A) and 

B501(A) bases only. 

SMK400E:Surface mounting kit provides for entry of surface 

wiring conduit. For use with B501(A) base only. 

RMK400:Recessed mounting kit. For use with B501(A) base 

only. 

SMB600:Surface mounting kit for use with B710LP(A). 

BCK-200B:Black detector covers, box of 10. For use with 

FSP-851 only. 

WCK-200B: White detector covers, box of 10. For use with 

FSP-851 only. 

M02-04-00:Test magnet. 

M02-09-00:Test magnet with telescope stick. 

XR2B:Detector removal tool. Allows installation and/or 

removal of FlashScan Series detector heads from base in high 

ceiling installations. 

T55-127-010:Detector removal tool without pole. 

XP-4:Extension pole for XR2B. Comes in three 5-ft. sections. 


NOTE: “A or “CDN” suffix indicates ULC listed model. 

FSP-851:Low-profile intelligent photoelectric sensor. Must be 

mounted to one of the bases listed below. 

FSP-851A:Same as FSP-851 but with ULC listing. 

Notifier® and FlashScan® are registered trademarks of Honeywell International 

Inc. Bayblend® is a registered trademark of Bayer Corporation. 










Page 2 of 2 — dn-6935:c • 3/12/10

FST-851 Series 

Intelligent Thermal (Heat) Detectors 

with FlashScan® 

dn-6936:a1 • H-211 

Intelligent / Addressable Devices 

General 

Notifier FST-851 Series intelligent plug-in thermal detectors 

with integral communication has features that surpass conventional 

detectors. Point ID capability allows each detector’s 

address to be set with decade address switches, providing 

exact detector locations. FST-851 Series thermal detectors 

use an innovative thermistor sensing circuit to produce 135°F/ 

57°C fixed-temperature (FST-851) and rate-of-rise thermal 

detection (FST-851R) in a low-profile package. FST-851H provides 

fixed high-temperature detection at 190°F/88°C. These 

thermal detectors provide effective, intelligent property protection 

in a variety of applications. FST-851 Series detectors are 

compatible with all Notifier intelligent Fire Alarm Control Panels, 

except FireWarden series panels. . 

FlashScan® (U.S. Patent 5,539,389) is a communication protocol 

developed by Notifier Engineering that greatly enhances 

the speed of communication between analog intelligent 

devices and certain NOTIFIER systems. Intelligent devices 

communicate in a grouped fashion. If one of the devices within 

the group has new information, the panel’s CPU stops the 

group poll and concentrates on single points. The net effect is 

response speed greater than five times that of earlier designs. 

Features 

• Sleek, low-profile, stylish design. 

• State-of-the-art thermistor technology for fast response. 

• Rate-of-rise model (FST-851R), 15°F (8.3°C) per minute. 

• Factory preset at 135°F (57°C); high-temperature model at 

190°F (88°C). 

• Addressable by device. 

• Compatible with FlashScan® and CLIP protocol systems. 

• Direct dial entry of address 01-159 for FlashScan® loops, 

01-99 CLIP mode loops. 

• Two-wire SLC connection. 

• Visible LEDs “blink” every time the unit is addressed. 

• 360°-field viewing angle of the visual alarm indicators (two 

bi-color LEDs). LEDs blink green in Normal condition and 

turn on steady red in Alarm. 

• Integral communications and built-in device-type identification. 

• Remote test feature from the panel. 

• Built-in functional test switch activated by external magnet. 

• Walk test with address display (an address of 121 will blink 

the detector LED 12-(pause)-1). 

• Low standby current. 

• Backward-compatible. 

• Built-in tamper-resistant feature. 

• Designed for direct-surface or electrical-box mounting. 

• Sealed against back pressure. 

• Plugs into separate base for ease of installation and maintenance. 

Separate base allows interchange of photoelectric, 

ionization and thermal sensors. 

• SEMS screws for wiring of the separate base. 

• Constructed of off-white Bayblend®, designed to commercial 

standards, and offers an attractive appearance. 

6936pho1.jpg 

• 94-5V plastic flammability rating. 

• Remote LED output connection to optional RA400Z remote 

LED annunciator. 

• Optional sounder, relay, and isolator bases. 

• Optional recessed (RMK400) or surface (SMK400E) base 

mounting kits. 


Size: 2.1" (5.3 cm) high x 4.1" (10.4 cm) diameter installed in 

B501 base, 6.1" (15.5 cm) diameter installed in B710LP base. 

Shipping weight: 4.8 oz. (137 g). 

Operating temperature range: FST-851 Series, FST-851R: – 

20°C to 38°C (–4°F to 100°F); FST-851H: –20°C to 66°C (–4°F 

to 150°F). 

Detector spacing: UL approved for 50 ft. (15.24 m) center to 

center. FM approved for 25 x 25 ft. (7.62 x 7.62 m) spacing. 

Relative humidity: 10% – 93% noncondensing. 

Thermal ratings: fixed-temperature setpoint 135°F (57°C), 

rate-of-rise detection 15°F (8.3°C) per minute, high temperature 

heat 190°F (88°C). 

Altitude rating: 10,000 feet. 

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS: 

Voltage range: 15 - 32 volts DC peak. 

Standby current (max. avg.): 300 A @ 24 VDC (one communication 

every 5 seconds with LED enabled). 

LED current (max.): 6.5 mA @ 24 VDC (“ON”). 

BASES AVAILABLE: 

B710LP: 6.1" (15.5 cm) diameter. 

B501: 4.1" (10.4 cm) diameter. 

B501BH-2 or B501BHT-2: Sounder base assembly. 

B224RB Relay Base: Screw terminals: up to 14 AWG (2.0 

mm²). Relay type: Form-C. Rating: 2.0 A @ 30 VDC resistive; 

0.3 A @ 110 VDC inductive; 1.0 A @ 30 VDC inductive. 

Dimensions: 6.2" (15.748 cm) x 1.2" (3.048 cm). 

B224BI Isolator Base: Dimensions: 6.2" (15.748 cm) x 1.2" 

(15.748 cm). Maximum: 25 devices between isolator bases. 

See Note 2 under Installation. 

Applications 

FST-851 Series in B710LP base 

Use thermal detectors for protection of property. For further 

information, go to systemsensor.com for manual I56-407-00, 

Applications Manual for System Smoke Detectors, which pro- 

dn-6936:a1 • 06/8/09 — Page 1 of 2

vides detailed information on detector spacing, placement, 

zoning, wiring, and special applications. 

Installation 

The FST Series plug-in intelligent thermal detector uses a separate 

base to simplify installation, service, and maintenance. 

Installation instructions are shipped with each detector. 

Mount base (all base types) on an electrical backbox which is 

at least 1.5" (3.81 cm) deep. Suitable boxes include: 

• 4.0" (10.16 cm) square box. 

• 3.5" (8.89 cm) or 4.0" (10.16 cm) octagonal box. 

• Single-gang box (except relay or isolator base). 

• With B501BH-2 or B501BHT-2 base, use a 4.0" (10.16 cm) 

square box. 

• With B224RB or B224BI base, use a 3.5" (8.89 cm) or 4.0" 

(10.16 cm) octagonal box, or a 4.0" (10.16 cm) square box. 

NOTE: 1) Because of the inherent supervision provided by the 

SLC loop, end-of-line resistors are not required. Wiring “T-taps” or 

branches are permitted for Style 4 (Class “B”) wiring. 2) When 

using relay or sounder bases, consult data sheet DN-2243 (ISO-X) 

for device limitations between isolator modules and isolator bases. 







• ULC Listed: S6978MEA Listed: 383-02-E 


• CSFM: 7270-0028:196 

• BSMI: CI313066760025 

• CCCF: Certif. # 2004081801000018 

• U.S. Coast Guard: 161.002/23/3 (AFP-200); 161.002/27/3 

(AFP1010/AM2020); 161.002/42/1 (NFS-640) 


B501: Standard European flangeless base. 

B501(A): Standard European flangeless base, ULC Listing. 

BH501BH-2: Sounder base, includes B501base above. 

BH501BHT-2: Same as B501BH-2, but includes temporal sounder. 

BH501BHA: Sounder base, includes B501base above 

BH501BHTA: Same as BH501BHA, but includes temporal sounder. 

B224BI(A): Intelligent isolator base. Isolates SLC from loop 

shorts. 

ACCESSORIES: 

F110: Retrofit replacement flange for older style high profile 

bases. Converts bases for use with FlashScan® detectors. 

RA400Z(A): Remote LED annunciator. 3 – 32 VDC. Fits U.S. 

single-gang electrical box. Supported by B710LPBP(A) and 

B501(A) bases only. 

SMK400E: Surface mounting kit provides for entry of surface 

wiring conduit. For use with B501(A) base only. 

RMK400: Recessed mounting kit. For use with B501(A) base 

only. 

SMB600: Surface mounting kit for use with B710LPBP(A). 

BCK-200B: Black detector covers, box of 10. 

M02-04-00: Test magnet. 

M02-09-00: Test magnet with telescope stick. 

XR2B: Detector removal tool. Allows installation and/or 

removal of FlashScan® Series detector heads from base in 

high ceiling installations. 

T55-127-010: Detector removal tool without pole. 

XP-4: Extension pole for XR2B. Comes in three 5-ft. sections. 


“A” suffix indicates ULC Listed model. 

FST-851: Intelligent thermal detector. Must be mounted to one 

of the bases listed below. 

FST-851A: Same as FST-851 but with ULC Listing. 

FST-851R: Intelligent thermal detector with rate-of-rise feature. 

FST-851RA: Same as FST-851R but with ULC Listing. 

FST-851H: Intelligent high-temperature thermal detector. 

FST-851HA: Same as FST-851H but with ULC Listing. 

BASES: 

B710LP: Standard U.S. low-profile base 

B710LPBP: Standard U.S. low-profile base, pkg. of 10. 

B710LP: Standard U.S. low-profile base. 

B710LP(A): Standard U.S. low-profile base. 

B501BP: Standard European flangeless base, pkg. of 10. 

Notifier® and FlashScan® are a registered trademark of Honeywell International Inc. 

Bayblend® is a registered trademark of Bayer Corp. 

©2009 by Honeywell International Inc. All rights reserved. Unauthorized use of this document 

is strictly prohibited. 








Page 2 of 2 — dn-6936:a1 • 06/8/09

DESCRIPTION 

COOPER LIGHTING 

METALux· 

The GC Series features a 4-3/4" deep para-contoured fixture housing, 

high reflectivity and optimum lamp to lens spacing. The series produces 

total uniformity of light in the luminous area and is compatible 

with all of today's popular ceiling systems and is available with a number 

of options and accessories for application versatility. 

The specification luminaire is designed to offer maximum efficiency 

and performance for today's unique interior specifications. The GC 

Series is an excellent choice for commercial office spaces, schools, hospitals 

or retail merchandising areas. 

SPECIFICATION FEATURES 

Construction 

4-314" deep, para-contoured housing, 

die formed, prime cold rolled 

steel. Die embossed housing has full 

length die formed stiffeners for 

added strength. Deep "V" 

ballast/wireway cover easily 

removed without tools. Die formed 

captive lampholder bracket fully 

encloses lampholder wiring permitting 

easy lampholder replacement. 

Heavy endplates are securely 

attached w ith interlocking tabs and 

screws. Four auxiliary fixture end 

suspension points provided. KOs for 

continuous row wiring. Endplates 

have integral Grid-Lock feature for 

safety and convenience. 

Electrical * 

Ballasts are CBMIETL Class " P" and 

are positively secured by mounting 

bolts. Pressure lock lampholders. 

UUCUL listed.** Suitable for damp 

locations. 

Finish 

Multistage, iron phosphate pretreatment 

ensures maximum bonding 

and rust inhibitor. Lighting grade, 

baked white enamel finish. 

Hinging/latching 

Positive cam action spring 

loaded steel latches with baked 

white enamel finish. Safety-lock 

T-hinges allow hinging and 

latching either side. 

Frame/Shielding 

Die formed, heavy gauge, flat 

steel door with reinforced 

mitered corners and baked 

white enamel finish. Positive 

light seals. Light stabilized 

100% virgin acrylic prismatic 

shielding. Standard #12 pattern. 

Optional shielding available. 

2GC 

228T8 

232 

428T8 

-432 

2 ' X 4 ' TROFFER 

2 OR 4 T8 LAMPS 

Specif ication Deep Troffer 

4-3/4" 

(121mm) 

J 

powered by 

light 

.. 

I . I . 

MOUNTING DATA 

Z LAM p Acce Plate 

7/8' [22mm] K.O. (2] 7/8' [22 mm] 

- + 

~- 

'l 

23-3/4' 

-&------- . T - --- 

- 

I . 

~ 3 . (77mml 4-618' (119mm] -~ 

48 ~ mm) 7-718.(201mml 

11217 

LAMP CONFIGURATIONS 

ZLAMP 

4-~V o

2GC 2' x 4' TB 

PHOTO METRICS 

Coefficients of Utilization 

Candela 

2GC-232A 

Electronic Ballast 

F32T8/35K Lamps 

2800 Lumens 

Spacing criterion: 

(II) 1.3 x mounting 

height, (1.) 1.4 x 

mounting height 

Efficiency 79.4% 

Test Report: 

2GC232A.IES 

LER = FL-66 

Yearly Cost of 1000 

lumens, 3000 hrs at 

.08 KWH = $3.64 

Effective floor cavity reflectance 

rc 80% 70% 

rw 70 50 30 10 70 50 30 10 

RCA 

0 95959595 92 92 92 92 

1 87 84 81 78 85 82 80 17 

2 81 75 70 66 79 73 69 65 

3 74 67 61 56 72 68 60 56 

4 68605349 67 59 53 48 

5 63 53 47 42 61 52 46 41 

6 58 48 41 36 56 47 41 36 

7 53 43 36 32 52 42 36 32 

8 49393227 48 38 32 27 

9 45 35 28 24 44 34 28 24 

10 42 31 25 21 41 31 25 21 

Zonal lumen Summary 

Zone Lumens %Lamp %Fixture 

0-30 1328 23.7 29.9 

0-40 2203 39.3 49.5 

0-60 3742 66.8 84.1 

0-90 4447 79.4 100.0 

0-180 4447 79.4 100.0 

20% 

50% 30'Yo 10% 0% 

50 30 10 50 30 10 50 30 10 0 

88 88 88 84 84 84 81 81 81 79 

79 17 75 76 74 72 73 72 70 69 

71 67 64 68 65 62 66 63 61 59 

63 59 55 61 57 54 59 56 53 52 

57 52 48 55 51 47 53 50 46 45 

51 45 41 49 44 41 48 43 40 38 

46 40 36 44 39 35 43 39 35 34 

41 35 31 40 35 31 39 34 31 29 

37 31 27 36 31 27 35 30 27 25 

33 27 23 32 27 23 32 27 23 22 

30 25 21 29 24 21 29 24 21 19 

Typical VCP Percentages 

Room Size (Ft.) 

20.20 

30.30 

30.60 

60.30 

60x60 

Height Along 

8.5' 10.0' 

72 75 

68 70 

62 64 

70 73 

62 64 

Height Across 

8.5' 10.0' 

69 73 

65 68 

57 60 

69 71 

58 61 

Angle Along II 45• Acrossl. 

1656 1656 1656 

1647 1655 1663 

10 1627 1644 1660 

15 1595 1623 1649 

20 1545 1590 1633 

25 1481 1548 1604 

30 1400 1486 1557 

35 1299 1405 1493 

40 1171 1294 1395 

45 1013 1138 1245 

50 835 954 1031 

55 667 764 799 

60 520 579 597 

65 393 412 428 

70 281 269 298 

75 191 173 221 

80 126 126 165 

85 68 17 94 

90 0 0 0 

C~Lighting 

Visit our web site at www.cooper1ightlng.com 

Customer First Center 1121 Highway 74 South Peachtree City, GA 30269 770.486.4800 FAX 770.486.4801 8/12 ADF081849

2GC 2' x 4' T8 


SAMPLE NUMBER: 2GC-232A-UNV -EB81-U 

I 

,--J 

Rating 

Blank= 

Standard 

NY=NewYork 

City Rated 

ATW-SW4= 

Chicago 

Rated 

I Width 

2=2' Width 

Trim Type 

G=Grid/Lay-in (Standard)'" 

G=Concealed T"' 

G=Siot Grid 171 

f=Aiuminum FlangeTrimlt 1 

MZ=ModularTrim 

EMZ=ModularTrim 

(Extended Swing Arm) 

I Series 

C=Specification Deep Troffer 

I 

Door frame 

Standard= Flat White Steel Door 

(Leave Blank) 

FA=Fiush White Extruded 

Aluminum c/w Spring Latch 

RA=Regressed White Extruded 

Aluminum (318") 

FAN=Fiush Natural Anodized 

Extruded Aluminum 

RAN=Regressed Natural Anodized 

Extruded Aluminum (318") 

FAB=Fiush Black Extruded 

Aluminum 

RAB=Regressed Black Extruded 

Aluminum (318") 

I 

I 

I 

Number of 

Lamps 

2=2 Lamps 

4=4 Lamps 

Wattage 

28T8=28WT8(48") ~ 

I 

1 

32=32WT8 (48") "' 

Shielding 

A=#12 Acrylic Pattern 

A125=#12 Pattern Acrylic 

(.125"Thickness) 

A19/156=#19 Pattern Acrylic 


DA=Dropped Dish Matte White 

Acrylic 

IMA48=1njection Molded Acrylic 


PB15=1/2" x 1/2" x 1/2" Silver 

Parabolic Louver (Styrene) 

Option -Aluminum Flange Trim '" 

Blank=SW (Single White) 

Type 

Color 

'S' Single 'N' Natural 

'A' In Row W' White 

'E' End of Row 

Voltage"' 

120V=120Volt 

277V=277 Volt 

347V=347 Volt 

UNV=Universal Voltage 120-277° 1 

Options 

GL=Single Element Fuse 

GM=Double Element Fuse 

Flex= Flex Installed (Reference Flex ordering 

information) 

EL=Emergency Installed 01 

Lamps Installed 

Blank=No Lamps Installed 

L8835= TS Lamp, 28W and 32W, 3500K "' 

L8841= T8 Lamp, 28W and 32W, 4100K"' 

L8835HL= TS Lamp, 32W, 3500K, 3100 Lumens 

L8841HL= TS Lamp, 32W, 41001 1.15. 

ER8_ = TS Electronic Program 

Rapid Start. Total Harmonic 

Distortion < 10% 

High Performance 1'8 Ballasts 

HB8_ = TB Electronic Instant Start. 

Total Harmonic Distortion < 

10%. Standard Ballast 

Factor .86 - .86 

HB8_L= TB Electronic Instant Start. 


10%. Low Ballast Factor 

.77- .82 

HB8_ N= TB Electronic Instant Start. 


10%. Normal Ballast Factor 

1.0 

HB8_ H= TS Electronic Instant Start. 


10%. High Ballast Factor 

1.15-1.20 

HR8_ TS Electronic Program Rapid 

Start. Total Harmonic 

Distortion < 10%. Standard 

Ballast Factor .86- .86 

HRB_DIM= TB Electronic Program 

Rapid Start. Total 

Harmonic Distortion < 

10%. Step Dimming. 

Ballast Factor .SB 

HR8_ L= TB Electronic Program 


Distortion < 10%. Low 

Ballast Factor .71 - .79 

HRB_H= TB Electronic Program 


Distortion < 10%. High 

Ballast Factor 1.15-1.20 

Rfthllght Ballasts .. 

5LT8_ =TB DALI Program Rapid Start. 


10%. Ballast Factor 1.0 

Options 

RlS=Rotor Lock Socket 

(T8 Lamp only) 

Rlf1=Redio Interference 

Suppressor 

20GAIREP=20 Gauge 

Housing w/Riveted End 

Plate 

PAF=Painted After 

Fabrication 

Packaging 

U=Unit Pack 

PAL=Palletized Uncartoned 

Fixtures 

PALC=Palletized Fixtures in 

Carton 

ACCESSOR! ES 

EQ-CUP-U= T-SAR Safety 

Earthquake Clips 111 

Number of Ballasts 

1=1 Ballast 

2=2 Ballasts 

3=3 Ballasts 

NOTES: 111 An EO Grid Clip is recommended for all 9116" ceiling sy51ems. Four required per fixture. lZJProducts also available in non-US voltages and frequencies for 

international markets. 111 Not available when specifying emergencies, voltage must be specific. lot'when utilizing 28WT8 lamps, HPT8 Ba llast must be speficied. 

111 Fixtures equipped with " El"' option may require a 5- 1 12~ housing depth. If installing in field, must use tow profile battery pack. ~' 1 Specify row configuration, type in cat· 

a log number when ordering complete fixture. mlouver is recessed by 5116" in ConcealedT or Slot Grid. til For a complete listing of FifthlightTedlnology products and other 

solutions from Cooper Controls, visit www.cooperoontrol.com ~Ballast Factor is 0.88 for 4 lamp 32WT8 fixtures. 

For complete product data, reference the Fluorescent Specification binder. Specifications & dimensions subject to change without notice. Consult your Cooper Lighting 

Representative for ava ilability and ordering information. 

SHIPPING 

Catalog No. 

2GC-232A 

2GC-228TBA 

2GC-428T8A 

2GC-432A 

INFORMATION 

Wt. 

291bs. 

291bs. 

321bs. 

321bs. 

~Lighting 

VIsit our web site at www.cooper11ghtlng.com 

Customer First Center 1121 Highway 74 South Peachtree City, GA 30269 770.486.4800 FAX 770.486.4801 B/12 ADF081849

SC2 135-12-T-3/T5-SLT-FA-UNV 

Lamps: Supplled by others 

SILEA Ill SERIES 

SC2135-R 

SC2135-22-T-3/T5-SLD-FA-UNV 

PMC LIGHT ING 

;::u 

m 

() 

m 

(/) 

(/) 

m 

0 

0 

;::u 

m 

() 

-I 

.......... 

z 

0 

;::u 

m 

() 

-I 

0.18 23.39 

I~ 

23.75 OR 47.75 

5.54 TS, TSHO, BIAX VERSIONS 

23.79 

22 and 24 "T" CROSS-SECTION 

- r 

5.54 

0.2 1 24.00 

~I 

23.75 OR 47.75 

TB VERSIONS 

WHEN INSTALUNG END TO END · CONSISTENT 

FIXTURE ORIENTATION MUST BE MAINTAINED 

OPTIONS: 

Nominal Size Options: 

12 - 12" wide x 24 • long Nominal Size 

14 - 12" wide x 48" long Nominal Size 

22 - 24" wide x 24"1ong Nominal Size 

24 - 24" wide x 48" long Nominal Size 

1.82 

PRODUCT SPECIFICATION DATA: 

11 .79 

12 and 14 "T" CROSS-SECTION 

Center lens basket shifts to the side and swings down for re-lamping. Release spring loa ded latches for 

complete removal of basket if desired . Side lenses retained in fixture to prevent damage from falling out. 

but may be removed for cleaning when desired. 

Fixtures are UL listed for damp location, and have standard electronic ballasts. Each fixture is lamp tested 

at the factory before shipment. 

c 

Series Size Mounting Lamp I Type 

SC2135-R 


~aSk AI 

Side 

Diffuser Color Voltage Electrical 

Recessed 12 FL 1 BX SLD FA WHT UNV 2CIR 

Direct/Indirect 14 T 2 T5 (Standard) (Standal

1- 

u 

UJ 

0:::: 

0 

z 

......... 

1- 

u 

UJ 

0:::: 

0 

0 

UJ 

V') 

V') 

UJ 

u 

UJ 

0:::: 

RCR 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

10 

PHOTOMETRY 

70 

Model No. 

2 Lamp • 2850 Lumens • 

- Coefficient Of Utilization - 

80% 70% 50% 

50 30 70 50 30 50 30 10 

CANDELLA DISTRIBUTION 

24.00 

23.79 23.75. 47.75 

T8 LAMPING 

1.82 

23.39 

5.54 ~ P=r ~~ 1 5.54 

23.79 23.75. 47.75 

TS/TSHO/BIAX LAMPING 

SC2135-R - 000 

Speciflcotlons and Dimensions are subject to change without noHce. 

100 Gllbone Stre et I Warwick_ ltl 02886 • TEL.f01.738.7266 • FAX 401.738.0618 

www.pmclighting.com

DESCRIPTION 

COOPER LIGHTING METALUX® energy 

The SSF Series is a functional and multi-purpose standard strip family 

that incorporates premium performance and construction durability. 

Designed with our easy-to-use Flip-Up socket design, the SSF significantly 

reduces installation time. The performance and application ver· 

satility of this series can be increased by incorporating symmetrical or 

asymmetrical reflectors. The SSF Series can be installed using 

various mounting methods and numerous options and accessories 

are available. The SSF Series can be the illumination solution in commercial, 

industrial, retail and residential applications. Fixtures can be 

used in storage/utility areas, coves, display cases, shops, task and 

general area lighting. 


A ··· Construction 

Channel die cold rolled steel 

with numerous KOs for ease 

of installation. Groove for Tong 

Hanger. End plate quickly 

converts to snap-in channel 

connector for continuous row 

alignment. Lamp holder brack· 

et flips in place. Channel/wire· 

way cover secured with quarter-turn 

fasteners. 

B···Eiectrlcal* 

Ballasts are CBM!ETL Class "P" and are 

positively secured by mounting bolts. 

Rotor Lock lampholders. UUCUL listed. 

Suitable for damp locations. 

C ···Finlsh 

Multistage iron phosphate pretreatment 

ensures maximum bonding and rust 

inhibitor. Lighting upgrade, baked white 

enamel finish. Prepainted material is 

standard, PAF optional. 

A B c D 

i 

......... ,..... 

> j ( 

l r 

LJ 

0 /.-- " 

~ \ 

'- _ / I 

4-1 /4" 

(108mm] 

3-518'' 

OJ 

(93mm] 

D ··· Channei!Wireway 

Cover 

Die formed heavy gauge 

steel. Tight fit for ease of 

maintenance. Easily removed 

without use of tools. Optional 

reflector available incorporating 

silver technology enhance· 

ments (Silver Lining). Consult 

Pre Sales Technical Support. 

SSF 

117, 125 

128T8 

132, 217, 225 

228T8 

232 

328T8 

- 

332 

2', 3' OR 4' STRIP 

1, 2 OR 3 TS LAMPS 

Standard Stripl ite 


1 LAMP 

2LAMP 

J.r.-rlll 

[93mml ~ 

L 0 

L 4-1/4" _J 

[108mml 

3-r.-rill 

[93mml ~ 

LOO 

~ 

2 -518 " 1~ 

[67mml 

4-1/4" 

[108mml 

MOUNTING DATA 

ENERGY DATA 

Input Watts: 

EB Ballasts Normal Ballast Factor 

117 (20), 217 (34), 125 (23), 225 (53), 

128T8 (25), 228T8 (49), 328T8 (71), 

132 (28), 232 (58), 332 (80) 

EB Ballasts Low Ballast Factor 

125 (2 1), 225 (40), 128T8 (22), 

228T8 (44), 328T8 (64), 132 (25), 

232 (49), 332 (72) 

Ceiling Stand-Off 

Embossments 

Luminaire Efficacy Rating 

LEA= FS-88 

Catalog Number: SSF-232 

Yearly Cost of 1000 lumens, 

3000 hrs at .08 KWH ~ $2.73 


Embossments 

Hole for Toggle 

11116"[17mm) K.0.(21 

(•Reference the lamp/ballast data in the 

Technical Section for specific lamp/ballast 

requirements. 

• 0 

11 / 16 ~ x 1" KO (2 Places) 

l------------------96" (2438mmJ------------------' 


LINEAR DISCON'NECi' 

ADF081661 

Sllt~tl convenltnt m•sof 

iiiCOnnectlnl pow• .~ 

'h'-11 J 

~so

DESCRIPTION 

COOPER LIGHTING METALUX® energy 

The SSF Series is a functional and multi-purpose standard strip family 

that incorporates premium performance and construction durability. 

Designed with our easy-to-use Flip-Up socket design, the SSF significantly 

reduces installation time. The performance and application versatility 

of this series can be increased by incorporating symmetrical or 

asymmetrical reflectors. The SSF Series can be installed using 

various mounting methods and numerous options and accessories 

are available. The SSF Series can be the illumination solution in commercial, 

industrial, retail and residential applications. Fixtures can be 

used in storage/utility areas, coves, display cases, shops, task and 

general area lighting. 


A .. . constructlon 

Channel die cold rolled steel 

with numerous KOs for ease 

of installation. Groove forTong 

Hanger. End plate quickly 

converts to snap-in channel 

connector for continuous row 

alignment. Lamp holder bracket 

flips in place. Channel/wireway 

cover secured with quarter-turn 

fasteners. 

& .. ·Electrical* 

Ballasts are CBM!ETL Class "P" and are 

positively secured by mounting bolts. 

Rotor Lock lampholders. UUCUL listed. 


c .. . Finish 

Multistage iron phosphate pretreatment 

ensures maximum bonding and rust 

inhibitor. Lighting upgrade, baked white 

enamel finish. Prepainted material is 

standard, PAF optional. 

A 8 C D 

D ... channei/Wi rewey 

Cover 

Die formed heavy gauge 

steel. Tight fit for ease of 

maintenance. Easily removed 

without use of tools. Optional 

reflector available incorporating 

silver technology enhancements 

(Silver Lining). Consult 

Pre Sales Technical Support. 

·- 

SSF 

117, 125 

128T8 

132, 217, 225 

228T8 

232 

328T8 

- 

332 

2', 3' OR 4' STRIP 

1, 2 OR 3 TB LAMPS 

Standard Striplite 

~---- 4-1 /4" ----~ 

[108mm] 


MOUNTING DATA 

1LAMP 

2LAMP 

3-x;--rill 3-r.-rill 

[93mm[ ~ [93mml ~ 

L 0 LOO 

L 4-114" .J 

(108mm) 

~ 2 -518"1~ 

(67mm) 

4-1 /4M 

[108mml 

ENERGY DATA 

Input Watts: 

EB Ballasts Normal Ballast Factor 

117 (20), 217 (34), 125 (23), 225 (53), 

128T8 (25), 228T8 (49), 328T8 (71 ), 

132 (28). 232 (58). 332 (80) 

EB Ballasts Low Ballast Factor 

125 (211. 225 (40), 128T8 (22), 

228T8 (44), 328T8 (84), 132 (25), 

232 (48), 332 (72) 

Ceillng Stand-Off 

Embossments 


LER = FS-88 

Catalog Number: SSF-232 


3000 hrs at .08 KWH = $2.73 

8' 


Embossments 

Hole for Toggle 

11116" [17mml K.O. (21 

(•Reference the lamp/ballast data In the 


requirements. 

t-.-IIBCUIIY.--TVLOCAI. 

lllllllll-..- 

• 0 

!"LI~N'!'!E~A!'!R!!"'!!!D~IS!'C~OiHci 

~-----------------96 " [2438mml------------------" 


AOF081661

SSF TB 

PHOTOM ETRICS 

SSF-228T8 


F28T8-SP35-UMX· 

ECO Lamps 

2750 Lumens 



height, (1.) 1.5 x 



Test Report: 

SS232.1ES 

LEA= FS95 



.08 KWH = $2.53 


Candlepower 

Angle Along II 

929 

927 

10 916 

15 896 

20 869 

25 834 

30 792 

35 742 

45• Acrou J. 

929 929 

928 927 

926 928 

914 927 

899 936 

888 946 

876 949 

860 946 

40 687 837 934 / 

45 

50 

55 

65 

70 

75 

80 

85 

90 

627 808 

561 771 

492 727 

418 675 

J40 632 

261 698 

181 564 

106 443 

41 340 

234 

915 

889 

866 

845 

818 

776 

674 

568 

453 

J49 

' ' 

\ \ 

\ } 

11 ~/ 

\ 


SSF-232 


F032T8 Lamps 

2900 Lumens 



height, (1.) 1.6 x 



Test Report: 

SS232.1ES 

LEA= FS-88 



.08 KWH = $2.73 

Candlepower 

Angle Along II 

1017 

1007 

10 949 

15 857 

20 738 

25 588 

30 422 

35 252 

45° Acron .l 

1017 1017 

1010 1021 

986 1030 

961 1042 

906 1029 

830 978 

727 920 

632 834 

40 104 456 601 

45 

253 393 

50 

320 618 

55 

246 430 

80 

199 363 

85 

131 263 

70 

69 167 

75 

17 76 

80 

85 

90 

Effective floor cavlty reflectance 

rc 80% 70% 

70 50 30 10 70 50 30 10 

RCR 

0 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

10 

99 99 99 99 

88 83 78 74 

79 70 63 57 

71 61 53 46 

64 53 45 38 

59 47 38 32 

54 42 34 28 

50 38 30 24 

46 34 26 21 

43 31 24 19 

4{) 29 22 17 

95 95 95 96 

84 79 75 71 

75 67 61 56 

67 58 51 45 

61 s1 43 n 

56 45 37 31 

51 4{) 33 27 

48 36 29 23 

44 33 26 21 

41 30 23 18 

39 28 21 17 

20% 

sO% 30% 10% o% 

50 30 10 50 30 10 50 30 10 

88 88 88 81 81 81 75 75 76 73 

73 69 66 67 64 62 62 60 58 55 

62 57 52 57 53 49 52 49 46 43 

53 47 42 49 44 40 45 41 37 35 

47 40 35 433833 40 35 31 29 

42 35 30 38 33 28 35 31 27 24 

37 31 26 34 29 24 32 27 23 21 

34 27 22 31 26 21 29 24 20 18 

31 24 20 28 23 19 26 22 18 16 

28 22 18 26 21 17 24 20 16 14 

26 20 16 24 19 15 23 18 14 13 

rc 

rw 

RCR 

0 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

5 

7 

8 

8 

1o 

Effective floor cavity reflectance 20% 

80% 70% 

50% 30% 10% 0% 

70 so 30 10 70 50 30 10 50 so 10 50 30 10 so 30 10 

105 105 105 105 

93 87 83 78 

83 74 67 61 

75 64 56 49 

68 56 48 41 

62 50 41 35 

57 44 36 30 

534{)3226 

49 36 28 23 

46 33 25 20 

43 30 23 18 

100 100 100 100 

88 84 79 75 

79 71 65 59 

71 62 54 48 

6564464{) 

59484{)34 

54 43 35 29 

50 36 31 25 

47 35 27 22 

44 32 25 20 

41 29 22 18 

92 92 92 848484 77 77 77 74 

76 73 70 70 67 64 64 61 59 56 

65 60 55 59 56 51 54 51 47 44 

56 50 45 51 46 42 47 42 39 36 

49 43 37 45 39 36 41 36 32 30 

44 37 32 4{) 34 30 37 32 28 25 

39 32 27 36 30 26 33 28 24 22 

35 29 24 33 27 22 30 25 21 19 

32 26 21 30 24 20 27 22 19 17 

30 23 19 27 22 18 25 20 17 15 

27 21 17 25 20 16 23 18 15 13 

Zonal Lumen Summary 

Zone Lumens %Ump %Axture 

0-30 758 13.8 16.0 

0-40 1291 23.5 27.2 

0-80 2533 46.1 53.5 

0.90 3988 72.5 84.2 

90·180 751 13.6 15.8 

0·1 80 4739 86.2 100.0 


Zone Lumen• %Lamp %Axture 

0·30 830 14.3 15.6 

o-40 1411 24.3 26.6 

0-80 2753 47.5 51.8 

0·90 4288 73.9 80.7 

S0.180 1023 17.6 19.3 

0-180 5311 91.6 100.0 


SAMPLE NUMBER: SSF-232-UNV- EB81 · U 

,---' 

Number of Lamps 

(Not included) 

1;1 Lamp 

2=2 Lamps 

3=3 Lampsu 1 

SHIPPING INFORMATION 

Catalog No. 

Wt. 

SSF-117 

SSF-217 

SSF-125 

SSF-225 

SSF-128T8 

SSF-228T8 

SSF-132 

STSSF-132 

SSF-232 

STSSF-232 

I 

I 

---' 

Vottage 121 

120V; 120Volt 

277V=277 Volt 

347V=347 Volt 

UNV=Universal 

Voltage 120·277 

Wattage 

17=17WT8 (24") 

25=25WT8 (36") 

28T8=28WT8 (48") 111 

32 32 148 = WTS ") ACCESSORIES 

71bs. 

7 lbs. 

91bs. 

91bs. 

91bs. 

91bs. 

71bs. 

161bs. 

91bs. 

20 lbs. 

J 

Options"' 


G~Double Element Fuse 

EL4=Emergency Installed~''" 

(Order Separately) 

A1B/Spacer·U;Spacer 1-1/2" to 2·112" from ceiling (Use 2 

Per Fixture) 

GRP-SSf;Gripper Hanger (Use 2 Per Fixture) 

AYC·Chain/S-36" Chain Hanger (Use 1 Set Per Fixture) 

SCf;Fixed Stem Set (Specify Length) 

SCS=Swivel Stem Set (Specify Length) 

SCA=Adjustable 48" Stem Set 

CLC·SSf;Long Channel Connector SSF 

SSF·ASY-4° 1 :3" Asymmetric Reflector (Specify 2', 3', or 4') 

SSF·REV-4 1 ";3" Asymmetric Reverse Reflector SSF 

(Specify 2', 3', or 4') 

SSF-SYM-4° 1 =6" Symmetric Reflector Specify (2', 3' or 4') 

ICF-4FT·REFL=12" Symmetric Reflector 

WG/SSF-2FT:2' Wire Guard 

WGISSF·3FT ;J' Wire Guard 

WG/SSF-4FT=4' Wire Guard 

TOGGLE=Single Toggle NO. 2 (Specify Length) 

Y·TOGGLE=YToggle NO.2 (Specify Length) 

(Additional Accessories Availeble. See Options and Accessories 

Section. I 

Visit our web site at www.cooperlighting.com 

~Lighting Customer First Center 1121 Highway 74 South Peachtree City, GA 30269 770.486.4800 FAX 770.486.4801 6/10 AOF081661 

I 

ri. 

Ballast Type'" 

EBB = T8 Electronic Instant Start. 

Total Harmonic Distortion < 10% 

of Ballast 

r2 

EBB /PLUS= T8 Electronic Instant Start. 

High Ballast Factor >1.13. 

of Total Harmonic Distortion < 10% 

ast 

~ 1 or2 

ER8 = T8 Electronic Program Rapid Start. 


of Ballast 

~ r2 

ER8 /PLU$; T8 Electronic Program Start. 

High Ballast Factor >1.13. 


ast 

~ 1 or 2 

HPTS Ballast 

HBS_L= T8 Electronic Instant Start. Low Ballast Factor . 77 

HB8_= T8 Electronic Instant Start. Ballast Factor .88 

HBS_N= TS Electronic Instant Start. Normal Ballast Factor 1.0 

HB8_H=T8 Electronic Instant Start. High Ballast Factor 1.15-1.2 

HRS_DIM; T8 Electronic Program Start Step Dimming. Ballast Factor .88 

HR8_L=T8 Electronic Program Start. Low Ballast Factor .77 max. 

HR8_=T8 Electronic Program Start. Ballast Factor .88 

HR8_H=T8 Electronic Program Start. High Ballast Factor 1.15-1.2 

Options 

Rlf1=Radio Interference 

Suppressor 

6-3/18 SJT·C&P-515P= 

Cord & Plug (120V) 

(15AMP)KI 

6-3/18 SJT·C&P·L715P;Cord 

& Plug (277V) (15 AMP)'" 

PIICPI=Piug-ln Option'" 

TILW= Tandem In-Line 

Wiring Option (ConsultTILW 

Option Catalog Pagel'" 

Packaging 

U;Unlt Pack 

48=4 Bulk Packing (48" and 96") 

NOTES: 111 Avallable In 28T8 and 32 watt. Requires two ballasts for Tandem oP.!lon. 121 Products 

also available in non-US vohAOM and frequencies for International merkots. 1 "For Silverlinlng 

reflector add 55 In Catalog Number, Example: SSF-ASY-S$-.4. 141 Not available for 2' version. 1 "For 

~hi:x~~~~~~~F~~:~~~~~: 8 b~:~~ri~~P:~~':a~::~ ~~~~ns~:~~~ =~ r~~;~~~~ 

Ballast must be specified. Other ballast restrictions may appty. Consult your Cooper Lighting 

Representative for availability and ordering information. 

Speciftcatlons & dimensions subject to change without notice. Consult your Cooper Ughtlng 

Representative for availability and ordering information.

DESCRIPTION 

TheWS Series is a specification wraparound luminaire featuring energy 

efficient performance. The luminaire's characteristic clean, low profile 

design is both appealing and practically functional. TheWS Series 

utilizes a clear, low brightness, extruded acrylic refractor with injection 

molded end caps for high performance and good looks. 


., 

METALUX 

The efficient and stylish WS Series is the perfect wraparound for 

commercial spaces, schools, dormitories, offices and retail areas. 


Construction 

Housing die formed code gauge 

prime cold rolled steel. Six full 

length ribs for strength. Ballast 

cover easily removed without tools. 

Steel end plates with 7/8" KO and 

light-seal embossment. Couplers 

for continuous row mounting. 

Electrical* 

Ballasts are CBM/ETL Class "P" and 

are positively secured by mounting 

bolts. Pressure lock lampholders. 

UUCUL listed. Suitable for damp 

locations. 

Finish 

Multistage, iron phosphate 

pretreatment ensures maximum 

bonding and rust inhibitor. Lighting 

grade, baked white enamel finish. 


100% clear full thickness virgin 

acrylic prismatic refractor/lens. 

Permanent luminous injection 

molded end caps. Sides have 

inside linear prisms and bottom 

has pyramidal prisms for low 

brightness control. Lens can be 

hinged from either side in a lift and 

shift manner. 

ws 

220 

217 

240 

232 

~----- 9-7/B"I251mm] _____ _. 

2', 4' OR 8' SURFACE 

2 LAMPS 

Specification Wrap 

MOUNTING DATA 

s· 

718" [22mml K.O. (7) 

Celllng Stand-Off Embossments 

~ ® ® ® 

+ 

7-114" [32mml 

}184mml 

--e----e-----;- -;----e-----&--c? 

0 

L____~~®~----~----------~---------+------~0~ 

.. 

II 

48"[1219mml 

1.------------- 88·618" [2251mml 

"-· 90-7/8" [2308mml 

1--------------- 96" [2438mml -----------------' 

® 

-----&-- 

®0 

[83mml X=3-1/4" ~ 40-618" X [1032mml ~ 

42-718" [1089mml 

48"[1219mml 

ENERGY DATA 

Input Watts: 

EB Ballast & STD Lamps 

217 (36) 

417 (72) 

ES Ballast & STD Lamps 

220 (58) 

217 (45) 

420 (116) 

417 (90) 


LEA= FW-72 

Catalog Number: WS-232A 


3000 hrs at .08 KWH = $3.33 


t: 7·1/4" ., 

[ i184mml[ 

2 -618~ ftiBfq 

J 

X=6-114" L X 

[133mm] 9·711r 

[261mml 

~Rlighting 

www.cooperlighttng.com 

LIFT & SHIFT REFRACTOR 

Easily Removed. Hinges Either Side 

(Not Recommended For Sloped Ceiling AppHcations.) 

~~ 

Specifications and dimensions subject to change without notice. 

Consult your representative for additional options and finishes. 

•Reference the lamp/ballast data In the 


requirements. 

LAMPS CONTAIN MERCURY. DISPOSE ACCORDING 

TO LDCAL STATE OR FEDERAL LAWS 

UNEAR DISCON'iiE'Cr 

S•f• ••d coRvenient m .. ,., Df 

4isconuctiag power. 

ADF020673 

2013-01 -2911:07:00

SSF TB 

PHOTOMETRICS 

SSF-228T8 


F28T8-SP35-UMX 

ECO Lamps 

2750 Lumens 



height, (.i) 1.5 x 



Test Report: 

SS232.1ES 

LER = FS95 




.08 KWH = $2.53 

Candlepower 

Angle Along II 45• Across!. 

0 929 929 929 

5 927 928 927 

10 916 925 928 

15 896 914 927 

20 869 899 936 

25 834 888 945 

30 792 876 949 

35 742 860 946 

40 687 837 934 

45 627 808 915 

50 561 771 889 

55 492 727 866 

60 418 875 845 

65 340 632 818 

70 261 598 775 

75 181 554 674 

80 106 443 568 

85 41 340 453 

90 6 234 349 

SSF-232 


F032T8 Lamps 

2900 Lumens 



height, (.L) 1.6 x 



Test Report: 

SS232.1ES 

LER = FS-88 




.08 KWH = $2.73 

Candlepower 

Angle Along II 45" 

0 1017 1017 

5 1007 1010 

10 949 985 

15 857 961 

20 736 906 

25 588 830 

30 422 727 

35 262 632 

40 104 466 

45 0 263 

50 320 

55 246 

60 199 

65 131 

70 69 

75 17 

80 1 

85 

90 

AcroN .L 

1017 

1021 

1030 

1042 

1029 

978 

920 

834 

601 

393 

618 

430 

353 

263 

187 

76 

Effective floor cavJty reflectance 

80% 70% 

70 50 30 10 70 50 30 10 

99999999 

88 83 78 74 

79 70 63 57 

71 61 53 46 

64 53 45 36 

59 47 38 32 

54 42 34 28 

50 38 30 24 

46 34 26 21 

43 31 24 19 

40 29 22 17 

95 95 95 95 

84 79 75 71 

75 87 61 56 

87 58 51 45 

61 51 43 37 

56 45 37 31 

51 40 33 27 

46 36 29 23 

44 33 26 21 

41 30 23 18 

39 28 21 17 

20% 

SO% 

50 30 10 

888888 

73 69 66 

62 67 52 

53 47 42 

47 40 36 

42 35 30 

37 31 26 

34 27 22 

31 24 20 

28 22 18 

26 20 16 

30% 

50 30 10 

81 81 81 

87 64 62 

67 53 49 

49 44 40 

433633 

36 33 28 

34 29 24 

31 26 21 

28 23 19 

26 21 17 

24 19 15 

10% 

so 30 10 

75 75 75 

62 60 58 

62 49 46 

45 41 37 

40 35 31 

35 31 27 

32 27 23 

29 24 20 

26 22 18 

24 20 16 

23 18 14 

0% 

73 

65 

43 

35 

29 

24 

21 

18 

16 

14 

13 

1.13. 48=4 Bulk Packing (48" and S6") 

Per Fixture) 


GRP-SSF=Gripper Hanger (Use 2 Per Fixture) 

ast 

~ or2 

AYC·Chaln/Set=36" Chain Hanger (Use 1 Set Per Fixture) 

HPl8 Ballast 

SCF=Fixed Stem Set (Specify Length) 

HB8_L=T8 Electronic Instant Start. Low Ballast Factor .77 


HB8_=T8 Electronic Instant Start. Ballast Factor .88 


HB8_N= TS Electronic Instant Start. Normal Ballast Factor 1.0 

SHIPPING INFORMATION CLC-SSF=Long Channel Connector SSF 

HB8_H=T8 Electronic Instant Start. High Ballast Factor 1.15-1.2 

Catalog No. 

Wt. SSF·ASY-4 Di=3" Asymmetric Reflector (Specify 2', 3', or 4') HRS_DIM= T8 Electronic Program Start Step Dimming. Ballast Factor .88 

SSF-REV-4~ 

SSF-117 

7 lbs. 

=3" Asymmetric Reverse Reflector SSF 

HRS_L= T8 Electronic Program Start. Low Ballast Factor .77 max. 

HRS_ = T8 Electronic Program Start. Ballast Factor .88 

SSF-217 

71bs. (Specify 2', 3', or4') 

HR8_H=T8 Electronic Program Start. High Ballast Factor 1.15-1.2 

SSF-125 

Sibs. SSF-SYM-4° 1 =6" Symmetric Reflector Specify (2', 3' or 4') 

SSF-225 

Sibs. ICF-4FT-REFL=12" Symmetric Reflector 

NOTES: 111 Available in 28T8 and 32 watt. Requ ires two ballasts for Tandem option. 1 (2 Products 

SSF-128T8 

Sibs. WG/SSF-2FT=2'Wire Guard 

SSF-228T8 

Sibs. 

WG/SSF-3FT =3' Wire Guard 

SSF-132 

7 lbs. 

WG/SSF-4FT=4' Wire Guard 

STSSF-132 

161bs. 

TOGGLE=Single Toggle NO. 2 (Specify Length) 

SSF-232 

Sibs. 

STSSF-232 

20 lbs. 

Y-TOGGLE=YToggle NO.2 (Specify Length) 

C~Lighting 

(Additional Accessories Available. See Options and Accessories 

Section.) 

ri. 

also 8vallable in non-US volteges and freQuencies for lnternatiBnal markets. 111 For Silverllnlno 

reflector add SS In Catalog Number, Example: SSF-ASY-55-4. "' Not availa~e for 2' version. ~'~ 1 Fo r 

~h;:;x:~~~~~~~~:~~~erc~~·b~~~:',~~p~~~~~~~ #,~h~~~:~~ =~ r~~;~~~~ 

Ballast must be specified. Other ballast restrictions may apply. Consult your Cooper Lighting 

Representative for availability and ordering information. 

Specifications & dimensions subject to change without notice. Consult your Cooper Lighting 

Representative for availability and ordering informetion. 

Visit our web site at www.cooperlighting.com 

Customer First Center 1121 Highway 74 South Peachtree City, GA 30269 770.486.4800 FAX 770.486.4801 6/10 ADF081661

DESCRIPTION 


METALUXe 

TheWS Series is a specification wraparound luminaire featuring energy 

efficient performance. The luminaire's characteristic clean, low profile 

design is both appealing and practically functional. TheWS Series 

utilizes a clear, low brightness, extruded acrylic refractor with injection 

molded end caps for high performance and good looks. 

The efficient and stylish WS Series is the perfect wraparound for commercial 

spaces, schools, dormitories, offices and retail areas. 


Construction 

Housing die formed code gauge 

prime cold rolled steel. Six full 

length ribs for strength. Ballast 

cover easily removed without 

tools. Steel end plates with 7/8" 

KO and light-seal embossment. 

Couplers for continuous row 

mounting. Optional decorative 

end plate available. 

I 

Electrical * 

Ballasts are CBMIETL Class " P" 

and are positively secured by 

mounting bolts. Pressure lock 

lampholders. UUCUL listed. 


Finish 

Multistage, iron phosphate pretreatment 

ensures maximum 

bonding and rust inhibitor. 

Lighting grade, baked white 

enamel finish. 


100% clear full thickness virgin 

acrylic prismatic refractor/lens. 

Permanent luminous injection 

molded end caps. Sides have 

inside linear prisms and bottom 

has pyramidal prisms for low 

brightness control. Lens can be 

hinged from either side in a lift 

and shift manner. 

13-3/4" l349mm) 

rf~o:gf;Q3;z:o 1 ~' 

ws 

340 

- 

332 

4' OR 8' SURFACE 

3 LAMPS 

Specification Wrap 

1---------- 15·318" l391mm) _________...j 

MOUNTING DATA 

.- 718" 122 mm I K .. 0 171 

.-718" (22mm) K.O .. 

8' r Ceiling Stand-Off 

Embossments 

r- 

12-l/4" 

(324mm) 

t;;;;;- 

32mm) 

L:: 

4' 

® ® ® ® 

-----e--------t --------{)-------..,~ 

® I ® o 

I 

® ® ® ® 

l-~------------ 96" 

49• [1219mmJ 

8().5/8' (2048mm) 

9().7/8" (2308mm) 

(2438mm] _____________. 

ENERGY DATA 

Input Watts: 

EB Ballast & STD Lamps 

340 (110) 

332 (91) 

ES Ballast & STD Lamps 

340 (136) 

332 (108) 


LEA: FW-71 

Catalog Number: WS-332A 

Yearly Cost ol1000 lumens, 

3000 hrs at .08 KWH $3.38 


f 12-l/4" (324mm] f 

2-518" (67mm) [l'~'!J 

~Lt:x )(_] J 

(137mm] 15-l/8"(391mm) 


LIFT & SHIFT REFRACTOR 

Easily Removed. Hifl9as Either Side 

(Not Recommended For Sloped Ceiling Applications. I 

• Reference the lamp/ballast data In the 


requirements. 

-IBCIII'f.--TO U.S IJmlllfBI'IW.UIIIII 

LOCAl, 

LINEAR DISCOiNi'Ci' 

Sllt.,d convenient miMI I or 

dlannecting power. 

AOF020674 

'*" 

rJ-.'-ttJ 

•e'

WS 

PHOTOMETRICS 


Candela 

~ 

\ \ ' "" 

\ \ _,..l 

\ : 

'/ 

II ~/ ' 

/ 

WS-232A 

Energy Saving 

Ballast 

F32T8/35L Lamps 

2850 Lumens 



height, (.L ) 1.4 x 



Test Report: 

WS232A.IES 

LER = FW-72 



.08 KWH = $3.33 

\ 


rc 80% 70% 

rw 70 50 30 10 70 50 30 10 

RCR 

0 92 92 92 92 88 88 88 88 

84 81 78 75 81 78 75 72 

2 77 71 66 62 74 69 64 60 

3 71 63 57 53 68 61 56 51 

4 66 57 50 45 63 55 49 44 

5 60 50 44 39 57 49 43 38 

6 55 45 39 34 53 44 38 33 

7 51 41 34 29 49 39 33 29 

8 47 37 30 26 45 35 29 25 

9 43 33 26 22 42 32 26 22 

10 40 30 24 19 39 29 23 19 


Zone Lumens %Lamp %Fixture 

0-30 1080 18.9 23.5 

0-40 1810 31.8 39.4 

0-60 3031 53.2 66.0 

0-90 3748 65.7 81.7 

90-180 842 14.8 18.3 

0-180 4589 80.5 100.0 

20% 

50% 30% 10% 0% 

50 30 10 50 30 10 50 30 10 0 

81 81 81 75 75 75 69 69 69 66 

71 69 67 66 64 62 61 59 58 55 

63 60 57 59 56 53 54 52 50 47 

57 52 49 53 49 46 49 46 43 41 

51 46 42 47 43 40 44 41 38 36 

45 40 36 42 36 34 39 36 33 31 

41 36 32 38 34 30 36 32 29 27 

37 32 28 35 30 26 32 28 25 24 

33 28 24 31 26 23 29 25 22 20 

30 25 21 28 23 20 26 22 19 18 

27 22 18 25 21 18 24 20 17 15 


Room Size (Ft.) 

20 X 20 

30 X 30 

30 X 60 

60 X 30 

60x60 

Height Along Height Across 

8.5' 10.0' 8.5' 10.0' 

68 73 67 73 

62 66 58 64 

53 56 44 50 

63 66 61 68 

53 56 46 51 

Angle Along II 45° 

0 1337 1337 

10 1317 1326 

20 1250 1292 

30 1140 1230 

40 983 1107 

50 717 769 

60 339 423 

70 207 264 

80 113 174 

90 14 108 

100 18 185 

110 26 229 

120 32 176 

130 36 110 

140 35 91 

150 30 60 

160 26 48 

170 24 30 

180 22 22 

Across.L 

1337 

1333 

1324 

1281 

1149 

725 

414 

281 

285 

278 

346 

331 

260 

151 

101 

90 

59 

33 

22 


SAMPLE NUMBER : WS -232A - 120V-EBB1-U 

A=Wide Body for 2 Lamps 

Number of Lamps 121 • 1 ' 1 

2=2 Lamps 

(Not Included) 

Wattage 

20=20WT12 (24") 

17=17WT8 (24") 

32=32WT8 (48") 

40=40WT12 (48") 

Ballast Start Type 

LTS=LowTrigger Start 

(20 Watt only) 

(120V only) 

HTS=High Trigger 

Start (20 Watt only) 

Voltage"' 

120V=120Volt 

277V=277 Volt 

347V=347 Volt 

UNV=Universal Voltage 

120·277~ 1 

Options 



EL=Emergency Installed'" 

Ballast Type "' 

Blank=Standard Magnetic T12 Ballast 

LE3= T12 Magnetic Energy Saving 

EBB_ = T8 Electronic Instant Start. 

Total Harmonic Distortion < 200/o 

~ 

. of Ballast 

r2 

EBB_ /PLUS= T8 Electronic Instant Start. 

High Ballast Factor> 1.13. Total 

· of Harmonic Distortion < 20% 

last 

~ r2 



ri. 

of Ballast 

r2 

EB2_=T12 Electronic Rapid Start. 

~. of Ballast 

I ;·~r 2 

Options 

RIF1=Radio Interference 

Suppressor 

RLS=Rotor-Locl< Socket 

(TS Lamps Only) 

(See options & accessories) 

Lens 

A=Acrylic Refractor Lens 

NOTES: 111 Steel endplates with 7/8- KO standard for continuous row mounting. 121 Stem mounting not available on 3-lamp fixtures. 111 2 point suspension recommended 

for 2 end 4-lemp fixtures. 141 Products also available in non-US voltages and frequencies for International markets. 111 Not available when specifying 

emergencies, voltage must be specific. 1 ' 1 Non available for 2' version. 

For complete product data, reference the Fluorescent Specification binder. Specifications & dimensions subject to cflange without notice. Consult your Cooper 

Lighting Representative for availability and ordering Information. 

C~Lighting 

www.cooperlightlng.com 

LAMP SPACING (8") 

(2 Lamp Housing with a· lamp 

spacing also available). 

r [324mml 

12-314"il 

2-518~ r! '£PJ 'rJ 

X=B· i•X•I 

(162mm] L- 16-318 ~ ___J 

[391mm) 

Catalog Number 

WS-A-232A (120V or 277V) 


Customer First Center 1121 Highway 74 South Peachtree City, GA 30269 770.486.4800 FAX 770 468.4801 

ACCESSORIES 

(Order Separately) 

SCF=Fixed Stem Set (Specify Length) 



A1B/Spacei'U=Spacer 1-1/2" to 2·1/2" 

from ceiling (Use 2 per fi>

ws 

PHOTOMETRICS 

' 

\ '\ 

" 

\ ; ~ .l 

\' 

11 -:>' 

/ 

\ 

\ 

WS-332A 

Energy Saving 

Ballast 

F32T8/35K Lamps 

2850Lumens 



height, (.L) 1.4 x 



Test Report: 

WS332A.IES 

LER = FW-71 



.08 KWH = $3.38 




rc 80% 70% 

rw 70 50 30 10 70 50 30 10 

RCR 

0 98 98 98 98 94 94 94 94 

90 86 83 80 86 83 80 77 

2 82 76 71 67 79 74 69 65 

3 76 68 62 57 73 66 60 56 

4 70 61 54 49 67 59 53 48 

5 64 54 47 42 62 53 46 41 

6 59 49 42 37 57 47 41 36 

7 55 44 37 32 53 43 36 31 

8 50 39 32 28 48 38 32 27 

9 46 35 29 24 45 34 28 24 

10 43 32 25 21 41 31 25 21 


Zone Lumens 

0-30 1849 

0·40 3092 

0·60 5178 

0·90 6273 

90·180 928 

0·180 7201 

SAMPLE NUMBER : WS · 332A· 120V· EB81 · U 

Width 

Blank=Standard 

(Wide Body) 

Number of Lamps 

31amps 

(Not Included) 

Wattage (Length) 

32=32WT8 (48") 

Lens 

A=Acrylic Refractor/Lens 

20% 

50% 30% 10% 0% 

50 30 10 50 30 10 50 30 10 0 

88 88 88 82 82 82 76 76 76 73 

77 75 73 72 70 69 68 66 65 62 

69 65 62 65 62 59 61 58 56 54 

62 57 53 58 54 51 55 52 49 47 

55 50 46 52 48 44 49 46 43 41 

50 44 40 47 42 38 44 40 37 35 

45 39 35 42 37 34 40 36 33 31 

40 35 30 38 33 30 36 32 29 27 

36 31 26 34 29 26 33 28 25 23 

33 27 23 31 26 22 29 25 22 20 

30 24 20 28 23 20 27 22 19 18 


Height Along Height Aero"" 

%Lamp %Fixture Room Size (Ft.) 8.5' 10.0' 8.5' 10.0' 

21.6 25.7 20x 20 

65 69 64 70 

EL=Emergency Installed 1 ' 1 

36.2 42.9 

30 x30 

58 62 55 61 

60.6 71.9 

30 X 60 

49 53 41 47 

73.4 87.1 SOx 30 

60 63 58 63 

10.8 12.9 60x60 

50 52 42 48 

84.2 100.0 

Ballast Type m 

STarting Type 

E88 = T8 Electronic Instant Start. 

LTS=LowTrigger Start 


(20 Watt only) 

(120V only) 

of Ballast 

HTS=High Trigger ~ or 3 

Start (20 Watt only) 

E88 /PLUS= T8 Electronic Instant Start. 

High Ballast Factor >1. 13. 

of Total Harmonic Distortion 

Voftage 111 

< 20% 

ast 

120V=120Volt 

~ or 3 

277V=277 Volt 


347V=347 Volt 


UNV=Universal Voltage 

of Ballast 

120·277° ~ 1 

or3 

Options 



Candela 

Angle Along II 45' 

0 2293 2293 

10 2259 2274 

20 2149 2213 

30 1962 2093 

40 1688 1680 

50 1167 1311 

60 606 686 

70 337 407 

80 186 249 

90 21 140 

100 23 231 

110 29 261 

120 34 176 

130 36 104 

140 38 91 

150 37 71 

160 33 48 

170 29 32 

180 26 26 

Options 

RIF1 =Radio Interference 

Suppressor 

(See options & accessories) 

Across.L 

2293 

2290 

2265 

2183 

1987 

1269 

655 

386 

417 

341 

405 

376 

266 

124 

99 

91 

66 

36 

26 

NOTES: 111 Products also available in non-US voltages and frequencies for International maf1cets. 121 Not available when specifying emefBenctes, vottage must be specific. 131 Stem mounting not available on 3-lamp fixtures. 

141 2 point suspension recommended for 2 and 4-lamp fixtures. 111 Steel endplates with 7/8. KO standard for continuous row mounting. Non available for 2' version. 

For complete product data, reference the Fluorescent Specification binder. Specifications & dimensions subject to change without notice. Consult your Cooper Ughting Representative for availability and ordering Information. 

SHIPPING INFORMATION 

catalog No. 

WS·332A 

BTWS·332A 

Wt. 

161bs. 

31 lbs. 

C~Lighting 

Visit our web site at www.cooperllghting.com 

Customer First Center 1121 Highway 74 South Peachtree City, GA 30269 770.486.4800 FAX 770.486.4801 11 / 11 ADF020674

DESCRIPTION - H7 LED DOWNLIGHT TRIMS 

Halo H7 LED Collection consists of 6" recessed down lights with 

ML7 Series LED Retrofit Modules and 49x Series trims; and H750x 

Series LED housings. Halo H7 LED Down light trims are offered in 

open and lensed, baffles and reflectors; and wet location shower 

rated models. Trims are compatible with H7 Collection 600, 900, 

and 1200 Series LED downlight modules (see also LED module 

specification sheets). Halo LED offers high quality, fit, finish, and 

performance in an energy-efficient, high-efficacy down light. 

HALO 


MECHANICAL 

Baffles and Reflectors 

• Precision formed aluminum 

• Reflector Finishes offered in 

White, Specular Clear, Haze, 

Satin Nickel, and Tuscan Bronze 

• Baffle Finishes offered in White 

and Black 

Trim Rings 

• Durable die-cast aluminum 

• Precision keyed slots designed 

to lock with matching keyed 

bosses in ML7 LED modules 

• Works with LED module's 

heat sink to provide further 

thermal conduction away from 

the LED 

• Standard finishes offered in 

White, Black, Satin Nickel, and 

Tuscan Bronze. 

• Optional, thin profile trim rings 

offered in White, Black, 

Satin Nickel, Tuscan Bronze, 

and Polished Chrome finishes. 

• Thin profile designer trim 

rings provide slimmer ceiling 

appearance. 

Thickness dimensions: 

0.120" at OD and 0.180" at ID. 

FEATURES 

• Superior optical design 

provides high lumen output, 

smooth beam distribution, and 

good visual comfort 

• Precision design and materials 

for a high-quality fit and finish 

• Multiple trim options allow 

Halo H7 LED recessed 

down lights to be used in a wide 

range of interior spaces 

• High-quality standard and 

plated finishes 

• Solite® lensed trims offer 

high-clarity glass for highlumen 

transmission along 

with a subtle diffusion of source 

brightness 

• Solite® and Frost Glass Lensed 

models are UUcUL listed 

for Wet Location, protected 

ceilings, and are IP66 Ingress 

Protection rated for dust and 

water 

• H7 LED trims offer ENERGY 

STAR® Qualification when 

used with designated Halo 

ML7x LED modules* 

• Can be used to meet State 

of California Title 24 

and International Energy 

Conservation Code -IECC 

High Efficacy requirements 

when used with designated LED 

modules* 

Warranty 

Cooper Lighting provides a three 

year limited warranty on Halo 

LED Luminaires which includes 

the LED Recessed Housing, LED 

Light Engine, and LED trims. 

.. 

II 

Qualified & Compliant as 

designated with LED 

Modules andTrim. * 

H7 LED 

Down light 

Trims 

49x Series 

6-lnch LEDTrims 

FOR USE WITH ML7x 

LED MODULES 

High Efficacy LED 

Compatible with 

ML7 Standard and 

Emergency LED 

Modules 

COMPATIBLE ML7 SERIES LED MODULES 

2700°K ,.,., 3000°K -.. 

II fl*_ ... .___ "* I l J 

m.: ~ ... '1_._ .. 

600 Series Ml706827 600 Series Ml706830 

900 Series ML7098271CAT1200 900 Series Ml7098301CAT120D 

1200 Series Ml7098271CAT1200 1200 Series ML7098301CAT120D 

3500°K - 

~-~·~--1 

600 Series ML706835 

900 Series Ml7098351CAT1200 

1200 Series Ml7098351CAT120D 

4000°K ....... 

n.. ... -~--l 

600 Series ML706840 

900 Series ML7098401CAT1200 

1200 Series ML7098401CAT120D 

* Refer to www.cooperlighting.com for product specification sheets, and the qualified selection of H7 LED Modules and Trims. 

,_ 

COOPER Lighting 

ADV110422 

rev 3/30/2012

H7 LED Down light Trlma 

49x Sarlaa 

H7 LED DOWNLIGHT SERIES - LED TRIMS 

\ 

1-- ,_,,,. -----1 

, (12SmmJ 

1------ r,~4'~~~ ----< 

2· 1/4' 

'"t I \ 

495WW06 

Wall Wash 

Wall wash downlight- Semi-Specular clear 

reflector, with Specular Wall Wash optic, 

diffusing lens and White Trim Ring. 

495PWW06 

Wall Wash 

Wall wash downlight - White reflector, with 

Specular Wall Wash optic, diffusing lens and 

White Trim Ring . 

OPEN REFLECTOR AND BAFFLE TRIMS 

[571'1''"1 ,.L- I \ 

Lc==:====.==*=. 

I 

- 4-7{8' __j ' 

(125rJ''f1] _:_j 

7- 1/4' 

- --l18

H7 LED Down light Trlma 

49x Sarles 

H4 LED DOWN LIGHT SERIES - LED TRIMS 

REFLECTOR AND BAFFLE TRIMS WITH SOLITE® REGRESSED LENS 

Wet Location Listed and IP66 Rated . 

4·1/~- ~-' 

(107mmJ 

[ 1~~ ~~·~, --~ 

493SCS06 

Specular Clear Reflector with Solite® Regressed 

Lens, White Ring 

493HS06 

Haze Reflector with Solite® Regressed Lens, 

White Ring 

2-t/a· 

(54 m!"1] 

L ~:d=========*==~ 

I '~ •-•1• · J 

j · 

I 

[107mfTI] 

;.___ [ 1~,~~~ --_j 

493TBZS06 

Tuscan Bronze Reflector with Solite® Regressed 

Lens, Tuscan Bronze Ring 

493SNS06 

Satin Nickel Reflector with Solite® Regressed 

Lens, Satin Nickel Ring 

y----- 

2·1/8" -="""'"""'""""~ 

[!i4mmj 

493WBS06 

White Baffle with Solite ® Regressed Lens, 

White Ring 

493BBS06 

Black Baffle with Solite ® Regressed Lens, 

White Ring 

!-- 4·1/4. ~~' 

[107mm] 

~--- , ,~.~~~~ ---~ 

493PS06 

White Reflector with Solite ® Regressed Lens, 

White Trim Ring. 

Lighting 

www.cooperlighting.com

H7 LED Down light Trim a 

49x Sarlaa 

H4 LED DOWN LIGHT SERIES- LED TRIMS 

FROST LENS SHOWER TRIM 

Wet Location Listed For Shower Applications 

'----- 7-1/

DESCRIPTION 

6 inch LED recessed wide beam downlight specially designed for LED 

technology. Two-stage reflector system produces smooth distribution 

with excellent light control and low aperture brightness. Lumen packages 

include 1000 and 1500 delivered lumens with color temperatures of 

2700K, 3000K, 3500K, 4000K. Suitable for commercial construction and 

exceeds high efficacy requirements (with designated trims) for Energy 

Star, Title 24-2008 and IECC-2009. 

PORTFOLIOTM 


Lower Shielding Reflector 

Self-flanged, spun .050" thick 

aluminum lower reflector in 

combination with a lensed upper 

optical chamber provides superior 

lumen output with minimal source 

brightness. Available in all Portfolio 

Alzak® finishes. 

Trim Retention 

Lower reflector is retained with two 

torsion springs holding the flange 

tightly to the finished ceiling 

surface. 

Plaster Frame I Collar 

New Construction Housing: Die 

cast aluminum 1-1/2" deep collar 

accommodates ceiling materials up 

to 2". Remodel Housing: 

Galvanized steel plaster ring 

adjusts to accept up to 1" ceiling 

thickness. 

Universal Mounting Bracket 

Accepts 1/2" EMT. C channel and 

bar hangers and adjusts 5" 

vertically from above and below 

the ceiling (new construction 

housing only). 

~RLighting 

www.cooperllghting.com 

I L_ 55/8" l143mm~_j I 

L 6 3/8"l162mmj__j 

7" l176mml 

I L_ 5 5/8" l143mmE:j_j I 

L 6 3/8" l162mmJ__j 

Ceiling Cutout 

7"1176mmJ 

Junction Box 

(4) 1/2" and (2) 3/4" trade size pry 

outs positioned to allow straight 

conduit runs. Listed for (8) #12 

AWG (four in, four out) gooc 

conductors and feed thru branch 

wiring. 

Thermal 

Extruded aluminum heat sink 

conducts heat away from the LED 

module for improved performance 

and longer life. 

LED 

LED system contains a plurality of 

high brightness white LED's 

combined with a high reflectance 

upper reflector and convex 

transitional lens producing even 

distribution with no pixilation. 

Rated for 50,000 hours at 70% 

lumen maintenance. Auto 

resetting, thermally protected, 

LED's are turned off when safe 

operating temperatures are 

exceeded. Color variation within 3- 

step MacAdam ellipses. Flexible 

disconnect allows for tool-less 

replacement of LED engine from 

below ceiling. 

~l 

fn">. 5 5/8" 

\...V' (141.7mmj 

~ 

NEW CONSTRUCTION 

REMODEL 

5 5/8" 

(141.7mml 

I 

Note: Max Opening 6 1/2" l165mml 

Driver 

Driver can be serviced from above 

or through the aperture. 

Environmental 

Fixture should not be operated in 

ambient temperatures above 40° C. 

Code Compliance 

Thermally protected and cULus 

listed for protected wet locations. 

IP54 Certified. Optional City of 

Chicago environmental air (CCEA) 

marking for plenum applications. 

EMI/RFI emissions per FCC 47CFR 

Part 18 Class B consumer limits. 

Non-IC rated- Insulation must be 

kept 3" from top and sides of 

housing. RoHS Compliant. Title 24 

2008 Compliant with designated 

trims. ARRA Compliant. 

Photometric testing completed in 

accordance with IES LM 79 

standards. LED life testing 

completed in accordance with LM 

80 standards. 

Warranty 

5 year warranty. 



LD610 

LD615 

LD6R10 

LD6R15 

6LW 

LED 

&Inch 

Wide Beam Downlight 

New Construction or Remodel 

Qualified & Compllant wltlt designated 

LED modulu and trims. 

Energy Data 

Sound Rating: Class A standards 

Operating Temperature: 40"C (104"Fl 

1500 Lumen 

(Values at non-dimming line voltage ) 

EMI/RFI: FCC TWo 47 CFR, Part 18, Class B 

{Consumed 

Input Vokage: UNV ISOV • 305V) 

Power Factor: :>0.90 (at nominal input 

120/2311/240m7VAC & 100% of Rated OuputPowerl 

Input Power: 24.8W THO: 0.90 

Input Power: 14.3W THO:

l0610 lD61 5 6lW 

PORTFOLIOTM 


Example: 

LD6150010 ERW6835 6lWOLI = 6"lED Wide Reflector lens, 1500 lumen 3,500 K CCTwith Universal 120 • 277V, 0 • 10 Driver 

Housing 

Delivered 

Lumens 1 

Driver 

Options 

Power 

Module Color Reflector 

Finish 

Accessories 

LD6 = 6" aperture 

LD6CP= 6" 

aperture, Chicago 

Plenum 

LD&R = 6" aperture 

remodel 

LD6RCP = 6" 

aperture remodel, 

Chicago Plenum 

D010 = 10 to 100% 

dimming, 120·277V, 

50/60Hz, 0-10V 

D120 = 15 to 100% 

dimming, 120V, 2 

wire phase control, 

(1000 lumen only) 

DLUT = 1 to 100% 

dimming, 120·277V 

Lutron Hi-lume 

remote test 

switch 2 

EMBOD= 

Bodine 

Emergency 

module with 

remote test 

switch 2 • 4 

827 = 80 CRI, 2700" K 

830 = 80 CRI, 3000" K 

835 = 80 CRI, 3500" K 

840 = 80 CRI, 4000" K 

reflector, polymer 

trim ring 

6LW1 =Wide 

reflector, self 

flanged (not 

available 

with baffles) 

827CP = 80 CRI, 2700" K, Chicago Plenum 

830CP = 80 CRI , 3000" K, Chicago Plenum 

835CP = 80 CRI , 3500" K, Chicago Plenum 

840CP = 80 CRI, 4000" K, Chicago Plenum 

Notes: 1 Nominal delivered lumens will vary depending on selected CCT. driver and reflector finish. 

2 Not available with Chicago Plenum. 

3 Order trim with polymer trim ring (Consult specification sheet for color ordering information and options). 

4 Not CSA approved. 

U = Specular Clear 

H = Semi-Specular Clear 

WMH =Warm Haze 

G = Specular Gold 

WH=Wheat 

WHH =Wheat Haze 

GP = Graphite 

GPH = Graphite Haze 

CC = Chocolate 

CCH =Chocolate Haze 

K =Cognac 

KH = Cognac Haze 

B =Specular Black 

W = Gloss White 

BB = Black Baffle 

(6lWOonly) 

WB =White Baffle 

(6lWO only) 

HB26 = C Channel Bar Hanger, 26" long, 

Pair 

HB50 = C Channel Bar Hanger, 50" long, 

Pair 

RMB22 =Wood Joist Bar Hanger, 22" 

long, Pair 

H277 = 277 to 120V Step Down 

transformer, 300VA 

H347 = 347 to 120V Step Down 


H347200 = 347 to 120V Step Down 


HSA6 =Slope Adapter for 6" Aperture 

Housings, Specify Slope 

TRM6 = Metal Trim Ring, Specify Color' 

TRR6 = Rimless Trim Ring' 

DT6 = Deco trim, 

LGSKT61P66 = IP66 Gasket Kit 

ABR6P = Remodel Adaptor Ring for 7" OD 

ABR7P = Remodel Adaptor Ring for 8" OD 

ABRSP = Remodel Adaptor Ring for 9" OD 

PHOTOMETRICS 

Candela Distribution 


Test No. P20530 

LD615835D010 6LW51H 

Lumens = 1322 

Watts= 24.8 

LPW= 54.2 

CCT =3500K 

SC= 1.1 

Cone of Light 

Distance 

Fixture to 

lighted Plane 

lnilial 

Footcandlas 

at Nadir 

Beam 

Diameter 

Degrees Candela Zone Lumens 

Vertical 0·30 663 

0 889 0-40 998 

5 876 0·60 1298 

15 839 0·90 1322 

25 746 90-180 0 

35 540 0· 180 1322 

45 274 

luminance 

55 94 

65 17 Average Candela/MZ 

75 3 

Degrees Avg. o• Luminance 

%Fixture 

50.2 

75.5 

98.2 

100.0 

0.0 

100.0 

5'5" 29 

7' 18 

8' 14 

9' 11 

10' 9 

6' 

8' 

9' 

10' 

11' 

85 1 45 47778 

90 0 55 20207 

65 4960 

75 1429 

85 1415 

PHOTOMETRICS 

Candela Distribution 


Test No. P20529 

LD615835D01 0 6LW51 Ll 

Lumens= 1427 

Watts=24.8 

LPW = 57.5 

CCT =3500K 

SC= 1.1 

Cone of Light 

Distance 

FixttJreto 

llghted Plane 

lnnial 

Rlotcandles 

at Nadir 

Beam 

Diameter 

Degrees Candela Zone Lumens 

Vertical 0·30 780 

0 964 0·40 1153 

5 966 0·60 1420 

15 997 0·90 1426 

25 885 90·180 0 

35 601 0·180 1426 

45 275 

55 57 

65 3 

75 1 

luminance 

Average Candela/M2 

Degrees Avg. o• Luminance 

%Fixture 

54.7 

80.9 

99.6 

100.0 

0.0 

100.0 

5'5' 32 

7' 20 

8' 15 

9' 12 

10' 10 

6.5' 

8' 

9' 

10.5' 

11 .5' 

85 0 45 47953 

90 0 55 12253 

65 875 

75 476 

85 0 

coo=:a Lighting 




ADP100519 

2011·08-22

LD610 LD615 6LW 

PORTFOLIOTM 

PORTFOLIO LD6* IECC and T24 COMPLIANT HOUSING/TRIM COMPATIBILITY 

Q LD6*15D010 ERW827 . .. 

C) 

LD6*15D010 ERW830 . w~ C) 

a._ c LD6*15D01 0 ERW835 

:::I:E . LD6*15D010 ERW840 . . 

Oc( 

a:u.. LD6*10D120 ERW827 C) 

e>a: N . 

U)W 

LD6*10D120 ERW830 

Q LD6*10D120 ERW835 

C>2: za: . . . LD6*100120 ERW840 

c;;c . . . . . 

:::1>- 

... 

010 ..J 

:::1 :X: c . . . . . 

. . . . . 

U) 6LW*LI** 6LW*LI** 6LW*LI** 6LW*LI** 6LW*LI** 

:e 6LW*W** 6LW*W** 6LW*W** 6LW*W** 

ii: 

1- 

6LW*G** 6LW*G** 6LW*G** 

C) 6LW*H** 6LW*H** 6LW*H** 

z 6LW*WH** 6LW*WH** 6LW*WH** 

~ 

6LW*WHH** 6LW*WHH** 6LW*WHH** 

6LW*WMH** 

6LW*WMH** 

:::::i 

c( 6LW*WB** 

:::1 6LW*GP** 

a 

CHICAGO PLENUM HOUSINGS/TRIMS ARE ONLY IECC QUALIFIED. FOR CHICAGO PLENUM HOUSINGS SUBSTITUTE 

LD6CP• FOR LD6* IN ABOVE MATRIX 

PORTFOLIO LD6* ENERGY STAR QUALIFIED 

HOUSINGfTRIM COMPATIBILITY 

LD6*15D010 ERW827 . 

c C) 

.... LD6*15D010 ERW830 . . 

w~ C) 

o.._ Q . LD6*150010 ERW835 

;:::)~ LD6*150010 ERW840 ~Lf . LD6*100120 ERW827 C) 

e>a::: N . LD6*100120 ERW830 . 

ti'JW 

.... 

Q . LD6*100120 ERW835 

e>> 

. . LD6*100120 ERW840 

u;c 

z" 

. . . 

;:::)>- ... 

:::::1 . OIXI ..J 

::J: Q 

. . . . 

6LW*LI** 6LW*U•* 6LW*LI** 

U) 

~ 

6LW*W** 6LW*W** 6LW*W** 

6LW*G** 6LW*G** 6LW*G** 

1- 6LW*H** 6LW*H** 6LW*H** 

" C) 6LW*WH** 6LW*WH** 6LW*WH** 

z 6LW*WHH** 6LW*WHH** 6LW*WHH** 

> 

LL. 6LW*WB** 6LW*WB** 6LW*WB** 

::i 6LW*WMH** 6LW*WMH** 6LW*WMH** 

c( 6LW*GP** 6LW*GP** 

;:::) 

6LW*K** 

6LW*K** 

a 

6LW*GPH** 

FOR CHICAGO PLENUM QUALIFIED HOUSING/TRIMS SUBSTITUTE LD6CP* 

FOR LD6* SHOWN IN ABOVE MATRIX 

C~Lighting 

www.cooperllghtlng.com 



ADP100519 

2011-08-22

DESCRIPTION 

LPX Series LED Exit is a polycarbonate unit suitable for general purpose 

applications. With the new advanced standard features and industry 

leading innovations, they are now the most universal, energy friendly, 

easiest to stock and install, and safest Exits in their class. 


SURE-LITES® 


Electrical 

- General Features 

- Field selected red and green sign 

capability standard on all units 

(units shipped red, field convert 

to green with supplied parts). 

- Dual Voltage Input 120/277VAC, 

60Hz 

- AC Only 

- Optional 2C (Two circuit, FTBR) 

available in 120/277 VAC in 

standard and emergency 

operation 

- Self Powered 

- Sure-Lites EZ Key patented 

external battery disconnect 

feature- prevents 

unnecessary battery drainage, 

saves on installation time 

- Solid-state Voltage Limited 

Charger 

- Brownout Circuit 

- Low-Voltage Disconnect 

-Test Switch/Power 

Indicator Light 

-Standard 24 hour recharge 

time (max) 

- Eagle Eye 'M Self-Diagnostic 

feature available as option 

Housing Construction 

- All components are injection 

molded, color stable, high impact 

UL 94-5VA rated polycarbonate 

material 

-White or black textured finish 

standard 

- Components are of snap-fit 

construction to facilitate under 

5-minute installation 

- Reinforcing ribs throughout to 

provide maximum strength 

-Molded-in wireways facilitate 

internal wire routing and 

connections 

- All components including battery 

and electronics are located inside 

the exit housing 

-Snap-out or snap-in chevron 

directional indicators have full 

3/4" stroke 

-Knockout provided on housing 

for surface attachment 

-Universal exits can be field 

configured as single face or 

double face 

- Snap-fit canopy with captive 

mounting screws included 

with all exits 

-Exit can be ceiling, wall, or 

end mounted 

- Universal J-box mounting pattern 

Lamp Data 

- AC LED: Red and green LED 

lamps provide uniform 

diffused illumination 

- DC: Red and green LED DC 

lamps (Brighter in 

emergency mode) 

Code Compliance 

- UL 924 Listed 

- UL Damp Location (0-40° C) 

- Life Safety NFPA 101 

- NEC/OSHA 

- Most State and Local Codes 

- Suitable for Floor Proximity 

Installation 

- UL Listed for 2C (FTBR) 

-Patent Numbers 5,735.498 and 

5,678,336 

Warranty 

- Exit: 1-Year 

- Battery: 15-year pro-rata 

,?t:Ea.gle Eye 

""""""'""' 

LPX 

SERIES 

POLYCARBONATE EXIT 

SURFACE MOUNT 

LED LAMPS 

EXIT LIGHTING 

ENERGY DATA 

Maximum power consumption 

under all charge conditions: 

AC Only. 120V ·Red 

Amps: 0.07 

Watts: 0.98 

Power Factor: 0.12 

4 1/2" 

AC Only, 120V- Green 

Amps: 0.07 

Watts: 1.02 


1[114mm]l 

AC Only. 277V - Red 

Amps: 0.07 

Watts: 1.04 


l 

13" [330mm] __j 

0 

AC Only. 277V - Green 

Amps: 0.07 

Watts: 1.12 


Self Powered. 1 20V - Red 

Amps: 0.07 

Watts: 0.98 


Self Powered. 120V- Green 

Amps: 0.07 

Watts: 1.00 


Self Powered, 277V - Red 

Amps: 0.07 

Watts: 1.03 

Powe r Factor: 0.06 

co~ Lighting 

Self Powered, 277V - Green 

Amps: 0.07 

Watts: 1.09 





ADX100035 pc 

2011-07-1811 :35:26


LPX SERIES 

Somplo Numb"': LPX7, LPX7SD90, LPX6SG8, LPX7SD23050 

Available Accessories (Order Sep3rstefy} 

Face Options 

Blank= Single and Double 

Housing Finish 

Blank =White 

BK=Biack 

Options 

Blank= No additional options 

2C =Two Circuit Option (LPX6 onlyl 

SD=Self Diagnostics Option (LPX7 onlyj 

22050=220V 50 Hz 

23050=230V 50 Hz 

24050=240V 50 Hz 

34760=347V 60Hz 

SD Options 

Blank= No additional options 

20=Fiasher 

90= Fire Alarm Interface 

Pnotectlon Devices 

WG10 =Wall mount wire guard 

WGS11 =Ceiling or End 

VS1 = Polycarbonate Vandal Shield 

VS1WP=Polycarbonate Vandal Shield, 

Weather Proof 

Pendant Kh 

LPX18PKWH=18" Pendant Kit, White 

LPX18PKHTWH=18" Hang True 

Pendant Kit, White 

LPX18PKBK=18" Pendant Kit, Black 

LPX18PKHTBK= 18" Hang True 

Pendant Kit, Black 

1 Also available In stock LPX6 and LPX7 units with the Initial setup as Green wtth the capability to convert to Red in the field. To order these unfts, p~ase use the catalog number LPXS..G or LPX7-G. 

TECHNICAL DATA 

Lamps 

LPX Series Exits use energy efficient, long life 

LED's to provide uniform diffuse illumination of 

the exit face. These red and green LEOs require 

no maintenance and consume less than one 

watt, on average. 

Housing Construction 

Rugged, durable, injection molded 

polycarbonate materials are used throughout 

the LPX Series Exits. All structural components 

are designed with reinforcing ribs to add 

additional rigidity and to maximize structural 

integrity. These materials are impact and scratch 

resistant, and they have been UV stabilized to 

resist discoloration due to age and ultraviolet 

radiation. All components are designed to be of 

snap-fit construction - no mechanical fastenersto 

facilitate installation in under 5-minutes. Any 

components required for installation (wirenuts, 

wire leads, universal metal J-box bracket, etc.) 

are all included with each exit. The universal 

design of the LPX Series Exits enables universal 

exits to be configured as single face or double 

face in the field. All LPX Series Exits can be wall, 

ceiling, or end mounted; a rugged, snap-fit, low 

profile canopy with captive screws is included 

with every exit for ceiling and end mounting 

applications. 

Lens 

Lenses for the LPX Series Exits are made from 

durable, impact resistant polycarbonate. All exit 

faces are designed with full 3/4" stroke snap-out 

or snap-in chevron directional indicators to 

insure maximum visibility and compliance with 

the latest codes. Units come with red lenses 

installed and green lenses included for field 

selectable red or green signs. 

Sure-Lites EZ Key External Battery 

Disconnect (Self Powered Only) 

Patented technology that allows installers to 

externally control the battery connection. Better 

than line latching, allows installers to choose 

when the battery is connected so that it stays 

fresh longer. Allows battery to be disconnected 

after installation but before building is occupied, 

enabling emergency circuit to be shut down for 

power savings. 

Brownout Circuit (Self Powered Only) 

The brownout circuit on Sure-Lites' exits 

monitors the flow of AC current to the exit and 

activates the emergency lighting system when a 

predetermined reduction of AC power occurs. 

This dip in voltage will cause most ballasted 

fixtures to extinguish causing loss of normal 

lighting even though a total power failure has 

not occurred. 

Solid-State Transfer (Self Powered Only) 

The LPX Series Exit incorporates solid-state 

switching which eliminates corroded and pitted 

contacts or mechanical failures associated with 

relays. The switching circuit is designed to 

detect a loss of AC voltage and automatically 

energizes the lamps using DC power. Upon 

restoration of AC power, the DC power will be 

disconnected and the charger will automatically 

recharge the battery. 

Low Voltage Disconnect (Self Powered 

Only) 

When the battery's terminal voltage falls, the 

low-voltage circuitry disconnects the lighting 

load. The disconnect remains in effect until 

normal utility power is restored, preventing 

deep battery discharge. 

Test Switch/Power Indicator Light (Self 

Powered Only) 

A test switch located on the side of the exit 

permits the activation of the emergency circuit 

for a complete operational systems check. The 

Power Indicator Light provides visual assurance 

that the AC power is on. 

Sealed Nickel Cadmium Battery (Self 

Powered Only) 

Sure-Lites sealed nickel cadmium batteries are 

maintenance-free with a life expectancy of 15 

years. The sealed rechargeable nickel cadmium 

battery offers high discharge rates and stable 

performance over a wide range of 

temperatures, from 0-40° C. The specially 

designed re-sealable vent automatically controls 

cell pressure, assuring safety and reliability. This 

battery is best suited for harsh ambient 

temperatures because the electrolyte is not 

active in the electrochemical process. 

"2C" (AC Only) 

The "2C" Option enables the Exits to operate 

per the requirements of UL 924 when connected 

simultaneously to both normal and emergency 

power circuits (two circuit operation- UL 

Category FTBR-Emergency Lighting and Power 

Equipment). The " 2C" Option is a factory 

assembly change which alters the standard Exit 

such that it complies with and is UL Listed 

under the FTBR Category. This option should 

only be used for exits which are intended to be 

connected simultaneously to normal and 

emergency power circuits. Both circuits have 

universal 120/277 VAC standard. 

Eagle Eye rM Self Diagnostics Option (Self 

Powered Only) 

The self-diagnostic unit will automatically 

perform all tests required by UL924, and NFPA 

101. The system indicates the status of the exit at 

all times using the LED indicator near the test 

switch on the side of the unit. A 90 minute 

battery power (emergency mode) simulation 

test will occur randomly once every 12 months. 

A 30 second battery power simulation test will 

occur every 30 days. 

Warranty 

All Sure-Lites' products are backed by a firm 

one-year warranty against defects in material 

and workmanship. Maintenance-free, long-life, 

sealed nickel cadmium batteries carry a fifteenyear 

pro-rata warranty. 

~Lighting Specifications and dimensions subject to change without notice. ADX100035 pc 

www.cooperlightlng.com Sure·Lites • Customer First Center •1121 Highway 74 South • Peachtree City, GA 30269 •TEL 770.486.4800 • FAX 770.486.4801 

2011 -07·18 11 :35:26

W Series Ultrasonic Ceiling Sensors 

COMMERCIAL OCCUPANCY SENSORS & CONTROLS 

Turns lights on and off 

based on occupancy to 

reduce energy costs 

Adjustable time delay from 

15 seconds to 15 minutes 

Product 

Overview 

Automatic or manual-on operation 

when used with a BZ-150 Power Pack 

Description 

WattStopper’s W Series Ultrasonic Ceiling Sensors 

are versatile motion detectors that control lighting 

in a wide variety of applications. W Series Sensors 

can be used individually or as part of an integrated 

system of WattStopper lighting control products. 

Operation 

The 24 VDC W Series Sensors utilize advanced 

omni-directional, ultrasonic technology to sense 

occupancy. When movement is detected in a 

controlled area, the W Series Sensors will switch 

lights on via low-voltage wiring through to a 

WattStopper power or auxiliary pack. Once the 

area is vacated and the user-adjustable time delay 

(15 seconds to 15 minutes) has elapsed, lighting 

systems automatically switch off. 

PROJECT 

LOCATION/TYPE 

Manual-on Option 

Applications 

Hallway and 500, 1000 and 2000 

square foot coverage available 

Ideal for open office areas, 

conference rooms and restrooms 

Advanced Signal Processing 

(ASP) circuitry automatically 

adjusts detection threshold 

To comply with code or for additional control 

options, W Series Sensors can be used with 

a BZ-150 power pack for manual-on/auto-off 

control. If this option is selected, occupants utilize 

a low-voltage momentary wall switch to turn on 

lights. Lights automatically turn off after the area 

is vacated and the user-adjustable time delay has 

elapsed. 

Ultrasonic sensors effectively control offices, 

restrooms, utility areas, open office spaces and 

warehouses. The W-500A is perfect for offices, 

conference rooms, restrooms and other areas 

up to 500 square feet. The W-1000A fits in larger 

spaces, such as storage areas. The W-2000A is 

ideal for open office areas or large warehouses 

and can control partitioned open office spaces 

when configured in highly versatile zone patterns. 

The W-2000H reliably covers hallways with walls. 

Features 

• ASP circuitry helps to eliminate false on 

• Utilizes advanced omni-directional, ultrasonic 

technology for reliable occupancy detection 

• Omni-directional transmission provides 360° of 

coverage 

• Time delay adjustable from 15 seconds to 15 

minutes 

• 500, 1000, 2000-square foot and hallway coverage 

available to fit needs of specific applications 

• Optional on override by installing the Override 

Pin provided with the sensor 

• LED indicates occupancy detection 

• Qualifies for ARRA-funded public works projects 

www.wattstopper.com 

800.879.8585

Specifications • Solid state, crystal-controlled (25 kHz ± 0.005%) 

• Temperature and humidity-resistant 25 kHz 

receivers: W-500A contains one receiver, other 

models contain two receivers 

• Adjustable time delay: 15 seconds to 15 minutes 

Wiring 

Coverage, 

Installation 

& Placement 

Standard Wiring Diagram 

Neutral 

Hot 

White 

Black 

Coverage Pattern 

29' 

Power 

Pack 

Red 

Black 

Blue 

Occupancy Sensor 

Red 

Red 

Load 

Load 

Switch 

W-2000A 

20' 

W-1000A 

12' 

24' 

10' 

W-500A 

**W-2000H 

45' 25' 20' 5' 5' 15' 20' 25' 45' 

10' 

5' 

12' 

20' 

sensor 

Coverage shown represent half-step walking motion. Actual 

coverage can vary for each application depending on the shape 

and the use of space and the obstacles present. Coverage may 

be reduced if product is mounted greater than 12 feet high. 

The W-2000H drawing is not drawn to scale. Coverage is 10’ x 

90’ in a hallway; enclosed spaces enhance coverage. 

Enclosed Office Sensor Placement 

• Mounting options: ceiling tile, 4” sq. junction box 

• Max. units per power pack: B = seven; BZ = nine 

• Dimensions: 4.5” x 4.5” x 1.25” 

(115mm x 115mm x 32mm) W x L x D 

• UL listed 

• Five year warranty 

Multiple Sensor Wiring Diagram 

N White 

Hot Black 

Installation 

Time delay 

Sensitivity 

Bypass 

Power Pack 

White (neutral) 

Red (line) 

Red (load) 

BLU Control Output 

BLK Common 

RED +24VDC 

BLU Control Output 

BLK Common 

RED +24VDC 

LED 

Receiver 

Open Office Sensor Placement 

L 

O 

A 

D 



Attach sensor to a vibration-free surface. Mount the 

sensors with the receivers facing the area of coverage. 

Note: Ultrasonic sensors should be placed 4’ away from 

supply ducts, 6’ from horizontal discharge ducts, and 6” 

from power packs. 


Ordering 

Information 

Pub. No. 0114 rev. 10/2009 

Figure A Figure B For enclosed 

spaces, place 

sensors as 

in Figure A. 

Fixtures 

Fixtures Sensors placed 

Sens 

as in Figure B 

may see out the 

15' x 20' 

15' x 20' 

door and cause 

Correct 

Incorrect 

false triggers. 

Sensor 

W-500A 

W-500A-FTA 

W-500A-U 

W-1000A 

W-1000A-FTA 

W-1000A-U 

W-2000A 

W-2000A-FTA 

W-2000A-U 

W-2000H 

W-2000H-FTA 

W-2000H-U 

24 VDC 

24 VDC 

24 VDC 

24 VDC 

30' x 30' 

Catalog No. Voltage Current Coverage 

16 mA 

16 mA 

16 mA 

16 mA 

All units are white and use WattStopper power packs. 

**Coverage for an enclosed hallway is 10’ x 90’ (see pattern above). 

360°; 500 ft 2 (46.5 m 2 ) 

360°; 1000 ft 2 (92.9 m 2 ) 

360°; 2000 ft 2 (185.8 m 2 ) 

360°; 90 linear ft (27.4 m)** 

A typical layout for an open 

office space would be to place 

W-2000A sensors so they 

control zones that overlap. For 

partitioned spaces, a typical 

zone is about 25’ x 25’ with an 

overlap on the coverage that 

senses motion up to 30’ x 30’. 

www.wattstopper.com | 8 00.879.8585

DT-300 Series Dual Technology Ceiling Sensors 


Architecturally appealing 

low-profile appearance 

Auto set automatically 

selects optimal settings 

for each space 

Walk-through mode 

increases savings potential 

Ultrasonic diffusers give more 

comprehensive coverage 

Product 

Overview 

Description 

The DT-300 Series Dual Technology Ceiling 

Sensors combine the benefits of passive infrared 

(PIR) and ultrasonic technologies to detect 

occupancy. Sensors have a flat, unobtrusive 

appearance and provide 360 degrees of coverage. 

Operation 

Low voltage DT-300 Series sensors utilize a 

WattStopper power pack to turn lights on when 

both PIR and ultrasonic technologies detect 

occupancy. They can also work with a low voltage 

switch for manual-on operation. PIR technology 

senses motion via a change in infrared energy 

within the controlled area, whereas ultrasonic 

uses 40KHz high frequency ultrasound. Once lights 

are on, detection by either technology holds them 

on. When no occupancy is detected for the length 

of the time delay, lights turns off. DT-300 Series 

Sensors can also be set to trigger lights on when 

either technology or both detect occupancy, or to 

require both technologies to hold lighting on. 

PROJECT 

LOCATION/TYPE 

Auto Set 

The DT-300 requires no adjustment at installation. 

Auto set continuously monitors the controlled 

space to identify usage patterns. Based on these 

patterns, the unit automatically adjusts time delay 

and sensitivity settings for optimal performance 

and energy efficiency. Sensors assigns short 

delays (as low as five minutes) for times when the 

space is usually vacant, and longer delays (up to 30 

minutes) for busier times. 

Application 

Plug terminal wiring for 

quick and easy installation 

Accepts low-voltage 

switch input for 

manual-on operation 



DT-300 Series Dual Technology Sensors have the 

flexibility to work in a variety of applications, where 

one technology alone could cause false triggers. 

Ideal applications include classrooms, open office 

spaces, large offices and computer rooms. The 

DT-300 Series mounting system makes them 

easy to install in ceiling tiles or to junction boxes, 

providing the flexibility to be used in a wide range 

of spaces. 

Features 


800.879.8585 

• Advanced control logic based on RISC 

microcontroller provides: 

• Detection Signature Processing eliminates false 

triggers and provides immunity to RFI and EMI 

• Walk-through mode turns lights off three 

minutes after the area is initially occupied – ideal 

for brief visits such as mail delivery 

• Available with built-in light level sensor featuring 

simple, one-step setup 

• Sensors work with low-voltage momentary 

switches to provide manual control 

• Patented ultrasonic diffusion technology 

spreads coverage to a wider area 

• LEDs indicate occupancy detection 

• Uses plug terminal wiring system for quick and 

easy installation 

• Eight occupancy logic options provide the ability 

to customize control to meet application needs 

• Available with isolated relay for integration with 

BAS or HVAC 

• Qualifies for ARRA-funded public works projects

ON 

ECE 


Wiring & 

Mounting 

Controls & 

Settings 

Coverage 

• 24 VDC/VAC 

• Ultrasonic frequency: 40kHz 

• Time delays: Auto set, fixed (5, 10, 15, 20, or 30 

minutes), Walk-through/Test Modes 

• Sensitivity adjustment: Auto set; reduced 

sensitivity (PIR); variable with trim pot 

(ultrasonic) 

• Built-in light level sensor: 10 to 300 footcandles 

(107.6 to 3,229.2 lux) 

• Low-voltage, momentary switch input for 

manual on or off operation 

Wiring Diagram 

N 

Hot 

White 

Black 

Red (Line) 

Power Pack 

Red 

Black 

Blue 

Product Controls 

Ultrasonic 

sensitivity 

trimpot 

DIP switches 

Ultrasonic 

transducer 

cones 

Ultrasonic 

activity 

LED (Green) 

Light level pushbutton 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 

Momentary Switch* 

White (Neutral) 

Red (Load) 

Isolated Relay Outputs 

Common 

Normally Open Contact 

Normally Closed Contact 

Switch 

Relay Common 

N.O. 

N.C. 

Light Level (24VDC Out) 

Control (24VDC) Out 

*Momentary switch connection is optional. 

Connect only when momentary switch is installed. 


Man. Switch 

+24V (In) 

Common 

DT-300 Terminals 

Lighting 

load 

Keyhole slots 

(for mounting to 

4" octagonal box) 

Double gang 

mudring 

mounting holes 

PIR Activity 

LED (Red) 

PIR lens 

• DT-300 contains an isolated relay with N/O and 

N/C outputs; rated for 1 Amp @ 30 VDC/VAC 

• Multi-level Fresnel lens provides 360° coverage 

• Mounting options: ceiling tile; 4” octagonal J-box, 

1.5” deep 

• Max DT-300s per power pack: B=2 , BZ=3 

Max DT-305s per power pack: B=3, BZ=4 

• Dimensions: 4.50” diameter x 1.02” deep 

(114.3mm x 25.9mm) 

• UL and cUL listed 


Ceiling Mounting 

DIP Switch Settings 

= ON 

= OFF 

Occupancy 

Switch# 

Logic 1 2 3 

Standard 

Option 1 

Option 2 

Option 3 

Option 4 

Option 5 

Option 6 

Option 7 

Time Delay 4 5 6 

5 sec/SmartSet 

5 minutes 

10 min. 

10 minutes 

15 min. 

15 minutes 

20 minutes 

30 min. 

Depluggable terminal 

Spring clips (2) 

Rear 

housing 

Front 

cover 

Occupancy Logic 

Ceiling 

Trigger 

Initial 

Occupancy 

Maintain 

Occupancy 

Re-trigger 

(seconds 

duration) 

Standard Both Either 

Option 1 Either Either 

Option 2 PIR Either 

Option 3 Both Both 

Option 4 PIR PIR 

Option 5 Ultra Ultra 

Option 6 Man. Either 

Option 7 Man. Both 

LEDs 

Disabled 

Enabled 

7 

PIR Sensitivity 8 

Minimum 

Max./SmartSet 

Either(5) 

Either(5) 

Either(5) 

Both(5) 

PIR(5) 

Ultra(5) 

Either(30) 

Both(30) 


= walk-through mode 

The technology control (occupancy logic) options are 

adjustable by user. The standard setting recommended 

for most applications requires both technologies to 

trigger on, either to hold on. 

44 ft 

(13.4m) 

40 ft x 40 ft 

(12.2m x 12.2m) 

Coverage shown is maximum and represents half-step 

walking motion. Under ideal conditions, coverage for 

half-step walking motion can reach up to 1000 ft 2 . 

Ordering 

Information 

Catalog No. Voltage Current Coverage Features 

DT-300 

DT-300-U 

DT-305 

DT-305-U 

24 VDC/VAC 

24 VDC/VAC 

43 mA 

35 mA 

up to 1000 ft 2 (92.9 m 2 ) 

up to 1000 ft 2 (92.9 m 2 ) 

Isolated relay, light level 

Sensors are white and use WattStopper power packs. Current consumption can be slightly higher 

when only one sensor per power pack is used. 

Pub. No. 14907 rev.10/2009 


PW-100 Passive Infrared Wall Switch Sensor 

commercial OCCUPANCY SENSORS & Controls 

High sensitivity and dense 

coverage for exceptional 

performance 

Color-matched lens and 

low profile for appealing design 

Product 

Overview 

Description 

The PW-100 passive infrared (PIR) wall switch 

sensor can turn lights OFF and ON based on 

occupancy. It is characterized by high sensitivity to 

small and large movements, appealing aesthetics, 

and a variety of features. 

Operation 

The PW-100 replaces existing wall switches and 

fits in a single gang junction box. It uses advanced 

PIR technology to detect occupancy and keep 

lighting ON when it is needed. Once the space is 

vacated and the time delay elapses, lights automatically 

turn OFF. DIP switch settings allow for a 

variety of control options such as Auto-ON operation, 

walk-through and test modes. 

PROJECT 

LOCATION/TYPE 

Selectable operation, walk-through, test 

and presentation modes for increased 

energy savings and convenience 

Manual-on Control 

Applications 

Defaults to Manual-ON operation 

for maximum energy savings 

Part of a comprehensive line of PIR, 

Ultrasonic and Dual Technology wall 

switch sensors 

Factory default operation is for Manual-ON, so 

that users turn lights on only when needed. This 

control strategy is proven to save more energy 

than Auto-ON, and will be required where the 

ASHRAE 90.1-2010 energy code is adopted. If 

desired, the PW-100 may be reconfigured to turn 

lights on automatically. 

The PW-100 sensor is well suited for small, 

enclosed spaces with clear line of sight of the 

occupant. Common applications include small 

office, small conference room and lunch/break 

rooms. 

Features 


800.879.8585 



• Zero-crossing for long relay life 

• Vandal resistant lens combines precise coverage 

with durability 

• Choice of Manual-ON or Auto-ON operation 

• Selectable walk-through mode turns lights off 

three minutes after the room is initially occupied 

if no motion is detected after the first 30 seconds 

• Test mode allows quick and easy adjustments 

• Selectable audible and/or visual alerts for 

impending shutoff 

• In automatic mode, sensor returns automatically 

to Auto-ON after lights are turned off 

manually; ideal for presentations 


• Optional light level sensing with simple setup 

• Service mode allows sensor to operate as a 

service switch in the unlikely event of a failure 

• 2-wire and 3-wire models available for applications 

with or without neutral wire 

• Sensor coverage tested to NEMA Guide 

Publication WD 7-2000 

• Compatible with decorator wall plates 



Controls & 

Settings 

Coverage & 

Wiring 

Ordering 

Information 

Pub. No. 23304 rev. 9/2010 

• PW-100, PW-101: 120/277 VAC; 50/60 Hz 

@ 120 VAC, 0-800 W ballast or tungsten,1/6 hp 

@ 277 VAC, 0-1200 W ballast 

• PW-100-347: 347 VAC; 50/60Hz; 0-1500 W 

ballast 

• Time delays: 5, 10, 15, 20, 25 or 30 minutes, walkthrough, 

test-mode 


DEL AY 

WAL K 

PIR 50 % 


35’ 

(10.6m) 

Major motion 

Minor motion 

PIR 

Coverage 

20’ 

(6.1m) 

4’ 

(1.2m) 

0 

15’ 

(4.5m) 

PW-100-W 

PW-100-W-U 

PW-100-W-FTA 

PW-100-LA 

PW-100-I 

PW-100-I-U 

PW-100-I-FTA 

PW-100-G 

PW-100-B 

7.5’ 

(2.2m) 

TRIG GE R 

ALE R TS 

R LY 1 M AN 

R LY 2 MA N 

20’ 

(6.1m) 

35’ 

(10.6m) 

ON/OFF Button 

DIP Switches 

Detection LED 

PIR Lens 

• Coverage: Major motion 35’ x 30’ 

Minor motion 20’ x 15’ 

• Sensitivity adjustment: PIR (high/low) 

• Dimensions: 2.73” x 1.76” x 1.83” 

(69.3mm x 44.7mm x 46.5mm) L x W x D 





Test 

5 minutes 

10 minutes 

15 minutes 

20 minutes 

25 minutes 

30 minutes 

Service 

Walk-Through 

Disabled 

Enabled 

Wiring Diagrams 

Catalog No. Color Voltage Load Rating 

PW-101-W 

PW-101-LA 

PW-101-I 

PW-101-G 

PW-101-B 

PW-100-347-W 

PW-100-347-LA 

PW-100-347-I 

PW-100-347-G 

PW-100-347-B 

Order wall plate separately. 

White 

Lt. Almond 

Ivory 

Grey 

Black 

White 

Lt. Almond 

Ivory 

Grey 

Black 

White 

Lt. Almond 

Ivory 

Grey 

Black 

120/277 VAC; 50/60 Hz 

2-wire sensor; no neutral 

connection 

120/277 VAC; 50/60 Hz 

3-wire sensor; requires 

neutral connection 

Neutral 

Line 

Black 

Ground 

Green/Yellow 

Ground 

Green 

4 

ON 

Service bypasses occupancy 

& light level functions. Control the 

load manually using ON/OFF button. 

Wiring for PW-100 with no neutral 

wire run to the switch box. 

Time 

Delay 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 

Walk-Through Audible Alerts 

PIR Sensitivity 


High 

Low, 50% 

ON Mode 

Visible Not Used 

Alerts 

Visible Alert 

Disabled 

Enabled 

For best performance, WattStopper recommends 

using this sensor in spaces no larger than 15’ x 12’. 


@ 277 VAC, 0-1200 W ballast 


@ 277 VAC, 0-1200 W ballast 

347 VAC; 50/60 Hz 0-1500 W ballast 

Load 

Red 

Neutral 

ON Mode 

Auto On 

Manual On 

=ON =OFF 

=Factory Setting 

www.wattstopper.com | 8 00.879.8585 

5 

6 

Neutral White 

Line 

9 

Black 

Ground 

Green 

Audible Alert 

Disabled 

Enabled 

7 

8 

Switch 9 is not used 

Load 

Red 

Wiring for PW-101 with a neutral 

connection in the switch box. 

commercial OCCUPANCY SENSORS & controls


DW-100-24 Dual Technology Low Voltage Wall Switch 

Sensor 

Product 

Overview 

Features 


800.879.8585 

High sensitivity and dense 

coverage for exceptional 

performance 

Low voltage input 



Description 

The DW-100-24 dual technology low voltage wall 

switch sensor combines the benefits of passive 

infrared (PIR) and ultrasonic technologies to turn 

lights OFF and ON based on occupancy. It is 

characterized by high sensitivity to small and large 

movements, appealing aesthetics, and a variety of 

features. 

Operation 

Factory default operation is for Manual-ON, so that 

users turn lights on only when needed. Once the 

lights are ON, detection by either technology holds 

lights ON until occupancy is no longer detected and 

the time delay elapses. DIP switch settings allow for 

a variety of control options including Auto-ON operation, 

walk-through and test mode. By default, Auto-ON 

turns lighting on when both PIR and ultrasonic technologies 

detect occupancy. Additional DIP switch 

settings allow the user to choose which sensing 

technologies turn-ON and hold-ON the lighting. 



• Zero-crossing for long relay life 



• Choice of Manual-ON or Auto-ON operation 





• Selectable audible alert for impending shutoff 

PROJECT 

LOCATION/TYPE 




Low Voltage 

Applications 

Defaults to Manual-ON operation 

for maximum energy savings 




Low voltage wall switch sensors can offer advantages 

over line voltage models. Using an isolated 

form-C relay output, the DW-100-24 sensor 

integrates seamlessly with VAV or other building 

systems for greater energy savings. Multiple 

DW-100-24 sensors can also be connected on a 

single circuit and can switch loads that exceed the 

rating of a standard line voltage switch. In addition, 

low voltage sensor installations do not require the 

use of conduits reducing installation costs and 

making relocation easier. 

WattStopper’s dual technology has the flexibility to 

work in a variety of applications where one technology 

alone may not be sufficient. The DW-100-24 is 

the perfect choice for locations where line voltage 

wiring is not possible or for jurisdictions prohibiting 

the use of 277V switches. Common applications 

include small and executive offices, small and 

medium conference rooms and lunch/break rooms. 


to Auto-ON after lights are turned off 

manually; ideal for presentations 

• Four occupancy logic options give users the ability 










Controls & 

Settings 

Coverage & 

Wiring 

• 18-24 VDC, 24 VAC and halfwave rectified AC 

• Current consumption: 35 mA 

• DW-100-24 contains single-pole, double-throw 

isolated relay rated for 1 A @ 30 VDC 

• Time delays: 5, 15 or 30 minutes, walk-through, 

test-mode 

• Coverage: 

Major motion, PIR 35’ x 30’, Ultrasonic 20’ x 20’ 

Minor motion, PIR 20’ x 15’, Ultrasonic 15’ x 15’ 



35’ 

(10.6m) 

Major motion 

Minor motion 

PIR 

Coverage 

20’ 

(6.1m) 

ON/OFF Button 

Ultrasonic Sensitivity 

Adjustment Trimpot 

DIP Switches 

Ultrasonic Cones 

Detection LEDs 

Red = PIR 

Green = Ultrasonic 

PIR Lens 

Major motion 

Minor motion 

Ultrasonic 

Coverage 

20’ 

(6.1m) 

15’ 

(4.5m) 

• Sensitivity adjustment: PIR (high/low), 

Ultrasonic (fully variable) 

• Dimensions: 2.73” x 1.76” x 1.83” 





Time Delay 1 2 

Test 

5 minutes 

15 minutes 

30 minutes 

Walk-Through 

Disabled 

Enabled 

PIR Sensitivty 

High 

Low, 50% 

DW-100-24 Low Voltage Wiring 

White 

Neutral 

Black 

Hot 

3 

4 


+24 VDC 

ON 

Time 

Delay 

Red (Line) 

Power 

Pack 

Red 

Common 

Control Outputs 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 



Trigger 

Mode 

Standard Both 

Black 

Blue 

Normally closed contact 

Common 

Normally open contact 

Not used 

ON Mode 

Trigger Not Used 

Mode 

Initial 

Occupancy 

Maintain 

Occupancy 

Re-trigger 

(seconds 

duration) 

Either 

Either(5) 

Option A PIR Either Either(5) 

Option B PIR PIR PIR 

Option C Both Both Both 

9 

5 6 

Red 

(Load) 

Audible Alert 

Disabled 

Enabled 

ON Mode 

Auto On 

Manual On 

Switch 9 is not used 

=ON =OFF 

=Factory Setting 

Lighting 

Load 


7 

8 

commercial OCCUPANCY SENSORS & controls 

4’ 

(1.2m) 

15’ 

(4.5m) 

7.5’ 

(2.2m) 

7.5’ 

(2.2m) 

10' 

(3.0m) 

0 

20’ 

(6.1m) 

35’ 

(10.6m) 



Ordering 

Information 

Catalog No. Color Voltage 

DW-100-24-W 

DW-100-24-W-U 

DW-100-24-W-FTA 

DW-100-24-LA 

DW-100-24-I 

DW-100-24-G 

DW-100-24-B 

White 

Lt. Almond 

Ivory 

Grey 

Black 

18-24 VDC, 24 VAC and halfwave rectified AC 


Pub. No. 23104 rev. 9/2010 



DW-200 Dual Technology Dual Relay Wall Switch 

Sensor 

High sensitivity and dense coverage 

for exceptional performance 

Two relays for control of two 

separate lighting loads or circuits 

Product 

Overview 



Description 

The DW-200 dual technology wall switch sensor 

combines the benefits of passive infrared (PIR) and 

ultrasonic technologies to turn lights ON and OFF 

based on occupancy. It contains two relays for controlling 

two independent lighting loads or circuits 

and a variety of features. 

Operation 

The DW-200 fits in a single gang junction box. Each 

of the DW-200’s relays can control a separate 

lighting load. By default, when both PIR and ultrasonic 

technologies detect occupancy, relay 1 turns 

ON automatically. Detection by either technology 

holds lights ON. When occupancy is no longer 

detected and the time delay elapses, lights automatically 

turn OFF. Dual ON/OFF buttons allow the 

user to manually turn on and off each of the loads. 

DIP switch settings allow for a variety of control 

options such as Auto-ON or Manual-ON for each 

relay, walk-through, and test mode. 

PROJECT 

LOCATION/TYPE 

Bi-Level Control 

Applications 




Defaults to Auto-ON to 50% 

operation for maximum 

energy savings 




The DW-200 features a built-in light level sensor 

that controls the second (secondary) relay. If 

adequate daylight is present, the sensor will hold 

secondary lights off until daylight levels drop, 

providing increased energy savings. The DW-200 

satisfies energy codes requiring bi-level or daylight 

control switching. The two relays in the sensor 

give it the ability to control two lighting loads independently. 

This provides A/B switching where the 

user can achieve half-lighting (or another desired 

portion) from a single switch. 

The DW-200 has the flexibility for applications 

where one technology alone may not be sufficient. 

In addition, its dual relays allow bi-level switching 

or control of two loads. Applications include small 

and executive offices, small and medium conference 

rooms and lunch/break rooms. This sensor is 

also a perfect choice for ADA-compliant buildings 

due to lower mounting height requirements. 

Features 


800.879.8585 



• Zero-crossing on both relays for long relay life 



• Choice of Manual-ON or Auto-ON operation, 

selectable for each relay 





• Selectable audible alert for impending shutoff 


to Auto-ON after lights are turned off manually; 

ideal for presentations 

• Four occupancy logic options give users the ability 










Controls & 

Settings 

Coverage & 

Wiring 

• 120/277 VAC; 50/60 Hz 


@ 277 VAC, 0-1200 W ballast 

• Time delays: 5, 15 or 30 minutes, walk-through, 

test-mode 

• Coverage: 

Major motion, PIR 35’ x 30’, Ultrasonic 20’ x 20’ 

Minor motion, PIR 20’ x 15’, Ultrasonic 15’ x 15’ 



35’ 

(10.6m) 

PIR 

Coverage 

20’ 

(6.1m) 

4’ 

(1.2m) 

Major motion 

Minor motion 

0 

DELAY 

WALK 

PIR 50% 

TRIGGER 

15’ 

(4.5m) 

ALERTS 

RLY 1 MAN 

RLY 2 MAN 

7.5’ 

(2.2m) 

PIR Lens 

7.5’ 

(2.2m) 

10' 

(3.0m) 

20’ 

(6.1m) 

ON/OFF Buttons 

Relay 1 

Relay 2 

Major motion 

Minor motion 

Ultrasonic 

Coverage 

15’ 

(4.5m) 

20’ 

(6.1m) 

Ultrasonic Sensitivity 

Adjustment Trimpot 

DIP Switches 

35’ 

(10.6m) 

Ultrasonic Cones 

Detection LEDs 

Red = PIR 

Green = Ultrasonic 

• Sensitivity adjustment: PIR (high/low), 

Ultrasonic (fully variable) 

• Dimensions: 2.73” x 1.76” x 1.83” 





Time Delay 1 2 

Test 

5 minutes 

15 minutes 

30 minutes 

Walk-Through 

Disabled 

Enabled 

PIR Sensitivty 

High 

Low, 50% 

=ON 

=OFF 

Wiring Diagrams 

Neutral 

Line 

Neutral 

Neutral 

Line 1 

Line 2 

Neutral 

Black 

Blue 

White 

Ground Green 

Black 

Blue 

White 

3 

4 

ON 

Time 

Delay 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 



Trigger 

Mode 

Standard Both 

Trigger 

Mode 

Initial 

Occupancy 

Maintain 

Occupancy 

Re-trigger 

(seconds 

duration) 

Either 

Either(5) 

Option A PIR Either Either(5) 

Option B PIR PIR PIR 

Option C Both Both Both 

White 

Red 

Brown 

Red 

Brown 

Primary 

Load 

Secondary 

Load 

White 

Primary 

Load 

Secondary 

Load 

On Mode 

Relay 1 

Relay 2 

9 

5 6 

Bi-level wiring 

Audible Alert 

Disabled 

Enabled 

Relay 1 

ON Mode 

Auto On 

Manual On 

DW-203 only: 

7 

8 

Relay 2 

On Mode 9 

Auto On 

Manual On 

Factory Settings: 

All models 

1 DW-100 series 

2 DW-200 series 

Two circuit wiring 

2 

1 

commercial OCCUPANCY SENSORS & controls 



Ground Green 

Neutral 

White 

Ordering 

Information 

Catalog No. Color Voltage Load Rating 

DW-200-W 

DW-200-W-U 

DW-200-W-FTA 

DW-200-LA 

DW-200-I 

DW-200-I-U 

DW-200-I-FTA 

DW-200-G 

DW-200-B 


White 

Lt. Almond 

Ivory 

Grey 

Black 

120/277 VAC; 50/60 Hz 


@ 277 VAC, 0-1200 W ballast 

Pub. No. 23204 rev. 9/2010 


CI-300 Series Passive Infrared Ceiling Sensors 

C O M M E R C I A L O C C U P A N C Y S E N S O R S & C O N T R O L S 




selects optimal time delay 

and sensitivity settings 

Automatic or manual-on 

operation when used with 

a BZ-150 Power Pack 

Product 

Overview 

Description 

WattStopper’s CI-300 Passive Infrared (PIR) Ceiling 

Sensors automatically turn lighting on and off 

based on occupancy. The sensor mounts on the 

ceiling with a flat, low-profile appearance and 

provides 360 degrees of coverage. 

Operation 

CI-300 Series Sensors operate on 24 VDC, VAC 

or halfwave rectified. Utilizing the latest PIR 

technology, they automatically turn lighting on 

when a difference is detected between infrared 

energy from a human body in motion and the 

background space. When no occupancy is 

detected for the length of the time delay, lighting 

automatically turns off. For manual-on operation, 

the CI-300 will operate with a low-voltage 

momentary switch. 

360° coverage 

PROJECT 

LOCATION/TYPE 

Auto Set 

Applications 



Accepts low-voltage switch 

input for manual-on operation 



The CI-300 Series Sensors require no adjustment 

at installation. Auto set continuously monitors the 

controlled space to identify usage patterns. Based 

on this information, the units automatically adjust 

time delay and sensitivity settings for optimal 

performance and energy efficiency. Sensors assign 

short delays (as low as five minutes) for times 

when the space is usually vacant, and longer 

delays (up to 30 minutes) for busier times. 

CI-300 Series Sensors have the flexibility to work 

in a variety of applications that include open office 

spaces, computer rooms, conference rooms, 

classrooms and warehouses. Areas with high 

ceilings or with two-level lighting can also be 

controlled. The convenient mounting system keeps 

installation costs down to speed up the product’s 

payback. 

Features 



• Detection Signature Processing to eliminate 

false triggers and provide immunity to 

RFI and EMI 

• Walk-through Mode turns lights off three 

minutes after the area is initially occupied – 

ideal for brief visits such as mail delivery 

• Built-in light level sensor featuring simple, 

one-step setup 


• CI-300 Series Sensors work with low-voltage 

momentary switches for manual control 

• DIP switch simplifies sensor adjustments 

• Clip-mounting system simplifies ceiling tile 

installation 

• Plug terminal wiring system for quick and easy 

installation 


BAS or HVAC 



8 0 0 . 8 7 9 . 8 5 8 5

ON 

ECE 


Wiring & 

Mounting 

Controls & 

Settings 

Coverage 


• Time delays: Auto set, fixed (5, 10, 15, 20, or 30 

minutes), walk-through, test mode 

• Sensitivity adjustment: Auto set or reduced 

sensitivity 

• Multilevel Fresnel lens provides 360° coverage 

• CI-300 contains isolated relay with N/O and 

N/C outputs; rated for 1 Amp at 30 VDC/VAC 

• CI-300 built-in light level sensor: 10 to 300 

footcandles (107.6 to 3,229.2 lux) 


N 

Hot 

White 

Black 

Red 

Red (Line) 

Power Pack 

Black 

Blue 


Light level 

pushbutton 

DIP 

switches 

PIR lens 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 

Optional Momentary Switch * 

Coverage Patterns 


Red (Load) 


Common 



Switch 

Relay Common 

N.O. 

N.C. 

Light Level (24VDC Out) 


Man. Switch 

+24V (In) 

Common 

Lighting 

load 

CI-300 Terminals 

* Connect * wire Connect only wire when only when 

momentary switch is momentary switch is installed 

Keyhole slots 



Double gang 

mudring 


PIR Activity 

LED (Green) 

• Mounting options: ceiling tile; 4” square 

junction box with double-gang mud ring 

• Max. CI-300s per power pack: B=5, BZ=7 

Max. CI-305s per power pack: B=12, BZ=16 

• Dimensions: 4.5” x 1.02” 

(114.3mm x 25.9mm) diameter x depth 





On Mode 1 

Auto On 

Manual On 

Override 2 

Normal 

Override 



5 minutes 

10 min. 

10 minutes 

15 min. 

15 minutes 

20 minutes 

30 min. 




Rear 

housing 

Front 

cover 

Ceiling 

LED 

Disabled 

Enabled 

Sensitivity 

Minimum 

Max/Smartset 

= Factory Setting 

= ON 

= OFF 

6 

7 

C O M M E R C I A L O C C U P A N C Y S E N S O R S & C O N T R O L S 

Extended Range Lens 

(Standard) 

CI-300, CI-305 

High Density Lens 

CI-300-1, CI-305-1 

44 ft 

13.4m 

24 ft 

7.3m 

8 ft 

8 ft 

Typical 

desk-top 

level 

Typical 

desk-top 

level 

Ordering 

Information 

Pub. No. 16805 rev. 10/2009 

22 ft 13 ft 7 ft 3 ft 0 3 ft 7 ft 13 ft 22 ft 

12 ft 9 ft 7 ft 5 ft 3 ft 0 3 ft 5 ft 7 ft 9 ft 12 ft 

Catalog No. Voltage Current Coverage Features 

CI-300 

CI-300-1 

CI-305 

CI-305-1 

24 VDC 

24 VDC 

24 VDC 

24 VDC 

20 mA 

20 mA 

9 mA 

9 mA 

360°; up to 1200 ft 2 (111.5 m 2 ) 

360°; up to 500 ft 2 (46.5 m 2 ) 

360°; up to 1200 ft 2 (111.5 m 2 ) 

360°; up to 500 ft 2 (46.5 m 2 ) 



Sensors are white. 

www.wattstopper.com | 8 0 0 . 8 7 9 . 8 5 8 5

UT-300 Series Ultrasonic Ceiling Sensors 


Product 

Overview 




selects optimal time 

delay and sensitivity 

Ultrasonic diffusers give more 

comprehensive coverage 

Description 

WattStopper’s UT-300 Ultrasonic Ceiling Sensors 

automatically turn lighting on and off based on 

occupancy. The sensors mount on the ceiling with 

a flat, unobtrusive appearance and provides 360° 

coverage. 

Operation 

UT-300 Series Sensors operate on 24 VDC, 

VAC or halfwave rectified. They use 40 KHz 

high frequency ultrasound to sense occupancy 

and automatically turn lighting on. When no 

occupancy is detected for the length of the 

time delay, lighting automatically turns off. For 

manual-on operation, the units work with a lowvoltage 

momentary switch. 

PROJECT 

LOCATION/TYPE 

Auto set 

The UT-300 requires no adjustment at installation. 

Auto set continuously monitors the controlled 

space to identify usage patterns. Based on 

these patterns, UT sensors automatically adjust 

time delay and sensitivity settings for optimal 

performance and energy efficiency. The sensors 

assign short delays (as low as five minutes) for 

times when the space is usually vacant, and longer 

delays (up to 30 minutes) for busier times. 

Application 

Accepts low-voltage switch 

input for manual-on operation 







UT-300 Series Sensors offer excellent control of 

lighting for many spaces, including restrooms, 

large offices, open office areas and hallways. They 

can control large partitioned office spaces when 

configured in zone patterns. Unit performance 

combined with ease of installation will provide fast 

payback and many years of energy savings. 

Features 



• Advanced Signal Processing eliminates false 

triggers and provides immunity to RFI and 

EMI 

• Walk-through mode turns lights off three 

minutes after the area is initially occupied – 

ideal for brief visits such as mail delivery 


• Coverage 500-2,000 square feet 


BAS or HVAC 

• DIP switch simplifies sensor adjustments 

• Patented ultrasonic diffusion technology 

spreads coverage to a wider area 

• UT-300 Series Sensors work with low-voltage 

momentary switches for manual control 

• Clip mounting system makes ceiling tile 

installation simple 

• Uses plug terminal wiring system for quick and 

easy installation 



800.879.8585

ON 

ECE 


Wiring & 

Mounting 

Controls & 

Settings 

Coverage & 

Placement 


• Time delays: Auto set, fixed (5, 10, 15, 20 or 30 

minutes), Walk-through/Test Modes 

• Ultrasonic frequency: 40 kHz 

• UT-300 contains isolated relay with N/O and 

N/C outputs; rated for 1 Amp at 30 VDC/VAC 

• Mounting options: ceiling tile; 4” square junction 


N 

Hot 

White 

Black 


Ultrasonic 

transducer 

cones 

Ultrasonic 

activity 

LED (Green) 

Red (Line) 

Power Pack 

Red 

Black 

Blue 

DIP switches 

OPTIONAL Momentary Switch* 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 

Coverage Patterns 


Red (Load) 


Common 



Switch 


Man. Switch 

25' 20' 15' 10' 5' 0' 5' 10' 15' 20' 25' 

20' 

15' 

10' 

5' 

0' 

5' 

10' 

15' 

20' 

* Connect * wire 

Connect 

only 

wire 

when 

only momentary switch is installed 

momentary switch is installed 

UT-300/355-3 UT-355-3 

UT-300/355-2 UT-355-2 

UT-300/355-1 UT-355-1 

Relay Common 

N.O. 

N.C. 

+24V (In) 

Common 

Lighting 

load 

UT-300 Terminals 

Keyhole slots 



Ultrasonic 

sensitivity 

trimpot 

Double gang 

mudring 


Coverages shown 

represent halfstep 

walking 

motion when 

sensor is mounted 

8’-10’ high. 

Actual coverage 

can vary for 

each application 

depending on the 

shape and use 

of space and the 

obstacles present. 

box with double-gang mud ring 

• Max. UT-300s per power pack: B=2, BZ=3 

Max. UT-305s per power pack: B=3, BZ=4 

• Dimensions: 4.5” x 1” (114.3mm x 25.9mm) 

diameter x depth 





On Mode 1 

Auto On 

Manual On 

Override 2 

Normal 

Override 



5 minutes 

10 minutes 

10 minutes 

15 minutes 

15 minutes 

20 minutes 

30 minutes 


Placement 

30' x 30' 



Rear 

housing 

Front 

cover 

LED 

Disabled 

Enabled 

Ceiling 

6 

= Factory Setting 

= ON 

= OFF 

Typical layout for open 

office space would be to 

place UT-300-3 sensors 

so they control zones that 

overlap. For partitioned 

spaces, a typical zone is 

about 25’ x 25’ with an 

overlap on the coverage 

up to 30’ x 30’. 


25' 

Ordering 

Information 

Pub. No. 16906 rev. 10/2009 

Catalog No. Voltage Current Coverage Feature 

UT-300-1 

UT-300-1-U 

UT-300-2 

UT-300-2-U 

UT-300-3 

UT-300-3-U 

UT-305-1 

UT-305-2 

UT-305-3 

24 VDC 

24 VDC 

24 VDC 

24 VDC 

24 VDC 

24 VDC 

40 mA 

40 mA 

45 mA 

30 mA 

30 mA 

35 mA 

500 ft 2 (46.5 m 2 ) 

1000 ft 2 (92.9 m 2 ) 

2000 ft 2 (185.8 m 2 ) 

500 ft 2 (46.5 m 2 ) 

1000 ft 2 (92.9 m 2 ) 

2000 ft 2 (185.8 m 2 ) 

All units are white and use WattStopper power packs. 

Current consumption can be slightly higher when only one sensor per power pack is used. 

Isolated relay 




Surge and Signal Protection 

for Business-Critical Continuity 

Liebert Interceptor ® 

II TVSS 

Setting the Standard for Facility-Wide Protection

The Capacity to Handle the Surges; 

The Footprint that Saves You Space 

Today’s businesses demand more protection from their surge suppression 

products. A power disturbance can strike at any time, causing a loss of data, 

productivity and money. Customers require systems that will consistently 

provide clean power and safeguard their equipment from the substantial 

costs of power disturbances. 

Features 

■ Built-In-Testing - The Liebert Interceptor II comes equipped with a 

built-in testing circuit that monitors MOV/fuse link status. The built-in 

testing can be operated by the simple push of a button on the display 

panel, and testing can occur at any voltage within the continuous 

operating voltage range, even during a transient event. No other surge 

manufacturer offers this monitoring capability as a standard feature. 

■ Precise Current Sharing Assures Performance and Long Life - High 

Energy current diversion is handled by a sophisticated parallel system 

of computer matched, custom metal-oxide varistor (MOV) array. 

■ Protection From Exteme Voltage Conditions - Individual 

component-level fusing coordinates to ensure each unit is safeguarded. 

■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

Lowest Clamping Voltages - through use of low impedance copper 

conduction plates. 

Real-time Status Indication - internal and external LED's, audible 

alarms and Form C contacts activate when protection is reduced or 

phase loss/undervoltage conditions are detected. 

Best-in-Class Capacitive Filtering - for excellent ringwave transient 

attenuation. 

Stringent 3rd Party Testing - for surge current capacity, life cycle, 

EMI/RFI noise rejection, fault interrupt current and industry safety 

approvals. 

10-Year Warranty for parts and 5-Year on-site labor 

2

Liebert Interceptor ® II Surge Suppression 160kA - 1000kA. 

Connection Type 

Agency Listings 

Operating Voltage Range + / - 15% 

Fault Current Rating (AIC) 

Parallel Connected 

UL1449, UL1283, cUL, FCC Part 15 Class B 

200kAIC 

Operating Frequency Range 47 - 63 Hertz 

50 ohm EMI/RFI Attenuation 100kHz 41 dB 

1MHz 31 dB 

10MHz 35 dB 

100MHz 53 dB 

Protection Modes 

All applicable modes standard (Line to Neutral, Line 

to Ground, Neutral to Ground and Line to Line) 

Response Time 

Temperature 

Operating Humidity 

Status Indication 

Enclosure 

Altitude 

Audible Noise 

Warranty 

Ensuring The High Availability Of 

Mission-Critical Data And Applications. 

Emerson Network Power, the global leader in enabling business-critical continuity, 

ensures network resiliency and adaptability through a family of technologies — 

including Liebert power and cooling technologies — that protect and support 

business-critical systems. Liebert solutions employ an adaptive architecture that 

responds to changes in criticality, density and capacity. Enterprises benefit 

from greater IT system availability, operational flexibility, and reduced capital 

equipment and operating costs. 

Liebert Corporation 

1050 Dearborn Drive 

P.O. Box 29186 

Columbus, Ohio 43229 

800 877 9222 Phone (U.S. & 

Canada Only) 

614 888 0246 Phone (Outside U.S.) 

614 841 6022 FAX 

Via Leonardo Da Vinci 8 

Zona Industriale Tognana 

35028 Piove Di Sacco (PD) 

Italy 

39 049 9719 111 Phone 

39 049 5841 257 FAX 

Emerson Network Power Asia Pacific 

7/F., Dah Sing Financial Centre 

108 Gloucester Rd, Wanchai 

Hong Kong 

852 25722201 Phone 

852 28029250 FAX 

liebert.com 

Technical Support 

800 288 6169 Toll-Free 

607 724 2484 Phone 

607 722 8713 Fax 

While every precaution has been taken to ensure accuracy and 

completeness in this literature, Liebert Corporation assumes no 

responsibility, and disclaims all liability for damages resulting 

from use of this information or for any errors or omissions. 

© 2006 Liebert Corporation. All rights reserved throughout 

the world. Specifications subject to change without notice. 

All names referred to are trademarks or registered trademarks 

of their respective owners. 

® Liebert and the Liebert logo are registered trademarks 

of the Liebert Corporation. 

SL-22005 (R4/06) 

Printed in USA 

Emerson Network Power. 

The global leader in enabling Business-Critical Continuity. 

AC Power Systems Embedded Power 

Connectivity 

Integrated Cabinet Solutions 

DC Power Systems Outside Plant 

Power Switching & Controls 

Precision Cooling 

Services 

EmersonNetworkPower.com 

Site Monitoring 

Surge & Signal Protection 

Emerson Network Power and the Emerson Network Power logo are trademarks and service marks of Emerson Electric Co. ©2006 Emerson Electric Co.

specifications - Dunn County

You also want an ePaper? Increase the reach of your titles

Delete template?

Save as template?